221-40803E

Dec. 2018

Gas Chromatograph

GC-2010 Plus

Instruction Manual
Read this manual thoroughly before you use the product.
Keep this manual for future reference.
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Introduction

Read this Instruction Manual thoroughly before using the

product.
Thank you for purchasing this product.
This manual describes the installation, operation, usage cautions, and accessories and options for this
product. Read this manual thoroughly before using the product and operate the product in accordance
with the instructions in this manual.
Keep this manual for future reference.

IMPORTANT
• If the user or usage location changes, ensure that this Instruction Manual is always kept together
with the product.
• If this manual or a product warning label is lost or damaged, immediately contact your Shimadzu
representative to request a replacement.
• To ensure safe operation, read all Safety Instructions before using the product.
• To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative if product installation, adjustment,
re-installation (after the product is moved), or repair is required.

■ Notice
• Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the
part of the vendor.
• Any errors or omissions which may have occurred in this manual despite the utmost care taken in its
production will be corrected as soon as possible, although not necessarily immediately after detection.
• All rights are reserved, including those to reproduce this manual or parts thereof in any form without
permission from Shimadzu Corporation.
• CHROMATOPAC is a trademark of Shimadzu Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Third-party trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities or
their products/services, whether or not they are used with trademark symbol "TM" or "®".

© 2009-2018 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.

Original version is approved in English.

I
 WARNING LABELS

Label conventions for this manual are provided below.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

WARNING could result in serious injury or possibly death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

CAUTION may result in minor to moderate injury or equipment damage.

Emphasizes additional information that is provided to ensure the

NOTE proper use of this product.

Safety Precautions

The GC-2010 Plus Gas Chromatograph is a qualitative and quantitative analysis system.
Review the following precautions for safe operation.

1. Use the system only for its intended purpose.

2. Follow the procedures described in this Instruction Manual.
3. Observe all warnings and precautions.
4. Never disassemble or modify the system without our permission.
5. Contact your Shimadzu representative for system repairs.
6. Contact your Shimadzu representative if product installation, adjustment, or re-installation (after
the product is moved) is required.

7. Wear safety glasses during maintenance and/or inspection of the syringes, the glass liners, the
columns and the detectors.

II
 System WARNING labels

WARNING
DO NOT TOUCH
High temperature injection ports, detectors and upper cover.
Fire
Danger of fire. Do not put anything on the top cover.
Warning label

WARNING
DO NOT TOUCH
The rear panel may be hot and can cause burn.

Warning label

WARNING
WARNING WHEN USING HYDROGEN
Shut off hydrogen and cap unused column fittings to prevent accumulation of
hydrogen in oven and possible explosion.
Warning label

III
 WARNING
HOT AIR EXHAUST
Keep temperature sensitive materials away from opening.
Warning
label

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
Disconnect power cable before removing cover. Refer servicing to qualified
service personnel.

Warning label

IV
 WARNING
WARNINGS WHEN USING HYDROGEN
When hydrogen gas is in use, care should be exercised in order to prevent an
accident.
1.Connect gas lines correctly. Do not connect the hydrogen line to the air inlet, or
hydrogen will leak excessively.
To prevent an improper connection, the GC-2010 Plus is equipped with a right-handed
thread at the air inlet joint and a left-handed thread at the hydrogen inlet joint.
2.When the device is not in use, the main valve of the hydrogen gas cylinder or
generator must be closed. Also, make sure that there is no gas leakage from
the main valve of the supply.
3.The flow line for hydrogen gas should be checked for leakage whenever it is used.
4.To prevent buildup of explosive concentrations in case the hydrogen gas leaks,
the room in which the device is used should be well ventilated.
5.When analysis is complete, close the main valve of the hydrogen gas container
immediately before performing other procedures.

Warning label

V
 Emergency Procedures

Follow these procedures in the event of an emergency (If an abnormality is detected in the GC-
2010 Plus gas chromatograph, for example).
Before using the system again after an emergency, inspect the system. Contact your Shimadzu repre-
sentative if necessary.

1.Turn off the power switch of the GC-2010 Plus gas chromatograph.
2.Turn off all power switches of peripheral units.
3.Close the main valve of the carrier gas, hydrogen, air and makeup gas supply.
4.Shut down the power supply.
• If the power cable is tightened with screws to a power distribution board, turn
off the switch provided on the power distribution board.
• If the power cable is connected through a plug, unplug it.

Power cable

GC-2010 Plus

Power switch

Fig. Power switch and power cable

VI
 Caution
Increasing the oven temperature immediately after installation may generate an
odor. The odor is generated from the glue (material: corn starch etc.) contained in
the insulation material. Although the odor dissipates after several hours, thor-
oughly ventilate the work area.

During a Power Outage

Take the following measures in the event of a power outage.

1. Immediately turn OFF the supply of hydrogen gas.

2. Switch OFF power to the GC
3. Open all windows and doors of the room to thoroughly ventilate it.
4. After the power is reinstated, use the standard procedure to start the GC.

VII
 Action for Environment
Equipment Disposal:
Dispose of the GC unit using a qualified industrial waste management company, in compliance with the
applicable laws in the country where it is used.

To all user of Shimadzu equipment in the European Union:

Equipment marked with this symbol indicates that it was sold on or after 13th August
2005, which means it should not be disposed of with general household waste. Note
that our equipment is for industrial/professional use only.

WEEE Mark

Contact Shimadzu service representative when the equipment has reached the end of its life.
They will advise you regarding the equipment take-back.

With your co-operation we are aiming to reduce contamination from waste electronic and electrical
equipment and preserve natural resource through re-use and recycling.
Do not hesitate to ask Shimadzu service representative, if you require further information.

VIII
 Warranty

Shimadzu provides the following warranty for this product.

1. Period: Please contact your Shimadzu representative for information about the period of this
warranty.

2. Description: If a product/part failure occurs for reasons attributable to Shimadzu during the warranty
period, Shimadzu will repair or replace the product/part free of charge. However, in the
case of products which are usually available on the market only for a short time, such
as personal computers and their peripherals/parts, Shimadzu may not be able to
provide identical replacement products.

3. Limitation of 1. In no event will Shimadzu be liable for any lost revenue, profit or data, or for special,
Liability: indirect, consequential, incidental or punitive damages, however caused regardless
of the theory of liability, arising out of or related to the use of or inability to use the
product, even if Shimadzu has been advised of the possibility of such damage.
2. In no event will Shimadzu's liability to you, whether in contract, tort (including
negligence), or otherwise, exceed the amount you paid for the product.

4. Exceptions: Failures caused by the following are excluded from the warranty, even if they occur
during the warranty period.
1. Improper product handling
2. Repairs or modifications performed by parties other than Shimadzu or Shimadzu
designated companies
3. Product use in combination with hardware or software other than that designated
by Shimadzu
4. Computer viruses leading to device failures and damage to data and software,
including the product's basic software
5. Power failures, including power outages and sudden voltage drops, leading to
device failures and damage to data and software, including the product's basic
software
6. Turning OFF the product without following the proper shutdown procedure
leading to device failures and damage to data and software, including the
product's basic software
7. Reasons unrelated to the product itself
8. Product use in harsh environments, such as those subject to high temperatures
or humidity levels, corrosive gases, or strong vibrations
9. Fires, earthquakes, or any other act of nature, contamination by radioactive or
hazardous substances, or any other force majeure event, including wars, riots,
and crimes
10. Product movement or transportation after installation
11. Consumables and equivalent items
Recording media such as CD-ROMs are considered consumable items.
* If there is a document such as a warranty provided with the product, or there
is a separate contract agreed upon that includes warranty conditions, the
provisions of those documents shall apply.

IX
After-Sales Service and Availability of Replacement Parts

After-Sales If any problem occurs with this product, perform an inspection and take appropriate
Service corrective action as described in "19 Troubleshooting" of this manual.
If the problem persists, or the symptoms are not covered in the troubleshooting section,
contact your Shimadzu representative.

Replacement Replacement parts for this product will be available for a period of seven (7) years after
Parts Availability the product is discontinued. Thereafter, such parts may cease to be available.
If Shimadzu receives notice of the discontinuation of units or parts, the necessary
quantity for the above period is immediately calculated and secured. However, such
units or parts may cease to be available within seven years after the discontinuation of
the product, depending on the conditions of individual manufacturers and on changes
in the quantity required.

Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment

In order to maintain the instrument's performance and obtain accurate measurement data, daily
inspection and periodic inspection are necessary.
• For daily maintenance, inspection, and replacement parts, see "18 Maintenance and Inspection" of
this Instruction Manual.
• Periodic inspection should be requested to your Shimadzu representative.
• Replacement cycles described for periodic replacement parts are rough estimate.
Replacement may be required earlier than the described replacement cycles depending on usage
environment and frequency.

Disposal Precautions

Dispose of the GC unit using a qualified industrial waste management company, in compliance with the
applicable laws in the country where it is used.
Note also that the GC unit contains batteries (location: PCBs). Dispose of the unit appropriately and in
accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region.

■ For California, USA Only

Caution
This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

X
 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Descriptions in this section apply only to the following models:

• 221-73020-58 GC-2010 Plus AF

• 221-73021-58 GC-2010 Plus ATF
• 221-73022-58 GC-2010 Plus AT
• 221-73023-58 GC-2010 Plus A
• 221-73027-58 GC-2010 Plus AF/OCI
This product complies with European standard EN61326-1, class A for electromagnetic interference
(Emissions) and basic electromagnetic environment requirement (Table1) for electromagnetic susceptibility
(Immunity).

■ EN61326-1 Emissions (Electromagnetic Interference)

This is a class A product and is not designed for use in a residential environment.
When this product causes an electromagnetic disturbance to devices being used near this product,
create an appropriate distance between those devices and this product in order to eliminate the
disturbance.

■ EN61326-1 Immunity (Electromagnetic Susceptibility)

Compliance with this standard does not ensure that the product can operate at a level of electromagnetic
interference that is stronger than the level tested. Interference stronger than the values specified in the
standard may cause the product to malfunction.

When installing or using this product, especially in an industrial location:

Locate the product away from any device emitting strong levels of electromagnetic noise.
Use a power source that is separated from the power source of any device emitting strong levels of
electromagnetic noise.

To prevent static electricity:

Prior to touching the product, the operator should be sure to discharge the static electricity stored in their
body by first touching a grounded metallic structure.
Do not touch any terminals or connectors that are not connected to cables while the product is turned ON.

XI
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Contents
Introduction
WARNING LABELS
Safety Precautions
System WARNING labels
Emergency Procedures
During a Power Outage
Action for Environment
Warranty
After-Sales Service and Availability of Replacement Parts
Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment
Disposal Precautions
Electromagnetic Compatibility

1 Overview

1.1 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1.1 Basic performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.3 High speed analysis enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.1 Column oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.2 Temperature program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.3 Injection port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.4 Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.5 Auxiliary heated zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.6 Carrier gas flow control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.7 Detector gas flow controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.8 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.9 Dimensions, weight and power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2 Installation

2.1 Shipment Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.2 Component description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3 Installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3.1 Ambient temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3.2 Installation location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3.3 Corrosive gas and dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3.4 Electro-magnetic fields and power supply noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3.5 Other precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3.6 Rear clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.7 Left clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.4 Moving the GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.5 Power supply and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.6 Gas supply plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

GC-2010 Plus i
 Contents
2.7 Connecting external device cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3 AFC, APC

3.1 AFC and APC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.2 Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.3 Flow Line Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4 AFC and APC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.1 AFC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.2 Split mode: “SPLIT” (AFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.3 Split mode: “SPLITLESS” (AFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.4.4 Split mode: “DIRECT” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.4.5 Control by APC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.5 AFC and APC Control Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.6 AFC and APC Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

4 Installing the column

4.1 Capillary Column Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.2 Location of Heated Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.3 Installing the column hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.4 Proper Placement of graphite Ferrules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.4.1 Placing graphite ferrules on the column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.4.2 Positioning the graphite ferrule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.5 Installing and removing the capillary column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4.5.1 Installing the capillary column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.5.2 Removing the capillary column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

5 Basic Key Operation

5.1 Keypad Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

5.1.1 Keypad operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.1.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.1.3 Status indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

5.2 Adjusting The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

5.3 Basic Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.3.1 Screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.3.2 Moving the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.3.3 Entering numeric values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.3.4 Changing a selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.3.5 Changing item names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5.4 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

5.4.1 Screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.4.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ii GC-2010 Plus
 Contents

6 Analysis Flow Chart

6.1 Analysis Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

6.1.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.1.2 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.1.3 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]

7.1 [SYSTEM] Key Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

7.1.1 Screen Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.1.2 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.1.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

7.2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

7.2.1 Screen Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.2.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.2.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

7.3 Specifying Start Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

7.3.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.3.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.3.3 Example: starting the system with carrier gas flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

7.4 Specifying the Stop Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

7.4.1 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.4.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.4.3 System shut down examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management

8.1 [SET] Key Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

8.1.1 Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8.1.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8.1.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

8.2 File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

8.2.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.2.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.2.3 Copying a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.2.4 Renaming a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.2.5 Initializing a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

8.3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components ([Line Config]) . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

8.3.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

8.4 Changing Items Displayed with [Customiz] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

8.4.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

9 Monitoring the GC

9.1 [MONIT] key Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

9.1.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
9.1.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
9.1.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

GC-2010 Plus iii

 Contents
9.2 Monitoring the Temperature with [Temp Mon] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
9.2.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
9.2.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

9.3 Monitoring the Flow Rate with [Flow Mon] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

9.3.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.3.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

9.4 Zero Point Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

9.4.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

10 Starting and Stopping Analysis

10.1 Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

10.1.1 Verifying the gas chromatograph status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
10.1.2 Making manual injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
10.1.3 Starting the analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

10.2 Terminating the Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

10.2.1 Terminating the analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.2.2 External devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program

11.1 [COL] Key Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

11.1.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
11.1.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
11.1.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

11.2 Temperature Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

11.2.1 Isothermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
11.2.2 Programmed analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
11.2.3 Creating a temperature program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

12 Injection Port

12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

12.2 Glass Insert and Packing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
12.3 Removing and inserting the glass insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
12.4 Removing and installing the septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
12.5.1 Setting the temperature with [INJ] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12.5.2 Setting the flow rate with [FLOW] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
12.5.3 Setting column parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
12.5.4 Gas saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
12.5.5 Pressure program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12.5.6 Creating a Flow rate program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
12.5.7 Split ratio program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
12.5.8 Septum purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
12.5.9 High pressure injection splitter mode and back flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

12.6 Direct Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

12.6.1 Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
12.6.2 Setting the flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

iv GC-2010 Plus
 Contents
12.7 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

13 Detector

13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
13.2.1 Principle of FID operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
13.2.2 Setting the detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
13.2.3 Setting the detector gas flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

13.3.1 Principle of TCD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
13.3.2 Setting the detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.3.3 Setting the detector gas flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

13.4 Filter Signal Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

13.5 Setting the Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.5.1 Detector signal output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.5.2 Background compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
13.5.3 Detector signal subtraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

14 Diagnosis

14.1 Standard Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

14.1.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
14.1.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
14.1.3 Diagnosis Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
14.1.4 Diagnosis parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
14.1.5 Starting the diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
14.1.6 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
14.1.7 Stopping/exiting the diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
14.1.8 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
14.1.9 Diagnosis results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
14.1.10 PF menu list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

14.2 Log Reading Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

14.2.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.2.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.2.3 GC Operation log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
14.2.4 Analysis log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
14.2.5 Parameter log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.2.6 Error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
14.2.7 Diagnostic log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

14.3 Analysis Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

14.3.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
14.3.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
14.3.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

14.4 Coolant Consumption Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

14.4.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
14.4.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
14.4.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

14.5 Standard Installation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

14.5.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
14.5.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
14.5.3 Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

GC-2010 Plus v
 Contents
14.6 Peak Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
14.6.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
14.6.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
14.6.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

15 Optional Devices

15.1 Auto Injector Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

15.1.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
15.1.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
15.1.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
15.1.4 AOC priority analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
15.1.5 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
15.1.6 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
15.1.7 Other AOC parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
15.1.8 Other AOC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
15.1.9 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
15.1.10 Auto-sampler carousel and other optional parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
15.1.11 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
15.1.12 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

15.2 Setting AUX Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

15.2.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
15.2.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
15.2.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
15.2.4 On/Off setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
15.2.5 On/Off parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

15.3 Setting the AUX APC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

15.3.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
15.3.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
15.3.3 PF menu list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
15.3.4 Setting a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
15.3.5 Using restrictor tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
15.3.6 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

15.4 Setting the CRG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

15.4.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
15.4.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
15.4.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

16 Special Functions

16.1 Time Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

16.1.1 Description Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
16.1.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
16.1.3 Setting the mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
16.1.4 Editing a time schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
16.1.5 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
16.1.6 Creating a new time schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
16.1.7 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
16.1.8 Parameters available in the time scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
16.1.9 Changing schedule parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
16.1.10 Time schedule example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
16.1.11 Starting/stopping a time schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
16.1.12 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
16.1.13 Copying and deleting a time schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

vi GC-2010 Plus
 Contents
16.2 Batch Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
16.2.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
16.2.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
16.2.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
16.2.4 Creating a new batch schedule (for single injector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
16.2.5 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
16.2.6 PF menu list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
16.2.7 Creating a new batch schedule (for dual injectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
16.2.8 Editing a batch schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
16.2.9 Batch processing Setup example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

16.3 Time Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

16.3.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
16.3.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
16.3.3 Creating a new time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
16.3.4 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
16.3.5 Time Program parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
16.3.6 Editing a time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
16.3.7 Time program setup example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

16.4 Pre-Run Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

16.4.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
16.4.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
16.4.3 Creating a new Pre-Run program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
16.4.4 Editing a Pre-Run program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
16.4.5 After Pre-Run program is finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
16.4.6 Pre-Run Program set up example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

16.5 Direct Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

16.5.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
16.5.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
16.5.3 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

16.6 GC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

16.6.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
16.6.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
16.6.3 Setting the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
16.6.4 Setting the maximum temperature limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
16.6.5 Setting transmission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
16.6.6 Setting the Ready Check Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
16.6.7 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
16.6.8 Customizing Component Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
16.6.9 Setting the link device code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
16.6.10 Temperature offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
16.6.11 Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

16.7 Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

16.7.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
16.7.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
16.7.3 INSTALLATION (POSITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
16.7.4 INSTALLATION (PIPING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
16.7.5 INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
16.7.6 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

16.8 Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

16.8.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
16.8.2 PF menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
16.8.3 Timing with inverse measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

16.9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

16.9.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
16.9.2 Key locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
16.9.3 Parameter locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

GC-2010 Plus vii

 Contents
16.10 ROM Version No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
16.10.1 Screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
16.10.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

17 Printing

17.1 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

17.1.1 Connection to Chromatopac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
17.1.2 Parameters to be printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

17.2 AOC commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

17.3 Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
17.4 Event No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

18 Maintenance and Inspection

18.1 Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

18.1.1 Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
18.1.2 O-ring for glass insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
18.1.3 Glass insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
18.1.4 Graphite ferrule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
18.1.5 Capillary column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
18.1.6 Flow controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
18.1.7 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
18.1.8 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

18.2 Inspection and Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

18.2.1 Glass insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.2.2 Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.2.3 O-ring for glass insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.2.4 Graphite ferrule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.2.5 Capillary column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.2.6 Flow controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.2.7 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.2.8 Cleaning the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

18.3 Inspection and Maintenance: Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

18.3.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
18.3.2 Inspection/maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

18.4 Inspection and Maintenance: O-ring for glass insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

18.4.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
18.4.2 Inspection/maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

18.5 Inspection and Maintenance: Glass Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

18.5.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
18.5.2 Inspection/maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

18.6 Inspection and Maintenance: Graphite Ferrule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

18.6.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
18.6.2 Inspection/maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

18.7 Inspection and Maintenance: Capillary Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

18.7.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
18.7.2 Inspection/maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

18.8 Inspection and Maintenance: Flow Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

18.8.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
18.8.2 Inspection/maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

viii GC-2010 Plus

 Contents
18.9 Inspection and Maintenance: FID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
18.9.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
18.9.2 Inspection/maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

18.10 Check of Heat Leak from the GC-2010 Column Oven Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

19 Troubleshooting

19.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

19.1.1 Gas and pressure settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
19.1.2 Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
19.1.3 Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
19.1.4 Chromatogram and data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
19.1.5 GC display (In cases where in the setting screen is reinitialized each time power is
turned on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

19.2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

19.2.1 System errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
19.2.2 Operations errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
19.2.3 Optional device error (AOC-20i/s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
19.2.4 Communication errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
19.2.5 Detector errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
19.2.6 Other errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
19.2.7 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

20 Appendix

20.1 Key Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

21 Index

GC-2010 Plus ix
 Contents

This page is intentionally left blank.

x GC-2010 Plus
 11.1
1 Overview
. 1.1 System Features

The GC-2010 Plus is a state-of-the-art, advanced gas chromatograph which embraces the con-
cepts of flexibility, user-friendliness, and security. It meets and exceeds user demands for high
performance, advanced (functionality), high reliability, and high productivity.
These concepts are illustrated by the following features, which include high processing speed and
digitized signals.

1.1.1 Basic performance

(1) Improved reproducibility

Good reproducibility is obtained even for solvents like acetone, which have large expan-
sion volumes.
(2) Reduced differences among units
Sensitivity differences between detectors have been reduced.
(3) Improved detector sensitivity
The sensitivity of the detectors are better than previous models.
(4) Increased oven cooling speed
The oven cooling speed is faster than previous models.

1.1.2 Operation

(1) Intelligent diagnosis

The diagnosis function has improved considerably, with an advanced alarm system.
(2) Large LCD (liquid crystal display)
An improved, much larger 16-line LCD (240 × 320 dots), means that analysis parame-
ters and programs can now be listed, improving operation. The display can switch
between Japanese and English.

1.1.3 High speed analysis enabled

(1) Digitized detector signals

Detector signals are digitized to enable high speed analysis.
(2) High pressure-ready AFC
The inlet pressure can be set up to 970 kPa and the total flow rate can be set up to
1,200 ml/min as standard in order to be ready to use a column with a small inner
diameter (smaller than 0.2 mm I.D.) in high speed analysis.

GC-2010 Plus 1
 11.2
1 Overview
. 1.2 Specifications

1.2.1 Column oven

Dimensions (mm) : 280 (W) × 280 (H) × 175 (D) (excluding Projections)
Volume (L) : 13.7
Range of temperature : Room temperature +4 °C to 450 °C
-50 °C to 450 °C (When liquid carbon dioxide gas is used.)
Accuracy of temperature : ±1 % (K) (Calibrated at 0.01 °C)
Deviation of temperature : Within 2 °C (on a 200 mm diameter column holder)
Stability of temperature : Within ±0.05 °C
Temperature coefficient : 0.01 °C/ °C
Range of linear temperature increase:
(in power voltage 100 VAC)
40 °C/min up to 200 °C
25 °C/min up to 250 °C
15 °C/min up to 380 °C
7 °C/min up to 450 °C
(in power voltage 230 VAC)
70 °C/min up to 200 °C
50 °C/min up to 350 °C
35 °C/min up to 450 °C
Cooling speed : Approximately 3.4 minutes cooling from 450 °C to 50 °C.
(Ambient temperature : 22 °C)
Overheat protection : Programmable up to 470 °C (A fixed circuit provides protection
at 500 °C)

1.2.2 Temperature program

Program ramps : 20 ramps in total (Heating and cooling available)
Setting : 0.1 °C increments
Program setting : -250 to 250 °C/min, 0.01 °C/min increments
Total time of total program : Up to 9999.99 minutes

1.2.3 Injection port

Overheat protection : Programmable up to 470 °C

SPL-2010 Plus
Injection unit : Split/Splitless injection
Range of temperature : Up to 450 °C
Temperature setting : 0.1 °C increments

WBI-2010 Plus
Injection unit : Direct injection
Range of temperature : Up to 450 °C
Temperature setting : 0.1 °C increments

2 GC-2010 Plus
 1 Overview
1.2 Specifications

OCI/PTV-2010
Injection unit : On-column/PTV injection
Range of temperature : Room temperature + 5 °C to 450 °C (column oven temperature: 50 °C)
Program ramps : 7 ramps
Temperature setting : 0.1 °C increments
Program rate : Up to 250 °C/min
Heating speed : Within 3 minutes heating from 50 °C to 450 °C
Cooling speed : Approximately 8 minutes cooling from 450 °C to 50 °C (column
oven temperature: 50 °C)
Cooling : A special cooling fan is used.

1.2.4 Detector
Overheat protection : Programmable up to 470 °C
Time constant : 4 ms to 2 s selectable

○ Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

Range of temperature : Up to 450 °C, 0.1 °C increments
Minimum detection : 1.5 pg C/s
Dynamic range : 107
Jet material : Fused quartz

○ Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

Amplifier : With differential type filament protective circuit, tungsten
rhenium filament, dual-element configuration
Power : Constant current
Range of temperature : Up to 400 °C
Sensitivity : 20,000 mV ・ ml/mg
Dynamic range : 105

○ Electron capture detector (ECD)

Radiation source : 63Ni 370MBq
Range of temperature : Up to 350 °C
Minimum detection : 6 fg/s
Dynamic range : 104

○ Flame photometric detector (FPD)

Range of temperature : Up to 350 °C
Minimum detection : P: 55 fgP/s, S: 3 pgS/s
Dynamic range : P: 104, S: 103

○ Flame thermionic detector (FTD)

Range of temperature : Up to 450 °C
Minimum detection : N: 0.1 pgN/s, P: 0.03 pgP/s
Dynamic range : 103

1.2.5 Auxiliary heated zone

AUX3 to AUX5 : Available (optional)

GC-2010 Plus 3
 1 Overview
1.2 Specifications

1.2.6 Carrier gas flow control unit

○ Split/splitless mode
Range : 0 to 970 kPa (The maximum pressure limit is the primary pres-
sure minus 10 kPa.)
0.1 kPa increments
Program ramps : 7 ramps possible
Program rate : -400 to 400 kPa/min, 0.01 kPa/min increments
Split rate setting : 0 to 9999.9, 0.1 increments

○ Direct injection mode

Pressure mode
Range : 0 to 970 kPa (The maximum pressure limit is the primary pres-
sure minus 10 kPa.)
0.1 kPa increments
Program ramps : 7 ramps possible
Program rate : -400 to 400 kPa/min

Flow rate mode

Range : 0 to 1200 ml/min (When primary pressure is 980 kPa)
Program ramps : 7 ramps possible
Program rate : -400 to 400 ml/min/min
0.1 ml/min/min increments

1.2.7 Detector gas flow controller

Range : 0 ~ 1200 ml/min (Air), 0.1 ml/min increments

0 ~ 100 ml/min (H2)
0 ~ 100 ml/min (Makeup He)
Program ramps : 7 ramps possible
Program rate : -400 to 400 ml/min/min, 0.01 ml/min/min increments

1.2.8 Display

Back-light LCD 240 × 320 dot, 16 lines

The display can be switched between Japanese and English.

1.2.9 Dimensions, weight and power supply

Dimensions (mm) : 515 (W) × 440 (H) × 530 (D) mm

Weight : 30 kg (standard model with FID detector)
Power supply : 100 VAC (standard model with FID detector), 1800 VA, 50/60 Hz
230 VAC (standard model with FID detector), 2600 VA, 50/60 Hz

4 GC-2010 Plus
 22.1
2 Installation
. 2.1 Shipment Verification
This unit consists of the following parts. Verify that all items are present.

1. GC-2010 Plus main body

2. Quick reference (Part Number 221-40805)
3. Instruction manual CD-ROM (Part Number 221-40801-91)
4. Standard accessories
Type Description Part No. Qty'
Wrench 6×8 086-03003 2
Tools Wrench 10×12 086-03011 2
Wrench for Glass insert nut 221-46977 1
Branch tube 221-72658-91 1
Injection port Column nut 221-16325-01 1
Column nut 221-32705 1
Ferrule adjuster (for SPL) (SPL Column insertion jig) 221-41532-91 1
Column hanger * 221-47159 1
Parts Injection port cover ** 221-43597-01 1
Partition plate*** 221-73257 1
Screw, M4×8 *** 020-46547 2
Cable tie (red)**** 072-60606-01 2
Chromatopac signal cable (115V/230V) 221-47251-41/-43 1
G-type blank nut (with 2 pcs) 221-35566-92 1
Silicon rubber septum (with 20 pcs) 201-35584 1
Glass wool stuffing (with 2 g) 221-48600 1
Graphite ferrule 0.5, for capillary (with 10 pcs) 221-32126-05 1
Consumables Aluminum gaskets (with 100 pcs) 201-35183 1
Glass insert, for split 221-41444-01 1
Glass insert, for splitless 221-48335-01 1
Fluoride rubber O-ring, for glass insert (with 5 pcs) 036-11203-84 1

∗ The column hanger is inserted into the support slots in the oven interior.
∗∗ Attach the injection port cover to INJ/DET cover in case of manual injection. (Refer to "2.2 Component
description".)
∗∗∗ The plate is attached to the back of the gas chromatograph at the time of installation. (Refer to “■Rear view”
of "2.2 Component description".)
∗∗∗∗ Attach the cable ties to the hydrogen gas line for making a distinction from other gas lines.

5. FID accessories (only for models with FID)

Description Part No. Qty'
Ferrule adjuster (for FID) 221-41532-92 1

GC-2010 Plus 5
 2 Installation
2.1 Shipment Verification

6. TCD accessories (only for models with TCD)

Description Part No. Qty'
Ferrule adjuster (for TCD) 221-48610-01 1
CAUTION label TCD-2010 221-42741 1
Card case, A6 038-03055 1

Fig. 2.1.1 Standard Accessories

Refer to AOC-20 instruction manual for the parts list of the auto injector AOC-20i.

6 GC-2010 Plus
 22.2
2 Installation
. 2.2 Component description

■ Front

WARNING
HIGH TEMPERATURE
Danger of burns. Keep the column oven door closed when the oven
is at high temperature. Keep the injection port cover on when making
manual injections.

GC-2010 Plus

Door latch

Fig. 2.2.1

No. Name Description

1 Column oven door Pull the latch on the lower right to open the door. Press the center
of the door to close it.
2 Key/Display Used for various input and displaying component status.
3 Battery case for FPD fan Houses the battery for FPD cooling fan (option).
4 Power switch Turns the power of the unit on and off.

GC-2010 Plus 7
 2 Installation
2.2 Component description

■ Oven interior

WARNING
HIGH TEMPERATURE
Danger of burns. When the injection port or detector temperature is
high, never touch the connections or the internal surfaces of the oven.

1 3 2

Fig. 2.2.2

No. Name Description

1 Column connection (injection port side) Attaches the column to the injection port. (close-up ① ).
2 Column connection (detector side) Attaches the column to the detector (close-up ② ).
Install the capillary column here. (Attaches to the top of
3 Column hanger
the oven (close-up ③ ).

8 GC-2010 Plus
 2 Installation
2.2 Component description

Close-up 1 (injection port side) Close-up 2 (detector side)

Capillary column

Graphite ferrule

Column nut

Injection port column nut Column nut

(with split)

Close-up 3 (column hanger)

GC-2010 Plus 9
 2 Installation
2.2 Component description

■ Rear

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
Danger of electrical shock.
Only qualified service personnel may remove the rear cover.
Ensure that the power distribution board power is off before starting
installation if the power cable will be connected directly to terminals
on the power distribution board.
Ensure that the power supply is properly grounded.
Never put heavy objects on the power cable.

HIGH TEMPERATURE
Hot air is exhausted from the back of the unit. Do not place flammable
items behind the unit. Do not touch the back of the GC near the
exhaust.

HIGH PRESSURE GAS

Frequently check gas flow lines for leaks.
In particular, accumulations of hydrogen gas can cause an explosion.

3
14

2
14-6
14-5
7
14-4
8
9
14-3 10
14-2 11
14-1 12
13

Fig. 2.2.3

10 GC-2010 Plus
 2 Installation
2.2 Component description

CAUTION
Do not touch the connections or terminals when the power is on. This
could damage the circuits.

No. Name Description

1 Power cable Supplies power to the unit.
2 Air Inlet Fan Sends air to the column oven to cool it down.
3 Partition Plate Prevents the air from flowing back into the column oven.
4 Exhaust vent This vents the column oven during cooling.
5 Carrier gas inlet Supplies carrier gas.
6 Detector gas inlet Supplies detector gas.
Connect an external device if any to this terminal to receive a
7 START signal input terminal
start signal.
Outputs the READY signal to any external device (Such as the
8 READY signal terminal
auto injector).
Connect an external device if any to this terminal to output the
9 START signal output terminal
start signal.
Connect the RS-232C cable (9-pin) to this connector. For I/O of
10 RS-232C connector
digital signal.
11 Relay terminal Relay terminal to switch at EVENT91 and 92.
Connect this connector to the RS-232C terminal in the power
12 AOC communication connector
unit of AOC-20 i/s.
Detector signal output terminal Outputs the detector signal to analog input of a Chromatopac or
13
(analog) other type of data processing unit. (ch1, ch2)
14 AOC power supply * Connects AOC-20i and AOC-20s (option).
14-1 INJECTOR1 connector Connect the auto injector. (in single mode)
Connect the main auto injector in dual mode.
14-2 INJECTOR2 connector Connect the subordinate auto injector in dual mode.
14-3 SAMPLER connector Connect the autosampler carousel.
14-4 RS-232C connector Connector for external control
14-5 Fiber optic cable connector Do not connect RS-232C and fiber optic cables simultaneously.
14-6 Start out/Ready in connector Inputs the Ready signal to the gas chromatograph and outputs
the start signal from the gas chromatograph.

∗ Only for units with AOC-20i.

NOTE The symbol indicates the functional ground terminal.

GC-2010 Plus 11
 2 Installation
2.2 Component description

■ Entire unit

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
Danger of electrical shock.
Only qualified service personnel may remove the side covers.

HIGH TEMPERATURE
Danger of burns. Never touch the top cover, the injection ports and
detectors ------- while they are hot.

CAUTION
All the GC unit covers (including the INJ/DET covers, carrier and detector
gas controller covers) are essential to the optimal performance of the GC-
2010 Plus. Ensure that these covers are in place when the GC is in use.

5 2 1 3

Fig. 2.2.4

No. Name Description

Samples are injected into this port, which can become
1 Injection port
extremely hot.
This cover becomes extremely hot.
2 Injection port cover
It protects you from the heat of the injection port.
The detector is located under the INJ/DET cover. The detector
3 Detector
can become extremely hot.
Lift up this cover to remove it. Keep the cover closed during
4 INJ/DET cover
operation.
Carrier and detector gas controller Houses AFC, APC and manual flow controller.
5
cover Open and lift up this cover to remove it.

12 GC-2010 Plus
 22.3
2 Installation
. 2.3 Installation site

■ Installation location requirements

Consider the following points to ensure safe and appropriate unit operation when selecting
the installation site.

2.3.1 Ambient temperature and humidity

In order to maintain optimal performance, use the unit in the following indoor environment.
This unit can be operated in the following operating temperature (humidity) range.
Temperature range: 18 °C to 28 °C
Relative humidity range: 50 % to 60 % (Avoid use under conditions where
condensation forms)
Operating temperature range: 5 °C to 40 °C
Operating humidity range: 5 % to 90 % (Avoid use under conditions where con-
densation forms)
Altitude Below 2000 m

2.3.2 Installation location

Install the unit on a firm, stable and flat base.

2.3.3 Corrosive gas and dust

Avoid exposure to corrosive gas and excessive dust to prolong the service life and maintain
optimal unit performance.

2.3.4 Electro-magnetic fields and power supply noise

This unit should not be used near strong electro-magnetic fields. The power supply must
have little or no noise. These items can cause instrument problems.
Do not use a cell phone near a detector (especially TCD or FTD).

2.3.5 Other precautions

For optimal performance, avoid the following conditions during installation:

(1) Fluctuating ambient temperature.
(2) Temperature changes from heating or air conditioning.
(3) Direct sunlight.
(4) Vibrations.
(5) Spilling of liquid on the unit and personal computer.
(6) If analyzing hazardous substances, exhaust the gas expelled from the unit outdoors.

GC-2010 Plus 13
 2 Installation
2.3 Installation site

■ Installation clearances

WARNING
Hot air is exhausted from the back vent. Do not place flammable
matelials near the exhaust.

Minimum 500mm

Minimum
100mm
Depth
530mm

GC-2010 Plus

Hight
440mm

Width 515mm

Fig. 2.3.1

2.3.6 Rear clearance

Hot air is vented at the back of the unit when the column oven cools. Consider the following
during installation:
• Do not place any flammable materials behind the unit.
• Allow a clearance of 50 cm or more between the back cover and the wall.(*)
• Reserve extra space for maintenance and inspection behind the unit.
(∗) When the optional exhaust duct (221-47748-41) is used, the clearance from the wall can be a
minimum of 25 cm.

2.3.7 Left clearance

Allow a clearance of 10 cm or more on the left side. The vent on the left side is important for
properly cooling down the outer wall of the column oven and improving the cooling efficiency
of the column oven.

14 GC-2010 Plus
22.4
2 Installation
. 2.4 Moving the GC

The GC-2010 Plus weighs approximately 30 kg (For a single FID model).

Two people must carry the GC; one on the left, and one on the right.

CAUTION
Move the GC carefully so it does not get bumped or jarred.

GC-2010 Plus 15
 22.5
2 Installation
. 2.5 Power supply and wiring

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
1.Before connecting the power cable to the distribution board, turn
OFF the power to the distribution board.
2.The power supply must have a circuit breaker.
3.Do not place heavy items on the power cable.

Before connecting the power supply, verify the following items.

■ Power supply voltage

Use a power source with the following specifications to maintain optimal unit performance.
Commended power voltage: 115 VAC ± 5 %
230 VAC ± 5 %
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Operating power voltage: 115 VAC ± 10 %
230 VAC ± 10 %
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Transient overvoltage: Installation Category II (IEC)
Pollution degree: 2

■ Power supply capacity

Calculate the power supply capacity by considering the total power consumption of the
individual components as shown below.
Connect the power source to a terminal with sufficient capacity.
Standard model with FID: 1,800 VA (115 V model)/2,600 VA (230 V model)
Optional temperature control block (INJ, etc.): 150 VA/pc
Maximum power is 2600 VA (115 V model), 3400 VA (230 V model)
Short-circuit current rating: 50 A (100 V model)/35 A (230 V model)
NOTE Performance of the unit may be affected if the power supply voltage fluctuates or the capacity is
insufficient.

■ Connecting the power cable

NOTE The power cable of the 230 V model uses a plug.

Fig. 2.5.1 Plug

16 GC-2010 Plus
 2 Installation
2.5 Power supply and wiring

CAUTION
Be careful to wire the plug correctly, as outlined on the next page to avoid
damage to the unit or supply fuse.

The power cable for 115 V model is color-coded as follows.

Black ... Connected to HOT of AC line.
White ... Connected to NEUTRAL of AC line.
Green ... Grounding (GROUND)

Black

Power cable
White

Green

Fig. 2.5.2 Power cable

■ Symbol conventions
~ : AC Power switch
○ : Off, Open
｜ : On, Close

OFF status ON status

■ Heating energy generation

The following graph shows the heating values generated by the unit.

3.5

3
Heat generation (×10 J/hour)

2.5
6

1.5

0.5

0
0 100 200 300 400
Temperature (ºC)

Fig. 2.5.3

GC-2010 Plus 17
 2 Installation
2.5 Power supply and wiring

■ Fuse
The following fuses are used in the GC-2010 Plus.
Rated current/voltage ∗Classification depending
Fuse, No. Type *
115 V model 230 V model on “IEC127”.
F1, F2 15 A / 250 V 10 A / 250 V T
F3, F4 5 A / 250 V 3.15 A / 250 V T
F5, F6 5 A / 250 V 5 A / 250 V T

■ Allowing the GC to dry after transport.

CAUTION
GC-2010 Plus may get wet from humidity in some transport condi-
tions. In such case “drying-out” is necessary to avoid a short circuit at
the heater in the injection port or the detector.

Under some transport conditions, condensation may form inside the GC components. To
avoid injection port or detector heater unit short-circuits, allow the unit sufficient time to dry
after transport, and follow the procedure below after installation.

(1) Seal the injection port and column connections.

(2) Remove the injection ports and detectors from all configured analytical lines. (See "8.3
Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components ([Line Config])".)
(3) Set the column oven temperature to 300 °C, and start the GC. (See "11 Creating an
Oven Temperature Program" and "7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]".)
(4) Keep the column temperature at 300 °C for 2 hours. (See "9 Monitoring the GC".)

Thermal
insulation cup

Graphite ferrule
with a wire

Column nut
(or Column nut
of injection port)

18 GC-2010 Plus
 22.6
2 Installation
. 2.6 Gas supply plumbing

■ Gas type and supply purity

The following gases and associated purity valves are required to maintain optimal
performance of the unit.
For detectors other than FID and TCD, refer to the instruction manual corresponding to each
detector.
Carrier gas
Helium purity: 99.999 % or more
Nitrogen purity: 99.999 % or more
Makeup gas
FID
Nitrogen purity: 99.999 % or more
Helium purity: 99.999 % or more
TCD
Nitrogen purity: 99.999 % or more
Helium puritiy: 99.999 % or more
Argon purity: 99.999 or more
Detector gas
FID
Hydrogen purity: 99.999 % or more
Air Dry air cylinder (including total hydrocarbons of 1 ppm or less)

NOTE If a gas that does not satisfy the purity described above is used even once, the instrument may not
satisfy the minimum detection specification even after changing the gas to a high-purity one.
Gases with a purity of 99.995%, dry air excluding organic substances, or air compressed using an
oilless compressor and then dehumidified can be used when high sensitivity analysis is not necessary.

Gas supply pressures

Carrier gas: 300 - 980 kPa (150 kPa to 500 kPa for hydrogen)*
Make-up gas: 300 - 980 kPa
Hydrogen: 150 - 300 kPa**
Air: 300 - 500 kPa
The relationship of kPa and bar is as follows
100 kPa = 1 bar
Convert units between kPa and kgf/cm2 as follows.
1 kPa = 1.02×10-2 kgf/cm2
1 kgf/cm2 = 98.1 kPa
Convert the units between kPa and psi as follows.
1 kPa = 1.45×10- 1psi
1 psi = 6.89 kPa
* When using hydrogen carrier gas, install a flow controller upstream of the carrier gas pipe to supply
hydrogen to the sample injection port at a flow rate of 1300 mL/min or less. (AFC hydrogen option
ASSY: P/N S221-83785-41)
** If the hydrogen supply pressure exceeds the 300 kPa due to the use of hydrogen carrier gas or other
equipment (GC manufactured by other companies), install a pressure reducer upstream of the detector
gas pipe to reduce the hydrogen supply pressure to the detector to 300 kPa or lower (APC hydrogen
option ASSY: P/N S221-83780-41).

GC-2010 Plus 19
 2 Installation
2.6 Gas supply plumbing

■ High pressure gas cylinder precautions

WARNING
HIGH PRESSURE
Gas cylinders are under high pressure. When handling gas cylinders,
instruction and safety measures provided by the gas supplier must be
strictly observed to prevent accidents.

General precautions are provided below.

Consult state and local regulations for specific precautions.
Keep gas cylinders away from the lab, preferably outdoors, but not exposed to direct sun-
light. The area must be well-ventilated. Use tubing to bring the gases to the lab.
The temperature of gas cylinders must not exceed 40 °C. Flammable items must be kept at
least 2 m from a gas cylinder.
When using high pressure gases, pay strict attention to ventilation, and perform daily leak
checks. In particular, when using flammable gases (such as hydrogen), never smoke or
allow open flame within 5 m of the equipment. Fire extinguishers must be present.
Secure gas cylinders firmly with cylinder clamps so they cannot fall over. Use pressure
reducing valves and pipes that are free of contamination from impurities that lower the purity
of the supply source. If the purity of the supply gas connected to the GC is low, the sensitivity
or stability is not guaranteed even when a high purity gas cylinder is used. Connect the gas
filter right before connecting gases to the GC in order to remove any impurities. The filter's
removal ability eventually wears off. The filter requires periodical maintenance service
because a filter saturated with impurities contaminates the GC. When finished with the gas,
tighten the main valve of the cylinder immediately.

20 GC-2010 Plus
 2 Installation
2.6 Gas supply plumbing

■ Precautions on handling hydrogen gas

WARNING
HYDROGEN GAS PRECAUTIONS
Hydrogen can explode if it is allowed to accumulate in a poorly venti-
lated area.
1.Connect gas lines correctly. Hydrogen is released into the room if
the tubing is accidentally connected to the air inlet.
To prevent an improper connection, the GC-2010 Plus is equipped
with a right-handed thread at the air inlet joint and a left-handed
thread at the hydrogen inlet joint.
2.When the unit is not in use, close the main valve of the hydrogen
gas cylinder. Check for leaks at the main valve.
3.Every time the unit is used, check for leaks along the flow line from
gas cylinder to the unit interior.
4.To prevent an explosion due to a hydrogen gas leak, the room in
which the unit is used should be well ventilated. Prohibit the use of
open flame in this room.
5.Close the main valve of the hydrogen cylinder immediately after
completing the analyses. Then, turn OFF the unit and perform
normal shut-down procedures.

WARNING
HYDROGEN GAS HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
The accumulation of hydrogen gas inside the column oven can cause
an explosion.
Close all hydrogen pressure regulator valves when not in use, and
seal the column connection.
Detector

Thermal
insulation cup

Graphite ferrule
with a wire

Column nut

Capping the Detector Fitting.

GC-2010 Plus 21
 2 Installation
2.6 Gas supply plumbing

CAUTION
GAS PLUMBING PRECAUTIONS
The pressure regulator valve will be damaged if pressure above its
specifications is applied.
Set the gas inlet pressure within the allowable maximum pressure
range.

CAUTION
Hydrogen gas supply precautions
Make sure that the supply pressure to the flow controller does not
exceed 500 kPa.
If the flow controller fails with a hydrogen gas supply pressure over
500 kPa, a dangerous situation exists. Lange amounts of leaking
hydrogen could cause the FID flame to expand out of the detector.

Hydrogen gas is lighter than air. If it leaks, it can accumulate near the
ceiling. Pay strict attention to ventilation so that leaking hydrogen is
vented out of the room and cannot accumulate.

CAUTION
Supply pressure
When the GC shares gas supplies with other insturmentation, check
all instrument specifications in order to provide adequate gas supply
pressures for all the instruments.

WARNING
Hydrogen carrier gas precautions
If much hydrogen gas is released into the poorly ventilated room, it
may cause the explosion.
1.In order to prevent hydrogen gas accumulate in the room, attach
tubes to split vent, purge vent, TCD vent and ECD vent. Discharge
the gas to open air or a ventilation equipment (such as the draft
chamber).
2.Install the GC in the well ventilated area. (Ex. in the draft chamber)
3.In order to measure hydrogen gas concentration, equip a hydrogen
gas sensor in the room. Keep the hydrogen concentration low.

22 GC-2010 Plus
 2 Installation
2.6 Gas supply plumbing

■ Supply gas tubing

There are two types connections in the Gas Chromatograph: Type M and Type G. Type M
connections are located at the main tubing connections in the instrument interior and exte-
rior. The metal fittings contact directly.
Type G connectors, which are used in high temperature areas, are connected by tightening
three to five aluminum gaskets between the fittings.

MF fitting MM fitting

Fig. 2.6.1 Joining Type M fittings

GM fitting
GF fitting

Alminum gaskets (3-5 pcs)

Fig. 2.6.2 Joining Type G fittings

Tightening the tubing connections

Tools
2 wrenches 10×12 (standard accessory)
Use the 12 mm wrench for Type M connections and the 10 mm wrench for type G
connections.

Fig. 2.6.3 Tightening the joints

GC-2010 Plus 23
 2 Installation
2.6 Gas supply plumbing

■ Tubing between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph

Gas filter <option>

GC-2010 Plus

Gas
cylinder

Fig. 2.6.4 Tubing between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph

Use tubing with a 3 mm O.D. and 2 mm I.D. between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph.
The use of a gas filter is highly recommended. Contaminated tubing or poor quality gases
can interfere with baseline stability.

<Option> Gas filter (P/N 221-05619-01)

This absorbs organic compounds and moisture in the supply gas, improving its
purity. The filter can be regenerated by baking in the GC oven at 250 °C with
30 mL/min carrier gas purging the filter.
Capacity: Approx. 200 mL
Absorbent: Molecular sieve 5A

Fig. 2.6.5 Gas filter

24 GC-2010 Plus
 2 Installation
2.6 Gas supply plumbing

■ Gas chromatograph tubing connections

Connections are provided on the rear panel of the unit for connecting external tubing.
They are labeled as follows.

Carrier gas ..................... CARRIER

Makeup gas ................... MAKE UP
Hydrogen ....................... HYDROGEN
Air .................................. AIR

<Ex 1> When Carrier gas and Makeup gas are identical

Branch tube
(standard accessory)

Hydrogen
Carrier gas
Air

Fig. 2.6.6 When Carrier gas and Makeup gas are identical

<Ex 2> When Carrier gas and Makeup gas are different

Hydrogen
Carrier gas Make-up gas
Air

Fig. 2.6.7 When Carrier gas and Makeup gas are different

GC-2010 Plus 25
 2 Installation
2.6 Gas supply plumbing

■ Checking for gas leaks

After plumbing the unit, check for gas leaks according to the following guidelines.
(1) Open the main valve of the gas cylinder.
(2) Adjust the gas supply to the specified pressures.
(3) Check for leaks with leak detecting fluid (option) or soapy water on all connections.
Bubbles can be observed if a leak exists.
(4) If a leak is detected:
• Further tighten the connection, or retighten it.
• Replace the seal material.
(5) Wipe off the leak detecting fluid or soapy water using a wet cloth.
Electronic leak detectors can also be used for hydrogen and helium leaks.

<Option> “Snoop” Gas leak detecting fluid (P/N 670-11514)

E
LEAK D
LIQUID

Fig. 2.6.8 Leak detecting fluid

CAUTION
Do not use the leak detecting fluid nor soapy water for gas leak check
on the connections above the carrier and detector gas controllers
(AFC/APC). The drips may damage the controller.

26 GC-2010 Plus
 22.7
2 Installation
. 2.7 Connecting external device cables

■ Connecting the RS-232C cable

Connect the RS-232C cable to its terminal on the rear panel.

Fig. 2.7.1 Connecting the RS-232C cable

Chromatograph control signal I/O and digital detector signal output occur through the
RS-232C cable.
RS-232C cable connection parameters

• Connection to C-R8A
Set data transmission parameters to equivalent values between the GC system and the
C-R8A.
Example of C-R8A settings: (For details, refer to the C-R8A instruction manual)
Make the following settings on the transmission parameter setup screen for “LEVEL 2” and
“9,600 bps”. ( CONFIG T (T:TRS) ▽ ).
PORT MODE #No. BPS
STD2 12917 8 9600
Power cycle the C-R8A after changing transmission parameters.
For GC-2010 Plus data transmission parameters, refer to "16.6.5 Setting transmission
parameters".
Input “OPEN TRS 8” on the C-R8A keyboard, and press the ENTER key to open the
transmission port and start transmission.
(The detector signal is not transmitted from the GC-2010 Plus to the C-R8A)

• Connection to the personal computer

To use GC solution, get GC-2010 Plus transmission parameters to “LEVEL3”, “115200 bps”.

GC-2010 Plus 27
 2 Installation
2.7 Connecting external device cables

■ Connecting the Chromatopac signal cable

Use the Chromatopac signal cable to send detector analog signals to the Chromatopac.
Connect the 4-PIN signal cable to the connector (Ch1 or Ch2) on the rear panel. The START
signal between the GC and Chromatopac is communicated through this signal cable.
Therefore, there is no need to connect the START OUT terminals on the GC or the
Chromatopac.

ch1

ch2

Fig. 2.7.2 Connecting the Chromatopac signal cable

28 GC-2010 Plus
 2 Installation
2.7 Connecting external device cables

■ Calibration of analog wide range signal

When the GC is connected to the Chromatopac C-R8A/C-R7A/C-R7A plus with a
chromatopac signal cable (for analog signals), and the signal type is set to “Wide” on the
[DET] key screen, perform a calibration for proper signal transmission. For details of the
[DET] key, refer to "13 Detector".

• C-R8A
(1) Set the detector controller on the [DET] key screen to “off”. (Refer to 13.2.2.)
(2) On the Chromatopac, type the following:
LOAD “8:ZCALIB.BAS”
(3) Press the [RUN] key of the Chromatopac.
(4) When “CH No. (1:CH1, 2:CH2)” is displayed, enter the Chromatopac Channel number
(1 for Ch.1, 2 for Ch. 2).
(5) When “Save to the disk? (Y: save N: No)” is displayed, enter “Y”.
(6) When “COMPLETED” appears on the screen, set the detector controller to “on”.

• C-R7A/C-R7A plus
(1) Set the detector controller on the [DET] key screen to “off”. (Refer to 13.2.2.)
(2) On the Chromatopac, press the [Win 3] key and type the following:
LOAD “ZCALIB”
(3) Press the [RUN] key of the Chromatopac.
(4) When “Channel No.(1:CH1, 2:CH2)” is displayed, enter the Chromatopac Channel num-
ber (1 for Ch.1, 2 for Ch. 2).
(5) When “Save to disk ? (Y: Yes, N: No)” is displayed, enter “Y”.
(6) Set the detector controller to “on”.

Check whether the calibration has done correctly as the following procedure, while the GC
status is “System On” and the detector is set to “On”. (Refer to "7 Starting and Stopping the
GC [SYSTEM]" and "13 Detector".)

(1) Set “Signal Attenuation” to “x1”.

(2) Press the [Win 1] key and press “F” to set Chromatopac zero level to FREE.
(Refer to User’s manual of Chromatopac.)
(3) Press [Zero adj.] (PF menu) on the screen of [MONIT] key. The detector signal level
moves to 0 µV. (Refer to "9 Monitoring the GC".)
(4) The signal level on the display of the Chromatopac is within ±50 µVe, the calibration has
done correctly.

If the calibration was failed, permorm the above-mentioned calibration procedure again.

The maximum difference between the signal level GC and Chromatopac is equal or less
than ±5 % (±50 µV, in case signal level is form −1000 to 1000 µV).
In case of SYSTEM Off and/or Detector controller Off, the detector signal level on screen of
the [MONIT] key is 0 µV but Chromatopac shows −1000 µVe when the signal type is “Wide”.

NOTE For correct quantitation, perform this calibration when changing GC’s or changing Chromatopac chan-
nels.

When the GC and the chromatopac C-R6A or previous models are connected with chroma-
topac signal cable (for analog signal), the signal type is set to “Linear” on the screen of the
[DET] key. The calibration is not necessary.
This is the same when the C-R8A/C-R7A/C-R7A plus is connected with the optional analog
cable (linear, P/N 221-47251).

GC-2010 Plus 29
 2 Installation
2.7 Connecting external device cables

■ Connecting the GC and Auto injector

NOTE This section describes the connection between the AOC-20i unit and GC-2010 Plus, the AOC power
cable connection, and the method of turning the AOC on and off. For details of AOC-20 operation, refer
to the AOC-20 User’s manual.

■ Cable connections
Connect the cables as follows.
The AOC-20 power source is housed within the unit.

READY/START cable

RS-232C
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4

Press these buttons when inserting or removing cables.

START OUT/READY IN terminal

RS-232C cable for AOC

Attach the D-sub connector to the RS-232C terminal
of the AOC power source, and 6-PIN connector to the
AOC terminal of the GC.

AOC cable
Connect the auto injector to INJECTOR 1 for single AOC 230 V model
Wrap the cable around Ferrite core near the connector
(power source side) as shown below.

Cable Ferrite core

Fig. 2.7.3

NOTE If the AOC cable is connected to INJECTOR 2, follow the INJECTOR1 procedure. If the AOC-20s sam-
ple carousel cable is connected to SAMPLER, attach the ferrite cores on both side of the cable as for
INJECTOR1.

■ Turning the AOC power on and off

When using the AOC-20i with the GC-2010 Plus, the AOC power is turned on and off along
with the GC power. However, for units with the AOC-20 power supply installed in the GC-
2010 Plus, turn the AOC-20, which is specified for an analytical flow line, on and off from the
AOC parameter screen, accessed from the [OPTION] key. (Refer to "15.1 Auto Injector
Parameters".)

30 GC-2010 Plus
 2 Installation
2.7 Connecting external device cables

■ Installing the AOC-20s

(1) Installation the autosampler carousel bracket.
Use four M4 screws to attach the carousel bracket to the top left of the GC-2010 Plus.

NOTE Eight holes are available. Use four holes which are marked as in Fig. 2.7.4.

NOTE Fasten the screws tightly to ensure electrical contact. Poor contact may lead to auto sampler carousel
operational problems.

Fig. 2.7.4

(2) Installing the AOC-20s autosampler carousel.

Place the autosampler carousel on the bracket and fasten it with one M4 screw.

Fig. 2.7.5

GC-2010 Plus 31
 2 Installation
2.7 Connecting external device cables

■ Connecting the relay terminals

Connect the 8-PIN relay cable (P/N 221-48568-91).
The relay terminal can be opened and closed by EVENT91 and 92. (Refer to "16.3 Time
Program".)

Fig. 2.7.6

EVENT91

Pin No.1 red COM

Pin No.2 white NC Conducted to Pin No. 1 COM at EVENT-91
Pin No.3 black NO Conducted to Pin No. 1 COM at EVENT91

EVENT92

Pin No.4 yellow COM

Pin No.5 blue NC Conducted to Pin No. 4 COM at EVENT-92
Pin No.6 black NO Conducted to Pin No. 4 COM at EVENT92

OPTION

Pin No.7 brown (GROUND)

Pin No.8 gray (GROUND)

32 GC-2010 Plus
33.1
3 AFC, APC
. 3.1 AFC and APC Overview

The AFC (Advanced Flow Controller) is an electronic flow controller which sets and controls carrier
gas pressures and flow rates based on entered parameters.
The APC (Advanced Pressure Controller) is an electronic flow controller for controlling detector gas
pressures. The AUX APC can control the gas pressure of other optional devices.

GC-2010 Plus 33
 33.2
3 AFC, APC
. 3.2 Definition of Terms

■ Column inlet pressure

Column inlet pressure refers to the injection port pressure.
When set to “0 kPa”, the injection port pressure is equal to atmospheric pressure.

■ Total flow rate

Total flow rate is the flow rate controlled by the TFC (Total Flow Controller) located upstream
of the injection port.
(Refer to Fig. 3.3.1)

■ Column flow rate

The column flow rate in the GC-2010 Plus gas chromatograph indicates the volume flow rate
inside the column converted at the atmospheric pressure and the room temperature, which
corresponds to the flow rate measured at room temperature by a flow meter connected to
the column outlet.
The column flow rate can be calculated with the following equation:
60πd 4 TS
Fc ＝ ――――― (P2 - P 02) × ――― × 103
256 µLT PS
where
Fc : Column flow rate (ml/min) P0 : Column outlet pressure
d : Column inner diameter (mm) (= atmospheric pressure) (kPa)
L : Column length (m) µ : Viscosity coefficient *
P : Column inlet pressure (kPa) (19.4 µPa•sec, helium at 20 °C)
T : Column temperature (K) TS : Standard temperature (K)
PS : Standard pressure (kPa)

* The viscosity coefficient depends the column oven temperature.

■ Linear velocity
Linear velocity indicates how many cm the carrier gas moves inside the column.
The terms “VELOCITY”, “linear velocity” in this instruction manual indicate the average
linear velocity inside the column.
The average linear velocity can be obtained with the following equation:
0.75 × d 2 (P 2 - P 02) 2
V ＝ ―――――― × ―――――― × 105
32 µL (P 3 - P 03)
V : Average linear velocity

■ Split ratio
split frow
For the GC-2010 Plus, split ratio refers to ―――――――.
column flow

34 GC-2010 Plus
 TFC
AFC

APC
ESC
SPC
AFC
TFC
.
(Flow rate sensor)

CARRIER IN Flow rate sensor

33.3
(GC rear)
C C
Column inlet
Molecular sieve filter
3.3

pressure sensor
Pressure sensor
PURGE VENT P P
Trap
SPC
(Septum Purge Controller)
S
SPLIT VENT
Trap
ESC
(Electronic Split Controller) Detector
Injection port
Column oven
APC
Pressure sensor

Fig. 3.3.1
Flow Line Diagram

H2 H H
(GC rear) Valve for H2 H2 restrictor
Pressure sensor H
3 AFC, APC

MAKE UP M M
(GC rear) Valve for makeup gas Makeup gas restrictor Capillary column
Pressure sensor

AIR A A
(GC rear) Valve for air Air restrictor

Note: This figure illustrates an FID or FTD detector example. TFC:TOTAL FLOW CONTROLLER
For ECD or TCD detectors, the APC controls only the makeup gas. SPC:SEPTUM PURGE CONTROLLER
For FPD detector, the APC controls only hydrogen and air. ESC:ELECTRONIC SPLIT CONTROLLER

GC-2010 Plus
35
 33.4
3 AFC, APC
. 3.4 AFC and APC control

3.4.1 AFC Control

AFC Control is illustrated in the following sections.

Split mode
Split Splitless DIRECT(∗1)
Control mode
Pressure Section 3.4.2 Section 3.4.3 Section 3.4.4
Flow rate ―― ―― Section 3.4.4
Linear velocity Section 3.4.2 Section 3.4.3 Section 3.4.4

∗1. When WBI or OCI Injection is used, do not select Split mode or Splitless mode.

3.4.2 Split mode: “SPLIT” (AFC)

The AFC controls the total flow rate to keep it at a constant value. The TFC (Total Flow
Controller) inside the AFC feeds back output from the column inlet pressure sensor, which
controls the ESC (Electronic Split Controller), which, in turn, controls the column inlet
pressure.
Fig.3.4.1 shows the control status with a split ratio of 1 : 40, a velocity of 30 cm/sec, a purge
flow rate of 3 ml/min, and a column oven temperature of 50 °C.
The column inlet pressure is calculated based on the linear velocity, the oven temperature,
the column inner diameter, and the column length, and is automatically set to 49.6 kPa. In
the same way, the column flow rate is automatically set to 1.67 ml/min, and the total flow rate
is set to 69.8 ml/min (= 1.67 ml/min × 40 + 3 ml/min (= purge flow rate)).
When the Control mode is set to “PRESS”, the column inlet pressure is controlled to remain
at 49.6 kPa regardless of the column oven temperature.
When the Control mode is set to “VELOCITY”, the column inlet pressure is set to a value
which keeps the linear velocity constant despite changes in the column oven temperature.
Even if the column oven temperature changes, as in programmed temperature analysis, the
linear velocity is always kept constant. Generally, when the column oven temperature
increases, the viscosity of the carrier gas also increases, and does not flow as easily.
Regardless of the Control mode, the ESC controls the column inlet pressure and the TFC
controls the total flow rate as shown in Fig. 3.4.1.

36 GC-2010 Plus
 3 AFC, APC
3.4 AFC and APC control

TFC
71.6 ml/min (Total Flow Controller)
Flow rate 71.6 ml/min
CARRIER IN sensor
(GC rear) C C
49.6 kPa
Pressure sensor 3 ml/min
Pressure sensor
P P
3 ml/min
PURGE VENT 66.9 ml/min
S
SPC
Injection
(Septum Purge Controller) Detector port
66.9 ml/min Column oven
SPLIT VENT (50 ͠)
ESC 1.67
(Electronic Split Controller) ml/min

Valve “b” Sensor “a”

Valve “b” is controlled so that the value of

sensor “a” remains constant.

Column inner diameter : 0.30 mm

Column length : 25.0 m
Film thickness : 0.50 µm
Carrier gas : He
Split ratio : 40 = 66.9 ml/min / 1.67 ml/min
(split flow rate)(column flow rate)

Fig. 3.4.1 Split control

GC-2010 Plus 37
 3 AFC, APC
3.4 AFC and APC control

3.4.3 Split mode: “SPLITLESS” (AFC)

The control method changes only during the sampling time. During sampling time, the AFC
controls the TFC (Total Flow Controller) so that the output from the column inlet pressure
sensor becomes constant, and then controls the column inlet pressure.
After the sampling time, the AFC controls the total flow rate to keep it at a constant value
using the TFC (Total Flow Controller) inside the AFC. As in split mode, the ESC (Electronic
Split Controller) is controlled to maintain the column inlet pressure constant.
Figure 3.4.2 shows the control status during the sampling time with a split ratio of 1:40, a
velocity of 30 cm/sec, a purge flow rate of 3 ml/min, and a column oven temperature of 50 °C.
The column inlet pressure is calculated based on the linear velocity, the oven temperature,
the column inner diameter, the column length and the column film thickness, and is
automatically set to 49.6 kPa. In the same way, the column flow rate is automatically set to
1.67 ml/min.
When the sampling time expires, control is identical to the split mode, shown in Fig. 3.4.1
When the Control mode is set to “PRESS”, the column inlet pressure is controlled to remain
at 49.6 kPa regardress of the column oven temperature.
When the Control mode is set to “VELOCITY”, the column inlet pressure is set to a value
which keeps the linear velocity constant despite changes in the column oven temperature.
Even if the column oven temperature changes, as in programmed temperature analysis, the
linear velocity is always kept constant. Generally, when the column oven temperature
increases, the viscosity of the carrier gas also increases, and does not flow as easily.
Regardless of the Control mode, the ESC controls the column inlet pressure and the TFC
controls the total flow rate as shown in Fig. 3.4.1. (after the sampling time).

TFC
4.67 ml/min (Total Flow Controller)
Flow rate 4.67 ml/min
CARRIER IN sensor
(GC rear) C C

Pressure sensor 3 ml/min

P P
3 ml/min
PURGE VENT 0 ml/min

SPC Pressure sensor S

99.1 kPa Injection
(Septum Purge Controller) port
Detector
0 ml/min Column oven
SPLIT VENT (50 ͠)
ESC 1.67
(Electronic Split Controller): ml/min
Completely closed

Valve “b” Sensor “a”

Valve “b” is controlled so that the value of

sensor “a” remains constant.

Column inner diameter : 0.32 mm

Column length : 25.0 m
Film thickness : 0.50 µm
Carrier gas : He

Fig. 3.4.2 Splitless control (during sampling time)

38 GC-2010 Plus
 3 AFC, APC
3.4 AFC and APC control

3.4.4 Split mode: “DIRECT”

The AFC offers three types of DIRECT mode, FLOW, PRESS and VELOCTY.
When the Control mode is set to “FLOW”, the TFC controls the total flow rate as shown in
Fig. 3.4.3. At that time, the column inlet pressure varies depending on the column type, the
purge flow rate and the column oven temperature.
When the Control mode is set to “PRESS”, the AFC controls the TFC (Total Flow Controller)
to keep the column inlet pressure constant. The control method is equivalent to the sampling
time in SPLITLESS mode. The control diagram is shown in Fig.3.4.2
When the Control mode is set to “VELOCITY”, the column inlet pressure is set to a value
which keeps the linear velocity constant despite changes in the column oven temperature.
Even if the column oven temperature changes, as in programmed temperature analysis, the
linear velocity is always kept constant. Generally, when the column oven temperature
increases, the viscosity of the carrier gas also increases, and does not flow as easily.

Control mode “FLOW”

7 ml/min
TFC
(Total Flow Controller)
Flow rate 7 ml/min
CARRIER IN sensor
(GC rear) C C C

3 ml/min 3 ml/min
P P
Pressure sensor
PURGE VENT
Control mode “PRESS” or “VEROCITY”
SPC Pressure sensor
(Septum Purge Controller)
Detector
Column oven
(50 ͠)
4 ml/min

Fig. 3.4.3 Direct Control

GC-2010 Plus 39
 3 AFC, APC
3.4 AFC and APC control

3.4.5 Control by APC

The APC performs its control as illustrated in the figure below.

Pressure sensor

GAS IN To detector
Resistance
Valve

Fig. 3.4.4

As shown in Fig.3.4.4, the APC controls the pressure.

The flow rate is calculated based on resistance and pressure.
For example, for a flow rate of 400 ml/min of air, the pressure is controlled and set to
approximately 61 kPa based on the pressure-flow rate characteristics of air stored in the
memory of the GC-2010 Plus. (Refer to Fig. 3.4.5)
The resistance depends on the detector type and the gas type (air, hydrogen or makeup
gas).
Fig.3.4.5-3.4.8 show the pressure-flow rate characteristic curves of the standard restrictor.
AUX APC offers “PRESS” and “FLOW” mode.
When the Control mode is “PRESS”, AUX APC controls the pressure as shown in Fig.3.4.4.
When the Control mode is “FLOW”, the pressure is calculated based on the set flow rate,
calculated from the restrictor inner diameter, and length. (Refer to column flow rate in "3.2
Definition of Terms".) The equation in 3.2 is accurate when the flow in the restrictor is layer.
Therefore, the flow rate accuracy depends on the restrictor used.

Air
1000
900
800
700
Flow rate (ml/min)

600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Pressure (kPa)

Fig. 3.4.5

40 GC-2010 Plus
 3 AFC, APC
3.4 AFC and APC control

H2
250

200
Flow rate (ml/min)

150

100

50

0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Pressure (kPa)

Fig. 3.4.6

Makeup gas (FID)

250

200
Flow rate (ml/min)

150

100

50

0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Pressure (kPa)

Fig. 3.4.7

Makeup gas (TCD)

120

100
Flow rate (ml/min)

80

60

40

20

0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Pressure (kPa)

Fig. 3.4.8

GC-2010 Plus 41
 33.5
3 AFC, APC
. 3.5 AFC and APC Control Ranges

For the AFC, the column inlet pressure can be set from 0 to 970 kPa, and the total flow rate
can be set to 0 to 1,200 ml. (Refer to Figs. 3.5.1 and 3.5.2.) However, these values are
instrument specifications, valid when the primary pressure supplied to the GC-2010 Plus is
980 kPa.
The allowable pressure and flow rate settings are limited by the primary pressure, as shown
in Fig.3.5.1, Fig.3.5.2. In addition, the pressure settings are limited by the column type and
the purge flow rate.

150kPa 270kPa 400kPa 150kPa 300kPa 400kPa

1200
ml/min
Total flow rate

Total flow rate

720 Primary
ml/min
pressure
980kPa 600
ml/min Primary
Primary pressure
pressure Primary 980kPa
300kPa pressure
360
ml/min 600kPa Primary
300
ml/min Primary pressure
pressure 600kPa
150 300kPa
ml/min

140kPa 290kPa 590kPa 970kPa 150kPa 290kPa 590kPa 970kPa

Column inlet pressure Column inlet pressure

Fig. 3.5.1 Available setting ranges (He, H2) Fig. 3.5.2 Available setting ranges (N2)
0-1 ml/min, 0-1 kPa is not a valid setting 0-1 ml/min, 0-1 kPa is not a valid setting

NOTE When options are added to the flow line, the range above becomes narrow.

42 GC-2010 Plus
 3 AFC, APC
3.5 AFC and APC Control Ranges

The allowable pure flow rate setting depends on the column inlet pressure. Figure 3.5.3
shows the range of purge flow rates permitted.

300

250
Purge flow rate (ml/min)

200

150
Setting range
100

50

0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Column inlet pressure (kPa)

5
Purge flow rate (ml/min)

3
Setting range
2

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Column inlet pressure (kPa)

Fig. 3.5.3

Allowable APC settings are shown below, for a supply pressure of 500 kPa. (When the
supply pressure is less than 500 kPa, the available maximum flow rate decreases
proportionally.) When the set value is more than the set range, displayed values may not be
accurate, or APC cannot control the flow.

Air (detector = FID) : 0 to 1,000 ml/min

H2 (detector = FID) : 0 to 100 ml/min
Makeup gas (detector = FID) : 0 to 100 ml/min
Makeup gas (detector = TCD) : 0 to 20 ml/min

GC-2010 Plus 43
 33.6
3 AFC, APC
. 3.6 AFC and APC Offset Calibration

The AFC and APC pressure and flow rate sensors can be calibrated (zeroed).
This calibration is required to correct minute deviations of the sensor values which may
occur after long periods of use. If the sensor values deviate, “0.5 kPa” or “0.5 ml/min” could
be displayed, for example, even through there is no actual pressure of flow. When data
reproducibility is important, perform the offset calibration.
For the AFC, perform the offset calibration using the following procedure.
(In the case of WBI analysis, remove the WBI column from the injection port before the fol-
lowing procedure. After the proceduce attach the column to injection port as before.)

(1) Press[SYSTEM]key, toggle key, PF1 key, and change “Start GC” to “Manual Start”(refer
to Fig.3.6.1 or 3.6.2).
If “Manual Start” was already set, proceed to the next step.
(2) Turn off the power. Wait until the column oven, the injection port and the detector have
cooled down to 50 °C or less.
(3) Turn on the power. Wait for approximately 1 minute.
(4) Press the [FLOW] key once and the toggle key twice, in that order. Then, the Fig. 3.6.2
opens.
(5) Press the PF2 key. The message “Zero Calibration Start” appears at the bottom of the
monitor. Approximately 10 seconds later, the message “Zero calibration completed”
appears. Calibration of the AFC is complete.
(6) Return the “Start GC” setting to its original status.

NOTE Refer to "5 Basic Key Operation".

Fig. 3.6.1

44 GC-2010 Plus
 3 AFC, APC
3.6 AFC and APC Offset Calibration

Fig. 3.6.2

Perform the offset calibration of the APC using the following procedure.

(1) Press[SYSTEM]key, toggle key, PF1 key, and change “Start GC” to “Manual Start” (refer
to Fig.3.6.1 or 3.6.2).
If “Manual Start” was already set, proceed to the next step.
(2) Turn off the power. Wait until the column oven has cooled down sufficiently.
(3) Turn on the power. Wait for approximately 1 minute.
(4) Press the [DET] key, the [PF2] key and the toggle key, in that order. The screen shown
in Fig. 3.6.3 opens.
(5) Make sure that flow monitors of each gases do not change. When they change, wait for
a while. Press the PF2 key. The message “Zero calibration Start” appears at the bottom
of the monitor. Approximately 10 seconds later, the message “Zero calibration
completeds” appears. Calibration of the APC is complete.
(6) Return the “Start GC” setting to its original status.

GC-2010 Plus 45
 3 AFC, APC
3.6 AFC and APC Offset Calibration

Fig. 3.6.3

46 GC-2010 Plus
44.1
4 Installing the column
. 4.1 Capillary Column Overview

Two types of columns can be installed in a gas chromatograph.

The first type, the capillary column, chemically fuses the liquid phase to the interior of the column
wall.
The other type, the packed column, fills the interior of the column with packing material, with the liq-
uid phase coating the particles. This type of column is becoming obsolete.

Fused silica, chemically bonded, capillary columns are in wide use today, this chapter describes
capillary column installation in a split/splitless injection system. Analytical conditions, as well as the
analytes, determine the column selection.
Column vary in length, polarity, film thickness, and inner diameter.
The GC-2010 Plus is designed to be used only with capillary columns. For using packed columns,
contact your Shimadzu representative.

GC-2010 Plus 47
 44.2
4 Installing the column
. 4.2 Location of Heated Zones

The capillary column can be installed in the following heated zones.

Injection port 6−8 (Normally installed in 7)

If 8 is selected, an auto injector cannot be installed.
Detector 1−4 (Normally installed in 4)

8 4

7 3

6 2

5 1

Top view

Fig. 4.2.1 Location of heated zones

48 GC-2010 Plus
44.3
4 Installing the column
. 4.3 Installing the column hanger

Insert the column hanger into hanger slots inside the column oven as shown.
The hanger is a standard accessory.
Squeeze the top of the hanger in order to insert in the slots.
When one hanger is installed, insert it in the back slots. Install two hangers in both the front and
back slots. The second hanger is optional.

Column hanger

Fig. 4.3.1

GC-2010 Plus 49
 44.4
4 Installing the column
. 4.4 Proper Placement of graphite Ferrules

WARNING
Wear safety glasses when handling the capillary column, to prevent
eye injuries

4.4.1 Placing graphite ferrules on the column

Graphite ferrules are required for proper sealing. Follow these procedures to place one fer-
rule at each end of the capillary column.
The graphite adjuster marked with an “S” or “F” to indicate whether it is for the injection port
or detector side.
S: For Split/spiltless injection port
F: For FID (detector)

(1) Remove the wire from a new graphite ferrule. Slide the graphite ferrule on the capillary
column.

Graphite ferrule

Wire that comes with new ferrules Slide ferrule on to capillary column

Fig. 4.4.1 Fig. 4.4.2

(2) Pull the capillary column through the column insertion jig so that 10 mm of column
protrudes. Tighten the column nut to fasten the ferrule to the column at that position
(tighten the column nut by hand, then 3/4 turn further with two wrenches in opposition).

10mm

Column injection jig

Fasten the ferrule at this position
Column nut

Fig. 4.4.3

(3) Because graphite may be present on the column end, the column must be clipped as
shown below.
(a) Clip the column so it is flush with the and of the jig.

Clip the column here

Fig. 4.4.4

(b) The edge of the cut must be completely straight.

Fig. 4.4.5

50 GC-2010 Plus
 4 Installing the column
4.4 Proper Placement of graphite Ferrules

NOTE Use only capillary column scoring tool to clip the column. (P/N 221-50595-91)

(4) Remove the slipped graphite with tweezers, etc. At that time, be careful not to damage
the capillary column.

Remove this additional graphite.

Fig. 4.4.6
NOTE Graphite which becomes lodged under the adjuster must be removed from the column. If alolowed to
remain, the graphite could clog the capillary adapter. If this occurs, unclog the adapter with com-
pressed air or a thin wire.

4.4.2 Positioning the graphite ferrule

Position the ferrules as shown below (Fig. 4.4.7).
If the adjusters were used to fasten the ferrules to the column as described in the previous
section, the ferrules should already be in the proper location.
In the split injection method using the wide bore column, fix the graphite ferrule at a place
15 mm from the column end. The ferrule adjuster included in the accessories is not available
for this case.

FID Detector column

insertion length

TCD Detector column

insertion length

Split/Splitless
WBI
Injection port column
insertion length
69 mm

When the splitless

analysis is 50 mm
performed using the
wide bore column 34 mm

15 mm

Graphite ferrule

Capillary column

Fig. 4.4.7 Attaching position of graphite ferrule

GC-2010 Plus 51
 44.5
4 Installing the column
. 4.5 Installing and removing the capillary column

WARNING
Do not install or remove the capillary column until the temperature of
the column oven, injection port and detector have dropped below
50 °C. Danger of burns.

4.5.1 Installing the capillary column

(1) Attach the capillary column to the column hanger.

(2) Connect the capillary column to the injection port and the detector.
Note the following items during column installation:
(a) Do not force the column to bend too far.
(If the column does not reach the injection port or the detector, unwind a loop of the
column.)
(b) Ensure that the capillary column does not touch the oven wall.

NOTE Tighten the column nuts first by hand, then an additional half turn by wrench.

4.5.2 Removing the capillary column

Remove the capillary column according to the following procedure.

If the system is operating, press the [SYSTEM] key and select [Stop GC] (PF menu). The
heated zones wil begin to cool down. Press the [MONIT] key, and ensure that the
temperatures of the injection port, the detector and the column oven are 50 °C or less. Press
the [FLOW] key, and select [Off] (PF menu) to turn off carrier gas flow. When the column
inlet pressure decreases to 0 kpa, it is safe to remove the column.
Remove the capillary column by reversing the procedures described in “1. Installing the
capillary column”.

52 GC-2010 Plus
 55.1
5 Basic Key Operation
. 5.1 Keypad Description and Operation

The keypad functions control the unit, and displays the operational status.

STATUS/ Indicates the status of STATUS

START key TEMP/ the entire GC, the lamp
STOP key FLOW lamp heater and the flow
controller, respectively. TEMP lamp
STATUS TEMP FLOW Flow lamp
START STOP DIAG SYSTEM

START/ Starts/stops analysis. SYSTEM

SYSTEM Display the GC
STOP key key start/stop screen. key
DIAG key

DIAG key Executes and allows

diagnosis settings.
Screen Displays 16 lines of
information at a time on
SET the large display area. PF key
MONIT key PF key Selects “PF (programmable
functions)” displayed at the
SET key Displays the list of bottom of the screen.
frequently accessed
items.
FUNC key
Toggle key Toggles among PF items Toggle key
MONIT key Monitors the GC status displayed.
and the chromatogram.
PF1 PF2 PF3

Toggle key Sets On/Off of backlight

UNIT key ON
+ and adjustment of
FUNC key Displays items
MONIT SET Cursor contrast.
which are not keys
COL FUNC
frequenty used.
OFF
Cursor keys
FLOW 7 8 9
Cursor Moves the cursor up,
UNIT keys Displays the setup keys down, left and Ten keys
HELP key screen for the zone INJ 4 5 6 right respectively.
indicated on the key.
DET 1 2 3
Numeric Inputs numeric values.
ENTER
keys
OPTION 0 • –

HELP key Explains currently ENTER Validates input or

HELP CE ENTER
displayed items. key selection.
CE key
CE key Clears a numeric input
or error.

GC-2010 Plus 53
 5 Basic Key Operation
5.1 Keypad Description and Operation

5.1.1 Keypad operation

The keypad is used to operate the system and make parameter settings. The table below
shows the function of each key.
Name Function
START key Starts the temperature program, pressure/flow rate program and time program.
If a Pre-Run program is set, the Pre-Run program starts.
STOP key Stops the program.
DIAG key Performs unit self-diagnosis.
Also, used for maintenance functions such as confirmation of various logs, part
replacement status, and standard signal out put.
SYSTEM key Starts/stops GC.
Manages the analytical condition file.
PF key Selects the PF menu displayed at bottom of the screen.
(PF = programmable function)
Toggle key Toggles through the PF menu displayed at bottom of the screen.
MONIT key Monitors the GC status and analysis status.
Displays the GC temperature, pressure and flow rate status for each heated zone,
as well as chromatograms.
SET key Accesses commonly-used items, such as temperature, pressure and flow rate for
each component on one screen.
Manages the analytical condition file like the [SYSTEM] key.
FUNC key Accesses less frequently used items.
COL key Sets the oven temperature program.
FLOW key Sets the carrier gas flow rate parameters, such as pressure, flow rate and split
ratio.
INJ key Sets the temperature of injection port (or temperature program for an OCI/PTV).
DET key Sets the detector temperature, range and current or other detector-related param-
eters.
OPTION key Sets the parameters for optional units, such as an auto injector or CRG.
HELP key Describes the procedure and sugggests valid parameter ranges.
Jumps to a desired item using an index function.
Cursor key Moves cursor up, down, left and right.
[ △ ], [ ▽ ], [ ] and [ ] A blinking cursor indicates the location of parameter value entry.
△

[ ] and [ ] keys may be used to change the selection.

△

Numeric keys Enter numeric values.

[0] ~ [9]
Clear key ・ Clears the current numeric value.
[CE] key ・ Clears display and alarm during an error.
ENTER key Validates parameter input or item selection.

54 GC-2010 Plus
 5 Basic Key Operation
5.1 Keypad Description and Operation

5.1.2 Screen

The areas of the 16-line screen display a variety of items. These items are divided by lines
on the screen.
If all items cannot be displayed on one screen, “ △ ” and “ ▽ ” are displayed in the message
line. Scroll through the screen by moving the cursors.

Displays the screen title and

the GC status (“READY”,
“NOT READY” or “RUN”
etc.).

Displays a message or error

about the operating procedure.

Displays the menu selected

by the [PF] key.

Fig. 5.1.1

■ [Return] (PF menu)

[Return] (PF menu) displayed in the PF menu line returns the display to the previous screen.
[Return] (PF menu) is displayed in PF1.

■ Actual and set values

Actual (current) values are highlighted, while set values are underlined. The actual value
blinks when it is NOT READY (the actual value has not reached the set value). When the
values are equal (READY state), the actual value stops blinking.

Actual values Set values

Fig. 5.1.2

GC-2010 Plus 55
 5 Basic Key Operation
5.1 Keypad Description and Operation

5.1.3 Status indicators

Three status lights indicate the GC status regardless of the screen display. The STATUS,
TEMP and FLOW lights indicate the GC status, the temperature control status and the gas
control status, respectively. Light color and illumination are also used to indicate instrument
parameter status.

■ STATUS indicator
Color Status Meaning
Off Power is OFF.
On System is ready.
Green
Blinking Program, like the temperature program, are executing.
On System is OFF. Alternatively, the system is ON, but is not ready.
Yellow
Blinking Diagnosis, baking or flow controller calibration is being executed.
Red On An error has occurred in system.

■ TEMP indicator
Color Status Meaning
Off Temperature control is not performed.
On All temperature controlled zones are ready.
Green Temperature program is running. Alternatively, the column
Blinking
CRG valve is closing (Col-CRG auto off)
On One of the temperature controlled zones is not ready.
Yellow
Blinking Temperature program is finished, and system is being cooled.
Red On An error related to temperature control has occurred.

■ FLOW indicator
Color Status Meaning
Off Gas control is not performed.
On All gas control lines are ready.
Green Pressure/flow rate program is running, it is sampling time, or
Blinking
high pressure injection is occurring.
One of the gas control lines is not ready. Alternatively, the system
On is waiting for restoration. (Gas saver AOC link, Gas saver auto
Yellow on or Splitless auto off)
Pressure/flow rate program is finished, and default values are
Blinking
being set.
Red On An error related to gas control has occurred.

56 GC-2010 Plus
55.2
5 Basic Key Operation
. 5.2 Adjusting The Display

NOTE In the following procedure, [Toggle] + [ ▽ ] key indicates that [ ▽ ] key is pressed while pressing and
holding the [Toggle] key.

Turn the backlit LCD display on and off by pressing [Toggle] + [ ▽ ] to turn it off and [Toggle]
+ [ △ ] to turn it on.
When the keypad is not in use, turning the backlit LCD display off is recommended, to pro-
long the life of the display.
The display turns off automatically with the backlit display saver (See "16.6.11 Other
Settings"). When the display turns itself off, turn it back on by pressing any key.
To adjust the contrast the contrast, stand in front of the screen and press the [Toggle] + [ ]

△
or [ ] keys.
△

PF1 PF2 PF3

[Toggle] key
ON

MONIT SET

COL FUNC
OFF

FLOW 7 8 9

INJ 4 5 6

DET 1 2 3

Fig. 5.2.1

GC-2010 Plus 57
 55.3
5 Basic Key Operation
. 5.3 Basic Key Operations

5.3.1 Screen display

Use the following 10 keys to display the parameter and status screens:
[DIAG], [SYSTEM], [MONIT], [SET], [FUNC], [COL], [FLOW], [INJ], [DET] and [OPTION].
Access the main function screens by pressing one of these keys, then the secondary
screens by selecting a PF menu item displayed at the bottom of the screen. (Because the
PF menu includes direct operations, some PF menu items do not have secondary screens.)

■ PF menu item selection

Select a desired PF menu item by pressing the PF keys ([PF1], [PF2] and [PF3]) underneath
the screen, which correspond to PF menu items.

PF menu PF menu

Toggle key
File LineConfg Customiz

PF key
PF1 PF2 PF3

[Toggle] key
PF key
ON

MONIT SET

Fig. 5.3.1

If the PF menu continues over two or more pages, press the [Toggle] key to display the
desired PF menu, then press the [PF] key.

Example:

1st page of PF menu

Indicates page 1.

Press the [Toggle] key to display the 2nd page.

Indicates page 2.

58 GC-2010 Plus
 5 Basic Key Operation
5.3 Basic Key Operations

5.3.2 Moving the cursor

Use the four keys, [ △ ], [ ▽ ], [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to an item to be set.

△
However, for screens with listed items, only the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys may be available to move
the cursor. The [ ] and [ ] keys may perform a different function.

△
■ Moving the cursor using the [ △ ], [ ▽ ], [ ] and [ ] keys

△
Example: Main screen of the [COL] key

Move the cursor using the

[△], [▽], [ ] and [ ] keys.

△
Fig. 5.3.2

■ Moving the cursor using only the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys

Example: Main screen of the [FLOW] key

Move the cursor to each

parameter using the [ △ ]
and [ ▽ ] keys.

Items marked with “ ” and

△

“ ” use the [ ] and [ ]

△

keys to change the selection.

For example, these keys
change the Split mode setting
in the following order:
SPLIT → SPLITLESS →
DIRECT → SPLIT.

Fig. 5.3.3

GC-2010 Plus 59
 5 Basic Key Operation
5.3 Basic Key Operations

5.3.3 Entering numeric values

Enter a numeric value using the following procedure:

(1) Move the cursor to an item to be set.
(2) Use the numeric keys to enter a number.
(3) Press the [ENTER] key to validate the input.

NOTE The value becomes valid when the [ENTER] key is pressed.
If you move the cursor or display another screen before pressing the [ENTER] key, the value is
deleted.
To clear a value before pressing the [ENTER] key, press the [CE] key.

5.3.4 Changing a selection

Parameters marked with “ ” and “ ” are changed by making another selection. Change
△

the selection using the following procedure.

(1) Move the cursor to the item.
(2) Select a desired choice by pressing the [ ] and [ ] key.
△

(3) Press the [ENTER] key to validate the selection. △

NOTE The selection change becomes valid when the [ENTER] key is pressed.
If you move the cursor or display another screen before pressing the [ENTER] key, the change is not
made.
To clean the selection before pressing the [ENTER] key, press the [CE] key.

Change the selection by

pressing the [ ] and [ ] key.
△

△
In this example, the selection
changes in this order:
On → Off → On ...
Press the [ENTER] key to
validate the selection.

Fig. 5.3.4

60 GC-2010 Plus
 5 Basic Key Operation
5.3 Basic Key Operations

5.3.5 Changing item names

Customize file names and other names with alphanumeric characters and symbols. Change
the name using the following procedure:
(1) Move the cursor to an item to be changed using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys.
(2) Move the cursor to a character to be changed using the [ ] and [ ] keys.

△
△
(3) Input a character as described in the following section on entering characters. The
character input procedure described below.
(4) Press the [ENTER] key to validate the input.
(5) Repeat steps (2) to (4) to enter a name.
(6) Press the [CE] key to delete one character at the cursor’s current position.

Fig. 5.3.5

GC-2010 Plus 61
 5 Basic Key Operation
5.3 Basic Key Operations

■ Entering characters
Initially, the character input screen is in upper case mode.
Press [LowerChr] (PF menu) to select lower case mode. Press [NumerChr] (PF menu) to
select numeric mode.
Alphabetic mode (upper case/lower case)

Key Toggled characters

1 A/a → B/b → C/c → A/a →・ ・ ・
2 D/d → E/e → F/f → F/f →・ ・ ・
3 G/g → H/h → I/i → G/g → ・ ・ ・
4 J/j → K/k → L/l → J/j →・ ・ ・
5 M/m → N/n → O/o → M/m → ・ ・ ・
6 P/p → Q/q → R/r → P/p →・ ・ ・
7 S/s → T/t → U/u → S/s →・ ・ ・
8 V/v → W/w → X/x → V/v →・ ・ ・
9 Y/y → Z/z → Y/y →・ ・ ・
0 0 → 1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→9→0→ ・ ・ ・
． (blank) → ． → ， → ＋ → － → ＊ → ／ → ＃ → ＄ → ％ → ＆ → (blank) → ・ ・ ・
－ ＆ → ％ → ＄ → ＃ → ／ → ＊ → － → ＋ → ， → ． → (blank) → ＆ → ・ ・ ・

Numeric mode
Press the [0] to [9] keys to input numbers “0” to “9”.
Press the [-] and [ ・ ] keys to toggle the symbols.

62 GC-2010 Plus
 55.4
5 Basic Key Operation
. 5.4 Getting Help

The Help function describes items on the setup screens.

Understanding the items helps to quickly and efficienty set up analytical parameters and proceed
to the operations.

5.4.1 Screen Help

If you do not know the meaning of an item on the screen, press the [HELP] key on the
screen to display the item and its description. For example, Fig.5.4.1 displays the Diagnosis
Help text.
Items which may be difficult to understand are linked to further descriptions, Access these
underlined item descriptions by pressing [Display] (PF Menu) with the cursor on the item.
Fig. 5.4.2 shows the pop-up screen linked to the word “Log”.

[Display]

[Back]

Fig. 5.4.1 Help screen Fig. 5.4.2 Linked screen

5.4.2 PF menu

PF menu Description
Return Returns to the screen displayed before [HELP] key was pressed.
Display Displays the explanation on item at the cursor position.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

GC-2010 Plus 63
 5 Basic Key Operation
5.4 Getting Help

This page is intentionally left blank.

64 GC-2010 Plus
 66.1
6 Analysis Flow Chart
. 6.1 Analysis Flow Chart

6.1.1 Preparation

Glass insert preparation Confirm that the insert is appropriate for the injection mode, that the
silica wool has not moved, and that the glass insert O-ring has not
deteriorated.

Septum preparation After approximately 100 injections, replace the septum.

(50 injections for a thick needle)

Column preparation Attach the column to the hanger, install the hanger, and verify the
proper position of the graphite ferrules. Tighten the injection port and
detector collumn nuts.
When the above preparations are complete, turn on the GC.

6.1.2 Setting Parameters

Set the column information From the [Column] (PF menu) of the [FLOW] key screen, set the column
and the flow rates inner diameter, the column length and the film thickness. From the
[Purge] (PF menu) of the [FLOW] key screen, set the purge flow rate.
From the [FLOW] key screen, set the column inlet pressure,
the injection mode, the split ratio, the sampling time, etc.
Changing the column temperature after the flow rate has been set
may change the flow rate.

Set the temperature of the From the screens of the [INJ] and [DET] keys, set the temperatures.
detector and the injection port If the detector is set to “Off”, turn it “On”. From [DET Gas] (PF
menu), set hydrogen, air, makeup gas, etc.

Set the COL temperature and From the screen of the [COL] key, set the column initial temperature
the temperature program and the temperature program. The column temperature settings
must be within the permitted column range and must be less than
detector temperature.

Start GC control Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the main screen.
Press [Start GC] (PF menu) to start GC control.
Press the [MONIT] key, and ensure that the temperature of each
zone, the gas flow rate, the gas pressure, etc. are correct.

Set the detector From the screen of the [DET] key, set the range and the time filter
constant.
Ensure that the temperature of the detector is rising, then ignite the
FID or set the TCD current value.

When all parameters reach their respective setup values, the STATUS indicator light
becomes green and the system is ready for analysis.

The default zero parameter, “Zero at Ready” zeroes the detector sig-
nal when the GC is ready.

GC-2010 Plus 65
 6 Analysis Flow Chart
6.1 Analysis Flow Chart

6.1.3 Analysis

Set the data processing Perform the required settings for the data processing unit, such as
unit specifying the processing parameters.

Check the baseline Press the [MONIT] key, and ensure that the baseline is stable.
Press [Zero Adj] (PF menu) to zero the detector output. When the
baseline is stable, you can start analysis.

Inject the sample Aspirate the sample in the syringe, inject it into the GC injection port,
and press [START] to analyze it.
For capillary column analysis, normally inject 1 µL or less liquid.
(1-2 µL available)

WARNING
Wear protective goggles when using a
Hold here
syringe to inject samples.
The syringe plunger could be expelled
due to injection port back pressure.
Sample could get into the eyes.
By holding and supporting the plunger
from the side with your middle finger,
you can smoothly inject the sample and
keep the plunger in the syringe. (Example)
Do not bend the plunger when holding How to hold a syringe
when injection
the syringe in this position.

66 GC-2010 Plus
 6 Analysis Flow Chart
6.1 Analysis Flow Chart

■ Glass insert (liner)

・ There are two types of glass inserts, one
for split analysis and the other for
25mm
splitless/WBI analysis. Select the correct
type based on the sample injection
method.
A glass insert for split analysis can be used
for splitless analysis. For the AOC-20i auto
injector, the silica wool is normally positioned
Silica wool
25 mm from the upper end of the glass
insert for split. On the other hand, the silica
wool is positioned at bottom of the glass
insert for splitless.
・ The quantity and position of the glass
wool in the insert directly affects the
reproducibility of results. For the AOC-
5.5mm
20i auto injector, the glass wool is nor-
mally positioned 25 mm from the upper
end of the glass insert.
・ Samples come into direct contact with
the inner surface of the glass insert and
the silica wool. On these hot surfaces, For split analysis For splitless/
unstable compounds may be decomposed WBI analysis

or adsorbed. If this occurs, use deacti- Fig. Correct placement of silica wool
vated lineas and glass wool.

■ Analytical column
・ Verify that carrier gas is flowing for enough time to flush the air in the column before
increasing the column oven temperature. Otherwise, the column liquid phase becomes
oxidized, and cannot separate compounds properly. This is especially important for polar
columns.
Press the [SYSTEM] key, and set a start time. This ensures that carrier gas flows for the
set time prior to temperature control of the heated zones.
・ Selection of the analysis column is very important in GC analysis. In general, select a
liquid phase whose polarity and chemical characteristics are similar to those of the
analysis target compound to obtain good peak shape. However, highly polar columns
require low temperatures and do not last long.
Therfore, when analyzing an unknown sample, begin by analyzing it on a neutral column
at higher temperatures. Switch to a more polar column if necessary.

■ Installing the analysis column

Install the column as described in sections 4.3, 4.4, and 4.5.
Use a box nut on the injection port side. Use a column nut on the detector side.

GC-2010 Plus 67
 6 Analysis Flow Chart
6.1 Analysis Flow Chart

Ferrule adjuster Injection port column installation Detector column installation

Injection port Detector

Thermal insulation cup

FID: 69 mm
34 mm
Ferrule adjuster TCD: 50 mm

15 mm
In the case of Ferrule
splitless analysis
with wide bore
Ferrule column

Column nut Column nut

for injection port

■ Sample injection modes

[Split injection]
In capillary columns, the inner diameter is small and the sample load capacity is low. Unlike
packed columns, only a small (less than 0.1 µL) amount of sample can be injected at one-
time. The split injection mode only allows part of the injected sample to enter the column.
This method is useful for samples of high consentration or about which nothing is known.
Try to perform a split injection method first. Set the split ratio to approximately 1:50 for the narrow bore
column (ex. 0.25 mm I.D.). If the target peak is too large, increase the split ratio. If the target peak is
too small or cannot be detected, decrease the split ratio. Select a proper split ratio in this way.
The standard to set the split ratio is [column flow rate + split ratio] ≧ 30 ml. The value varies
depending on the columns' inner diameter and flow rate. It is recommended to start with the
total flow rate of approximately 50 ml.
If the desired sensitivity cannot be achieved at [column flow rate + split ratio] < 20 ml,
consider other injection methods.
[Splitless injection]
In the splitless injection method, almost all of the sample amount injected is introduced in the
column by temporarily suspending the split flow.
This method is effective for analyzing a low concentration sample which cannot be easily
detected by the split injection method.
To reduce band broadening and sharpen peaks by condensation and vaporization of the
sample in the column, create a temperature ramp program. The column initial temperature is
set to a temperature lower than the boiling point of the sample solvent.
The high pressure injection can reduce the volume of vaporized sample solution and
improve the analysis repeatability.
[Direct injection]
In the direct injection method, almost the entire amount of injected sample is introduced into
a wide bore column. Because the inner diameter of the wide bore column is 0.45 mm or
more, separation is not as good as that of a column with smaller inner diameter. Because
the peak shape is broad, sensitivity may not be good enough.
For the direct injection method, the WBI (Wide Bore Injection) injection port is required.

68 GC-2010 Plus
 6 Analysis Flow Chart
6.1 Analysis Flow Chart

■ Setting the heated zone temperatures

The temperature of the injection port, the column oven and the detector are set individually.
Usually, the injection port and the detector are set to a temperature higher than the column.
Temperature of the injection port varies according to the target substances. Set the tempera-
ture where an injected sample instantaneously evaporates. Always set the detector tem-
perature higher than the column temperature.
Never set the column temperature higher than the detector because the detector could
become contaminated.
When creating a temperature program, be careful not to set the final oven temperature
higher than that of the detector.

■ Column temperature program

Use a temperature program mainly to analyze samples with a wide boiling point range.
When developing analytical conditions for an unknown sample or a sample which will gener-
ate an unpredictable elution attend, use an initial program with a low inital temperature (40 ~
50 °C) and a temperature increase rate of approximately 10 °C/min. Based on the results,
check the temperature range in which the peaks appear, then examine the analytical
conditions. This procedure facilitates time program development.

■ Injection counter
The injection port septum and the glass insert are required to be inspected and replaced
periodically. The GC-2010 Plus probides a function which counts the number of injections.
When the number of injections exceeds the limit, you are prompted to perform maintenance.
(What is actually counted is the number of START times.)
Select the analysis counter on the [DIAG] key screen to set and reset the counter limit. Set
the limit to perform maintenance on a regular basis.
The septum/glass insert replacement cycle varies, depending on the analytical conditions
and samples. If the glass insert is easily contaminated (when analyzing non-volatile com-
punds for example), set a low counter limit. On the other hand, when analyzing cleaner sam-
ples, the limit can be increased.

■ Starting up the GC
Turn on the power and/or press the [SYSTEM] key to display the GC starup screen. On this
screen, specify the files used for instrument startup and instrument cleaning (column bake -
out).
Press [Start GC] (PF menu) to start temperature control of each heated zone accoding to the
parameters set in the file.
A start up method should be used to initialize the system once it has been turned on. Set the
start up method to “auto” to start the file as soon as the power is on; this helps with instru-
ment recovery after a power failure.
The initial step in the startup method should be turning on the carrier gas flow. After a set
time, increase the injection port and detector temperatures. The column oven temperature
can then be set to increase. The oven temperature increases last to protect the column from
damate and the detctor from contamination. The GC-2010 Plus controls the temperatrues so
that the column tempertrure never increases above the detector temperature, even if all tem-
peratures are set to increase at the same time.
A clean up method uses higher oven temperatures than those used for the analysis. After
set bake-out time, return the temperatures to their normal analytical parameter.

GC-2010 Plus 69
 6 Analysis Flow Chart
6.1 Analysis Flow Chart

■ Shutting down the GC

To shut down the system, select [Stop GC] (PF menu) on the [SYSTEM] key screen. Then,
the system stops temperature control after the period of time set as the stop time, flows the
carrier gas for the period of time set as the flow-off time, then stops.
When shutting down the GC, the temperature of each part should be decreased at first, then
the carrier gas should be stopped so that the column can be protected. It is convenient to
use the stop time and the flow-off time.
Do not turn off the power, before select [Stop GC] (PF menu).
When shutting down the GC, the heated zones are cooled, and then the carrier gas flow is
turned off. To accomplish these in the correct sequence automatically, use a stop time (this
stops temperature control at the set time) and flow off time (turns off carrier gas flow at the
set time). Do not turn off the GC without first selecting [Stop GC] (PF menu). Because the
carrier gas flow stops before the heated zones are cooled.

■ Obtaining reproducible analysis results

Follow these suggestions to obtain reproducible results:
・ Use an AOC-20i auto injector.
・ If more than one heated zone is dedicated as an injection port, but only one injection port
is in use, do not increase the temperatures of the unused zones.
・ If dual injections are normally perfomed, but single injections are being done, place the
auto injectors on both injection ports.
・ The GC is designed to perform optimally at room temperatures of 18-28 °C. Room tem-
peratures above 28 °C will negatively inpact reproducibility.

70 GC-2010 Plus
 77.1
7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
. 7.1 [SYSTEM] Key Main Screen

7.1.1 Screen Description

The [SYSTEM] key main screen contains parameters related to starting and stopping the
GC. When you press the [SYSTEM] key while the GC is in the system Off state, the screen
shown in Fig. 7.1.1 appears. (However, if automatic start was set, the GC starts as soon as
the power is turned on, and the screen shown in Fig. 7.1.1 does not appear.) To set up
parameters related to the GC start, such as start time and clean up method on or off, press
[Start GC] (PF menu). The GC starts, then enters standby mode according to the main
screen setting.
However, if the GC is in system ON mode, pressing the [SYSTEM] key will access the
screen shown in Fig. 7.1.2. Here, set up parameters relating to turning off the GC (such as
stop time, flow off time, sleep time, etc.). Once the parameters have been specified, press
[Stop GC] (PF menu) to begin the GC stop operations. If no program is running, the stop
time countdown begins immediately. If a program is running, the countdown begins once the
program is finished. When the countdown elapses, the GC stops and shuts down according
to the GC stop parameters.

Fig. 7.1.1 Main screen accessed in system Fig. 7.1.2 Main screen accessed in system
Off state On state

GC-2010 Plus 71
 7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
7.1 [SYSTEM] Key Main Screen

7.1.2 Parameter

CURRENT FILE
Selection: File No. 0−9, Default: File No. 0
Changes the currently loaded file.
The GC will be controlled based on the parameters in the specified file.
START TIME
Range: 0.0−6000.0 min, Default: 0.0 min
Sets the period of time after flow control starts until temperature/detector control starts.
START TEMP/DET
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
Select “Yes” to start temperature/detector control after the start time is finished.
Select “No” to continuously flow the carrier gas and not to start temperature/detector control.
DETECTOR
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
Prepaies the configured detector for analysis, but does not ignite the FID or FPD.
AUTO IGNIT
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
Ignites the FID/FPD detector automatically.
Select “On” for the FID/FPD detector to stand by in the ignited state. Select “Off” for it to
standby without igniting.
CLEAN UP
Selection: Off/ Analysis Para/Clean Up Para, Default: Off
“Clean up” indicates running a GC program without injecting sample. Select whether to run
the clean up program after the GC enters Ready state.
If the maximum temperature of the clean up oven temperature program is too close to
maximum temperature of the column, select “Analysis Para” to perform clean up using a
regular analysis program.
STOP TIME
Range: 0.0−6000.0 min, Default: 0.0 min
Sets the period of time after [Stop GC] (PF menu) is pressed (or after a program finishes if
the program was running) to stop temperature control and cool the heated zones.
FLOW OFF TIME
Range: 0.0−6000.0 min, Default: --- (because the gas control is set to “Cont”.)
Sets the period of time after temperature/detector control ends until gas control ends.
This item cannot be set if “Flow Control” is “Cont” (that is, if carrier gas is kept flowing).
FLOW CONTROL
Selection: End/Cont, Default: Cont
Select [End] to stop gas control after the flow OFF time finishes. This stops the flow of carrier
gas.
Select [Cont] to continue the carrier gas flow.
SLEEP TIME
Range: 0.0−6000.0 min, Default: --- (because the RESTART GC is set to “Off”.)
Sets the period of time after temperature/detector control ends until the GC restarts.
This item cannot be set if the GC is set to not restart.
RESTART GC
Selection: On/Off, Default: Off
Select [On] to restart the GC after the sleep time elapses.
Select [Off] to disable automatic GC restart.

72 GC-2010 Plus
 7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
7.1 [SYSTEM] Key Main Screen

7.1.3 PF menu

PF menu Reference
Description
item section
Start GC Starts GC according to the parameters on the [SYSTEM] key main screen. ――
Starts GC according to the parameters on the [SYSTEM] key main screen.
If no program is running,the stop time countdown begins immediately when
Stop GC [Stop GC] (PF menu) is selected. ――
If [Stop GC] is selected while a program is running, the stop time countdown
begins after the program finishes.
Displays the file list to change to another method file.
File 8.2
On this sub screen, select files to load, edit, copy, initialize and rename.
Sets clean up parameters.
Clean Up 7.2
In system ON state, select direct operation (PF menu) to run the clean up.
Sets the parameters for the next GC start up.
Start Seq Start time, detector and clean up parameters on this sub screen are 7.3
immediately reflected on the [SYSTEM] key main screen.
Sets the stop procedures.
Stop Seq 7.4
This item is not displayed in system ON state.
Prepares the GC for maintenance of the injection port (replacement of
18.3,
septum, glass insert, etc.) .
Maint INJ 18.4,
When GC is ready for maintenance, the message “GC is ready for maintenance”
18.5
appears.
Restores the GC for analysis after performing injection port maintenance.
Anal. ――
When pressed after maintenance of injection port is completed.

NOTE Once [Maint INJ] in the PF menu is pressed, the [Anal.] button is not displayed until maintenance
becomes enabled. This operation cannot be cancelled so wait until INJ maintenance becomes
enabled.
When cancellation is necessary, turn off the power after the column temperature has lowered.
Turning off the power when the column temperature is high may deteriorate the column because
carrier gas supply is cut off.

GC-2010 Plus 73
 77.2
7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
. 7.2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters

7.2.1 Screen Description

Select [Clean Up] (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM] key main screen to display the clean up
parameter setup screen shown in Fig. 7.2.1. The parameters set for the clean up program
are set by including “Clean Up Para” as part of the GC start procedure.
Clean up should be performed to eliminate contamination before analysis.
Reform the clean up when the gas chromatograph has not been used for a while or if a new
column has been installed.

Fig. 7.2.1 Setting the clean up parameters

74 GC-2010 Plus
 7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
7.2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters

7.2.2 Parameter list

■ Main screen of clean up

COLUMN OVEN TEMP
Range: 0.0-450.0 °C (set value without exceeding the maximum temperature limits), Default:
25.0 °C
Sets the default value of the column oven temperature when the clean up file is used.
The temperature needs to be set without exceeding the maximum temperature indicated on
the column used.
The regular analysis parameters can be used for clean up by setting “Analysis Para” for the
start procedure.
For the maximum temperature limits, see "16.6.4 Setting the maximum temperature limits".
INLET PRESS
Range: 0.0−970.0 kPa (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 100.0 kPa
Sets the default value of the column inlet pressure for the clean up method.
PURGE FLOW RATE
Range: Refer to Fig. 3.5.3, Default: 3.0 ml/min
Sets the septum purge flow rate for the clean up method. The septum purge removes con-
tamination in the injection port near the septum. If the split ratio is set to “-1.0”, the total flow
rate remains fixed regardless of to the oven temperature.
SPLIT RATIO
Range: -1.0/0.0−9999.9, Default: -1.0
Sets the split ratio for the clean up method.
Set the split ratio to “-1.0” for the total flow rate to remain fixed regardless of the oven
temperature.
INJECTION PORT TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C, Default: 250.0 °C
Sets the injection port temperature for the clean up method.
DETECTOR TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C (in FID), Default: 250.0 °C
Sets the detector temperature for the clean up method.
For any detector other than an FID, its set temperature must be within the valid range of the
detector.
MAKE UP FLOW RATE
The range and default value depends upon the kind of detector. Refer to the values given for
each detector.
Make up gas is inert gas which maximizes detector sensitivity. This sets its flow rate for the
clean up method. Each type of detector requires different flow rates of make up gas.
AUX APC PRESS
Range: 0.0−970.0 kPa, Default: 100.0 kPa
Sets the AUX APC pressure for the clean up method.
This item is only valid when an AUX APC has been installed.

GC-2010 Plus 75
 7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
7.2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters

■ Clean up column oven temperature program

(The clean up temperature program consists of a single program ramp.)

CLEAN UP RATE
Range: END/-250.00−250.00 °C/min, Default: END
Sets the rate of column temperature increase for the clean up program.
Refer to "1.2.1 Column oven".
CLEAN UP TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C
Sets the final temperature for the column oven temperature clean up program.
Do not exceed the maximum column temperature.
CLEAN UP TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 0.00 min
Sets the final temperature hold time for the clean up program.

■ Clean up column Inlet pressure program

(The clean up pressure program consits of a single program ramp.)

CLEAN UP RATE
Range: END/-400.00−400.00 kPa/min, Default: END
Sets the rate of column inlet pressure for the clean up program.
The rate of pressure depends on the total flow rate.
CLEAN UP PRESS
Range: 0.0−970.0 kPa (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.) , Default: 0.0 kPa
Sets the final pressure for the column inlet pressure clean up program.
CLEAN UP TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 0.00 min
Sets the final pressure hold time for the clean up program.

■ Clean up total flow rate program

(The clean up total flow rate program consists of a single program ramp.)

CLEAN UP RATE
Range: END/-400.00−400.00 ml/min2, Default: END
Sets the rate of total flow increase for the clean up program.
CLEAN UP FLOW RATE
Range: 0.0−1200.0 ml/min (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 50.0 ml/min
Set the final flow rate for the total flow rate clean up program.
CLEAN UP TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 0.00 min
Sets the final flow rate hold time for the clean up program.

76 GC-2010 Plus
 7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
7.2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters

7.2.3 PF menu

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Temp Prog Sets the column oven temperature for the clean up program. 11.2
Press Prog Sets the column inlet pressure for the clean up program. 12.5.5
Flow Prog Sets the total flow rate for the clean up program. 12.5.6
Displayed only while GC is in system ON state. Immediately runs the clean ――
Run
up program.
Stops clean up. ――
Stop
This item is displayed only when the clean up program is in progress.
Next Line Displays the clean up program set up screen for another analytical flow line. ――

GC-2010 Plus 77
 77.3
7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
. 7.3 Specifying Start Procedures

7.3.1 Screen description

Select [Start Seq] (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM] key main screen to display the start
procedure setup screen shown in Fig. 7.3.1.
On this screen, set whether the system automatically starts (Auto Start) when the power is
next turned on, or whether the system does not start until [Start GC] (PF menu) is pressed
(Manual Start). Alternatively, only carrier gas flow is turned on the next time the power is
turned on. To start the system, select [Start GC] (PF menu) as for a manual start. This is
known as a semi-auto start. Finally, an analysis file can be set to begin the next time the
power is turned on or the GC is restarted. Any settings changed on this screen are reflected
in the [SYSTEM] key main screen.

Fig. 7.3.1 Setting the start procedures for the next GC restart

78 GC-2010 Plus
 7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
7.3 Specifying Start Procedures

7.3.2 Parameter list

FILE LOAD
Selection: File No. 0−9, Default: Current file
Selects a file to be loaded the next time the power is turned on or the GC restarted.
START GC
Selection: Auto Start/ Manual Start/Semi-Auto, Default: Manual Start
Sets the start method for the next time the power is turned on:
Select “Auto Start” to automatically start the GC.
Select “Manual Start” to start the GC by presssing [Start GC] (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM]
key main screen.
Select “Semi-Auto” to start carrier gas flow only. The GC must still be started by pressing
[Start GC] (PF menu) from the the [SYSTEM] key main screen.
START TIME
Range: 0.0−6000.0 min, Default: 0.0 min
Sets the period of time after gas control starts until temperature/detector control starts.
The “Start Time” value on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.
NOTE The start time set here can be overridden by entering another start time in the [Start GC] (PF menu)
screen.
This function is useful if the preset start time is too long.

START TEMP/DET
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
Select “Yes” to start temperature/detector control after the start time is elapses.
Select “No” to continue carrier gas flow only without starting temperature/detector control.
DETECTOR
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
Prepares the configured detector for analysis, but does not ignite the FID or FPD.
The “DETECTOR” setting on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.
AUTO IGNITE
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
Establishes FID/FPD ignition conditions.
Select “On” for the FID/FPD detector to stand by in the ignited state. Select “Off” for it stand
by without igniting.
The “AUTO IGNIT” setting on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.
CLEAN UP
Selection: Off/Analysis Para/Clean Up Para, Default: Off
When performing clean up, select whether to use an analysis method or the program set in
[Clean Up] (PF menu).
The “CLEAN UP” setting on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.

7.3.3 Example: starting the system with carrier gas flow

In this example, carrier gas flows for a certain period of time before temperature control
begins. Set the start time considering the polarity of the column used and dead time (time
spent until substances not adsorbed by the stationary phase elute).
• In the case of a 30 m neutral column and a 30 cm/sec linear velocity (dead time
100 sec.): Approximately 5 min.
• In the case of a 60 m high-polar column and a 20 cm/sec linear velocity (dead time
300 sec.): At least 10 min.
• If the system has been out of use for a time with no column connected:
set a START TIME of 1 to several hours.

GC-2010 Plus 79
 77.4
7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
. 7.4 Specifying the Stop Procedures

7.4.1 Screen

Select [Stop Seq] (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM] key main screen to display the stop
procedure setup screen shown in Fig. 7.4.1. “Stop Seq” is displayed only when the system is
in OFF state.
The stop procedure setup screen consists of parameters equivalent to those on the
[SYSTEM] key main screen when the GC is in system ON state, except that the current file
cannot be changed.
Parameter changes on the stop procedure setup screen are reflected on the [SYSTEM] key
main screen.

Fig. 7.4.1 Setting the stop procedures

7.4.2 Parameter list

STOP TIME
Range: 0.0−6000.0 min, Default: 0.0 min
Sets the period of time after [Stop GC] (PF menu) is pressed (or after a program finishes if
the program was running) to stop temperature/detector control.
The “STOP TIME” value on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.
FLOW OFF TIME
Range: 0.0−6000.0 min, Default: --- (because the gas control is set to “Cont”.)
Sets the period of time between the end of temperature/detector control and the end of gas
control.
This item cannot be set if “Flow Control” is “Cont” (that is, if carrier gas is kept flowing).
The [FLOW OFF TIME] setting on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.

80 GC-2010 Plus
 7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
7.4 Specifying the Stop Procedures

FLOW CONTROL
Selection: End/Cont, Default: Cont
Select “End” to end gas control after the flow off time elapses.
Select “Cont” to continue the carrier gas flow.
The “GAS CONTROL” setting on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.
SLEEP TIME
Range: 0.1−6000.0 min, Default: --- (because the RESTART GC could be set to “Off”.)
Sets the period of time after temperature/detector control ends until the GC restarts.
This item cannot be set if the GC is not set to restart automatically.
The “SLEEP TIME” setting on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.
RESTART GC
Selection: On/Off, Default: Off
Select “On” to restart the GC once the sleep time has elapsed.
Select “Off” to not restart the GC automatically.
The “Restart GC” setting on the [SYSTEM] key main screen is set here.

7.4.3 System shut down examples

The following examples show various situations where STOP TIME and FLOW OFF TIME
can be used effectively. The FLOW OFF TIME should be longer than the time for the column
oven cooling.
• After the end of an analysis, each heated zone is cooled. Once the column over is
cool, carrier gas flow is shut off.
STOP TIME = 0 minutes
FLOW CONTROL = End
FLOW OFF TIME = Approx. 20 minutes
• A column is conditioned, then the column oven is cooled. Carrier gas flow is then
shut down.
STOP TIME = Column conditioning time
FLOW CONTROL = End
FLOW OFF TIME = Approx. 20 minutes
• At the end of an analysis, each heated zone is cooled, but carrier gas is kept flowing
for rapid equilibration for the next day’s analysis. The next day, the system is automati-
cally restarted (15 hours = 900 minutes later), and temperature control resumes.
START TIME = 0 minutes (because the carrier gas continued to flow)
STOP TIME = 0 minutes
FLOW CONTROL = Cont (to keep carrier gas flow on)
RESTART GC = On
SLEEP TIME = 900 minutes (at the end of the SLEEP TIME, the GC
restarts)
• At the end of an analysis, each heated zone is cooled, and the carrier gas flow is
stopped once the column oven is cool. The following day (15 hours = 900 minutes
later), carrierr gas flow is turned back on and temperature control begins.
START TIME = 10 minutes (because carrier gas flow was off)
STOP TIME = 0 minute
FLOW CONTROL = End
FLOW OFF TIME = Approx. 20 minutes
RESTART GC = On
SLEEP TIME = 900 minutes (at the end of the SLEEP TIME, the GC
restarts)

GC-2010 Plus 81
 7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]
7.4 Specifying the Stop Procedures

NOTE When the GC is in the system Off state, the fan automatically stops based on the selection of the Fan
Stop Temp. Refer to "16.6.11 Other Settings" in "16.6 GC Configuration".

82 GC-2010 Plus
 88.1
8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
. 8.1 [SET] Key Main Screen

8.1.1 Main screen

Press the [SET] key to display the main screen shown in Fig. 8.1.1 and to make frequently
used parameter settings.
To make changes to the [COL], [FLOW], [INJ], and [DET] parameters, the [customiz] (PF
menu) key is pressed. Changes to these parameters are reflected in the [SET] key main
screen.
The screen shows parameters for the components which make up one analytical flow line
(injection port, detectors, and options). Use the [Line Config] (PF menu) to change the com-
ponents in the flow line.
When the system is turned on, the temperatures are controlled for the components in the
flow line. If the AFC is present, carrier gas is supplied to the injection port specified. If APC is
present, detector gases are supplied to the detector specified. One injection port and up to
two detectors can be included in an analytical flow line. Temperatures are not controlled, and
gases are not supplied, to components which are not part of the analytical flow line.

Fig. 8.1.1 [SET] key main screen

GC-2010 Plus 83
 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
8.1 [SET] Key Main Screen

8.1.2 Parameter list

COLUMN OVEN
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C
Sets the default temperature in the oven temperature program.
INLET PRESS
Range: 0.0−970.0 kPa (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 100.0 kPa
Sets the column inlet pressure.
The initial pressure must be set in order to create a pressure program.
When the control mode is set to “pressure”, the system keeps the column inlet pressure at a
constant value while the column oven temperature program is running.
COLUMN FLOW RATE
Default:1 1.00 ml/min
Sets the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column exit (atmospheric pressure at 25 °C).
When you set the carrier gas flow rate, the system calculates the column inlet pressure
based on the inner diameter, the length and the film thickness of the column. The column
flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired occures at the initial
temperature in the column oven temperature program.
LINEAR VELOCITY
Default:2 30.0 cm/s
Sets the average linear velocity of the carrier gas flowing in the capillary column.
When you set the linear velocity, the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on
the inner diameter, the length and the film thickness of the column. The linear velocity is set
separately so that the linear velocity desired occures at the initial temperature in the oven
temperature program.
When the control mode is set to “linear velocity”, the column inlet pressure automatically
changes so that the linear velocity remains constant even while the column oven
temperature program is running.
TOTAL FLOW RATE
Range: 0.0−1200.0 ml/min (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 500.0 ml/min
The total flow rate varies depending on the injection mode as follows:
In split or splitless mode, the total flow rate is equivalent to “column flow rate + split flow rate
+ septum purge flow rate”.
In direct mode, the total flow rate is equivalent to “column flow rate + septum purge flow rate”.
SPLIT RATIO
Range: -1.0/0.0−9999.9, Default: -1.0
The split ratio is “split flow rate / column flow rate.”
When you set a split ratio, the system sets the total flow rate based on the calculated carrier
gas flow rate and split flow rate, so that the desired split ratio occurs at the column oven
temperature.
Set the split ratio to “-1.0” to fix the total flow rate regardless of the column oven temperature.
PURGE FLOW RATE
Default:3 3.0 ml/min
Set the septum purge flow rate.
SAMPLING TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 1.00 min
Sets the sampling time for splitless analysis.
The sampling time indicates the period of time after analysis starts until the split flow line is
opened.

84 GC-2010 Plus
 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
8.1 [SET] Key Main Screen

SPLIT MODE
Selection: SPLIT/SPLITLESS/DIRECT, Default: SPLIT
SPLIT: Controls the column inlet pressure and the total flow rate so that the column inlet
pressure and split ratio occur as specified.
SPLITLESS: Closes the split flow line during the sampling time so that the set column inlet
pressure is controlled by the Total Flow Controller.
Opens the split flow line and controls the Electronid Split Controller so that the
preset column inlet pressure occurs (Refer to Fig. 12.5.2.) after the sampling
time elapses.
To set the time of the Splitless auto off, refer to "16.6.11 Other Settings" in
"16.6 GC Configuration".
DIRECT: Closes the split flow line and the set column inlet pressure, linear velocity (in
pressure mode) or the set total flow rate (in flow mode) occurs. When making
direct injection analyses, select WBI in the setup screen so that SPLIT mode is
not available.
CONTROL MODE
Selection: PRESS/VELOCITY/FLOW (FLOW is for direct injection mode only), Default: PRESS
When the injection mode is set to “SPLIT” or “SPLITLESS”
PRESS: Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant.
VELOCITY: Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant.
When the injection mode is set to “DIRECT”
PRESS: Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant.
VELOCITY: Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant.
FLOW: Controls the system so that the flow rate remains constant.
INJECTION PORT TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C
Set the injection port temperature (the default temperature for a programmable injection
port).
DETECTOR TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C (in FID), Default: 25.0 °C
Set the detector temperature.
Allowable temperature ranges vary for each detector. Refer to range specified for the detec-
tor(s) in use.
TCD has two heated zones.
Upper row: PRE-TCD
Lower row: TCD (TCD cell)
Changes to one temperature are reflected to the other temperature. These set values are
always same.

1 The column flow rate ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is
970 kPa or less and the calculated total flow rate is 1,200 ml/min.
2 The linear velocity ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa
or less.
3 The purge flow rate ranges from 0 to the total flow rate subtracted by the column flow rate and the split
flow rate.

GC-2010 Plus 85
 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
8.1 [SET] Key Main Screen

8.1.3 PF menu

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Displays file list to change the current file.
File 8.2
On this sub screen, you can select files to load, copy, initialize and rename.
Specifies the injection port, detectors and options which make up the ana-
Line Confg lytical flow line. 8.3
Units set on this sub screen are displayed on the [SET] key main screen.
Customiz Set the parameters displayed on the [SET] key main screen. 8.4
Print Prints temperature, pressure and total flow rate on a Chromatopac. ――
Switches through each of the parameter screens in turn. Press the [SET]
Next Line ――
key from the [SET] key main screen to switch to the next screen.

86 GC-2010 Plus
 88.2
8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
. 8.2 File Management

8.2.1 Screen description

Select [File] (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM] key main screen to display the file list shown in
Fig. 8.2.1.
To change the current file, enter a file No. or move the cursor using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] key;
then press the [Load] (PF menu) key.

Fig. 8.2.1 File list screen

8.2.2 PF menu

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Load Selects the current file. ――
Copy Copies file name and file contents from the source file to a destination file. 8.2.3
Initializes file name and file contents.
File Init 8.2.5
The current file cannot be initialized.
Rename Changes the file name. 8.2.4

GC-2010 Plus 87
 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
8.2 File Management

8.2.3 Copying a file

Select [Copy] (PF menu) on the file list screen to display the file copy screen shown in Fig. 8.2.2.
Enter the source file number (Src. File) and the destination File number (Dst. File), then press
[Copy] (PF menu). The name and contents of the source file are copied to the destination file.

Fig. 8.2.2 Copying File

8.2.4 Renaming a file

Select [Rename] (PF menu) on the file list screen to display the file rename screen shown in
Fig. 8.2.3. Move the cursor using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys to select the file to be renamed.
Enter the new file name using the numeric keys and the [ ] and [ ] keys. Refer to "5.3.5
△

Changing item names" for more information..

Fig. 8.2.3 Renaming a file

88 GC-2010 Plus
 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
8.2 File Management

8.2.5 Initializing a file

Select [File Init] (PF menu) on the file list screen to display the file initialization screen shown
in Fig. 8.2.4. Enter the file number or move the cursor to select the file. Then press [File Init]
(PF menu).
During File initialization, the file name and contents are deleted. The parameters return to
their default settings. Once a file is initializen, the action cannot be undone. The current file
cannot be initialized.

Fig. 8.2.4 Initializing a file

GC-2010 Plus 89
 88.3
8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
. Specifying the Analytical Flow Line
8.3

Components ([Line Config])

8.3.1 Screen description

Select [Line Confg] (PF menu) from the [SET] key main screen to display the Line Configu-
ration screen shown in Fig. 8.3.1.
The [SET] key main screen displays the parameters for one analytical flow line. The line
configuration screen determines the components (injection port, detector (s), and options) of
the analytical flow line.
When the system is turned on, the temperatures are controlled for the components in the
flow line. If the AFC is present, carrier gas is supplied to the specified injection port, If APC is
present, detector gases are supplied to the detector (s) specified, One injection port and up
to two detecotrs can be included in an analytical flow line, Temperatures are not controlled,
and gases are not supplied, to conponents which are not part of the analytical flow line.
The line configuration screen displays all the components installed. Move the cursor to the
desired component using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys. Use the [ ] and [ ] to specify the ana-

△
lytical flow line (1-4) to which the component belongs. Press [Enter] to validate the selection.
If more than one injection port is specified for an analytical flow line, the most recent selec-
tion applies.

Fig. 8.3.1 Line configuration setup screen

90 GC-2010 Plus
 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
8.3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components ([Line Config])

■ Line configuration examples

Suppose that a SPL (split/splitless injection port), a WBI (direct injection port), a FID
(hydrogen flame ionization detector) and a TCD (thermal conductivity detector) are installed.
(1) When using only the SPL and the FID
Select the SPL and the FID for line 1.
In this case, only the temperature of the SPL and the FID will be controlled. Carrier gas
and detector gas will be supplied.

INJ

DET

COL

Fig. 8.3.2 Line configuration (Example 1)

GC-2010 Plus 91
 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
8.3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components ([Line Config])

(2) When using a SPL and FID for one line, and a WBI and TCD on an other line, select the
SPL and the FID for line 1, and the WBI and TCD for line 2.

INJ

DET

COL

INJ

DET

COL

Fig. 8.3.3 Line configuration (Example 2)

(3) When using a single column connected to two detectors:

DET DET
INJ

COL

Fig. 8.3.4 Line configuration (Example 3)

92 GC-2010 Plus
 88.4
8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
. 8.4 Changing Items Displayed with [Customiz]

8.4.1 Screen description

Select [Customiz] (PF menu) from the [SET] key main screen to display the Display Custom-
ization screen shown in Fig. 8.4.1.
On this screen, set the items which will be displayed on the [SET] key main screen. Set an
item to “On” to display it on the main screen. Set the item to “Off” to wide its display.
Even if the sampling time display is “On” the sampling time is only displayed in SPLITLESS
mode.
Move the cursor using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys to select an item to be changed; select “On”
or “Off” using the [ ] and [ ] keys, then press the [ENTER] key to validate the selection.
△

The default it setting displays the column inlet pressures, column flow rate, split ratio,
sampling time and the split mode.

Fig. 8.4.1 Customizing the [Set] key main screen

GC-2010 Plus 93
 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management
8.4 Changing Items Displayed with [Customiz]

This page is intentionally left blank.

94 GC-2010 Plus
 99.1
9 Monitoring the GC
. 9.1 [MONIT] key Main Screen

9.1.1 Screen description

Press the [MONIT] key to display the main monitor screen shown in Fig. 9.1.1. In the upper
portion of the main screen, monitor the status of the injection port, the column and the
detectors configured in each line. In the lower portion of the screen, monitor the
chromatogram, the temperature program, etc.
Only one detector is displayed on the screen. When two or more detectors are set for one
line, press the [MONIT] key or [Next Det] (PF menu) to change the detector to be displayed.
Select [Temp Mon] and [Flow Mon] (PF menu) to monitor the temperature, the pressure and
the flow rate of all injection ports, columns and detectors configured in all configured lines.

The detector range (setup

value), temperature and the
The injection port temperature, voltage are displayed.
inlet pressure and purge flow This value, multiplied by the
rate are displayed. range (attenuation) coefficient,
is output as the analog signal.

The column oven temperature

is displayed.

The chromatogram is dis-

played.

Fig. 9.1.1 [MONIT] key main screen

■ Detector status
The ignition status of an FID or FPD detector can be confirmed on the Monitor Screen.

For a FID:

Flame = On Flame = Off

Fig. 9.1.2

GC-2010 Plus 95
 9 Monitoring the GC
9.1 [MONIT] key Main Screen

■ Changing the monitor magnification (zoom)

The chromatogram and the temperature (or pressure, flow rate) program is displayed on the
lower portion of the Monitor Screen.
The signal axis and the time axis are displayed. If there is a temperature (or pressure, flow)
program, the temperature axis (or pressure axis, flow axis) is also displayed. Use the [Chng
Graph] (PF menu) key to switch the graph displayed.
Use the numeric keys and cursor keys to change the magnification and the position of each
axis on the screen.

NOTE If the temperature (or pressure, flow) program is displayed, the time axis (x-axis) cannot be changed.

Signal axis Temperature axis

Time axis

Fig. 9.1.3 Monitor screen (chromatogram and temperature program)

To magnify the time axis:

PF1 PF2 PF3

4 : Zooms the time axis scale.

ON
6 : Unzooms the time axis scale.
NIT SET
To magnify the signal axis:

OL FUNC 2 : Zooms the signal axis scale.

OFF
8 : Unzooms the signal axis scale.
OW 7 8 9
To maximize the display:

NJ 4 5 6 5 : Automatically adjusts the signal axis so that

the maximum value of the chromatogram
signal is displayed on the screen.
ET 1 2 3
Keys to move along the time axis
TION 0 •
: Moves the chromatogram in the + direction.

: Moves the chromatogram in the - direction.

ELP CE ENTER

96 GC-2010 Plus
 9 Monitoring the GC
9.1 [MONIT] key Main Screen

9.1.2 Parameter list

RETENTION TIME (Rt)

Retention time is the length of time from compound injectio to detection.
The retention time is specific to each compound. Compounds are identified based on match-
ing the retention time to a standard compound retention time.
REMAIN TIME
The longest program time subtracted by the current retention time is displayed.
LONGEST PROGRAM TIME
The longest program time indicates the total time of the longest program when comparing
the temperature program, the pressure program, the flow rate program and the time
program.

9.1.3 PF menu

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Displays the current and set temperatures of column, injection port and
Temp Mon 9.2
detector.
Displays inlet pressure, total flow rate and purge flow rate for injection port,
Flow Mon and hydrogen flow rate, air flow rate and makeup gas flow rate for detector. 9.3
The display format depends on the typeof flow controller installed.
Zero Adj Automatically moves the baseline to zero point. 9.4
Zero Free Returns to the baseline level before zero point adjustment. 9.4
Up Moves the baseline up by 100 µV from current level. 9.4
Down Moves the baseline down by 100 µV from current level. 9.4
Switches the graph display from chromatogram and column oven tempera-
ture program to chromatogram and pressure program. For direct injection
Chng Graph ――
mode with flow control, the flow rate program is displayed instead of the
pressure program.
Displays the monitor screen for another configured analytical line. Switch
Chng Line ――
between monitored lines by pressing [MONIT] key from the monitor screen.

GC-2010 Plus 97
 99.2
9 Monitoring the GC
. 9.2 Monitoring the Temperature with [Temp Mon]

9.2.1 Screen description

Press [Temp Mon] (PF menu) from the [MONIT] key main screen to display the Temp Moni-
tor screen shown in Fig. 9.2.1.
Monitor the temperature of all installed column ovens, injection ports and detectors from this
screen.

The components that are

included in the current ana-
lytical line are underlined.

Fig. 9.2.1 Temperature monitor

NOTE Heated zones without installed components are not displayed on the screen.

9.2.2 PF menu

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Flow Mon Monitor pressure and flow rate for the injection ports and detectors. 9.3

98 GC-2010 Plus
 99.3
9 Monitoring the GC
. 9.3 Monitoring the Flow Rate with [Flow Mon]

9.3.1 Screen description

Press [Flow Mon] (PF menu) from the [MONIT] key main screen to display the Flow Monitor
screen shown in Fig. 9.3.1.
Monitor the flow rate and the pressure of the injection ports, and the detector gas flow rates
of the detectors.

Displayed items depend on

the type of injection ports,
detectors and flow controllers.

The name of injection port

and detectors constructing
the current line are under
lined.

Fig. 9.3.1 Flow rate monitor

NOTE Flow controllers that have hot been installed are not displayed on the screen.

9.3.2 PF menu

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Temp Mon Monitor temperature of the column oven, injection ports and detectors. 9.2

GC-2010 Plus 99
 99.4
9 Monitoring the GC
. 9.4 Zero Point Adjustment

Execute zero point adjustment when the baseline is greatly off from zero. Press [Zero Adj] (PF
menu) to perform zero point adjustment. Adjustment can also be made for any value.

9.4.1 Screen description

Press [Zero Adj] or [Zero Free] (PF menu) from the [Monit] key main screen, the chromatogram
displayed on the monitor screen changes as shown in Fig. 9.4.1 or Fig. 9.4.2.
Press [Up] or [Down] (PF menu) to adjust the baseline level manually.
Zero point adjustments are effective not only for the GC monitor screen, but also a con-
nected pc or Chromatopac. However, zero point adjustments made on the Chromatopac do
not adjust the monitor screen baseline level.

[Down]
(Held down) [Zero Adj]

[Up]
(Held down) [Zero Adj]

[Zero Free]

Since the [Down] has been held down too long,

the zero point has deviated into the negative zone.

Fig. 9.4.1 Zero point adjustment Fig. 9.4.2 Zero free adjustment

NOTE Zero point adjustments are only valid for the currently displayed detector. To adjusts the zero point for
another detector, first switch to its display by pressing [Chng Line] (PF menu), then execute the adjust-
ment.

100 GC-2010 Plus

1010.1
10 Starting and Stopping Analysis
. Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis
10.1

10.1.1 Verifying the gas chromatograph status

(1) Ensure that the STATUS indicator light is green.
(2) When the STATUS light is green, perform a zero point adjustment (See "9.4 Zero Point
Adjustment").
(For a description of the items which determine the Ready state, refer to "16.6.6 Setting
the Ready Check Parameters".)

10.1.2 Making manual injection

■ Aspiration (for liquid sample)
1. Preparation
・ 10 µL Syringe
・ Sample
・ Rinse solvent
・ Liquid waste container
2. Syringe handling precautions

Fig. 10.1.1 Typical syringe

・ Do not bend it or touch it. Keep it clean.

・ Never bend the needle.
3. Solvent pre-wash
Clean the syringe with solvent 3 to 5 times using the following procedure.
(1) Place the syringe into the rinse solvent. Pull the plunger to aspirate approximately
10 µl of Solvent.
(2) Expel the solvent into the liquid waste container.
4. Sample pre-wash
Flush the syringe with sample 3 to 5 times using the following procedure.
(1) Place the syringe into the sample. Pull the plunger to aspirate approsimately 10 µl of
sample.
(2) Expel the sample into the liquid waste container.

GC-2010 Plus 101

 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis
10.1 Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis

5. Preparing to inject
(1) With the needle in the sample vial, pump the plunger to eliminate air bubbles inside
the syringe. Aspirate slowly and discharge quickly for higher effectiveness.
(2) After air bubbles are eliminated, aspirate an exact amount of necessary sample (e.g. 1 µl).
(3) Wipe off the sample on the needle with a clean lint-free paper.
(4) Lift the plunger and aspirate the air so that no sample will remain in the needle.

Fig. 10.1.2

■ Injection

After the sample is aspi- Insert syringe until it Push plunger to inject Promptly pull out
rated, insert the syringe touches needle guide. sample. syringe.
into the injection port. At same time, press
[START] key of gas
chromatograph.

WARNING
Wear protective goggles when handling samples.

10.1.3 Starting the analysis

A green STATUS light indicates that the GC is ready for analysis.
Press the [START] key to start the temperature program, the time program, the pressure
program and the flow rate program. The start signal is sent to the data processing unit
simultaneously when the program starts.
Any pre-set programs execute prior to the start of the analysis programs.
Any pre-run programs execute prior to the start of the analysis programs or transmission of
the start signal to the data processing unit.

102 GC-2010 Plus

1010.2
10 Starting and Stopping Analysis
. Terminating the Analysis
10.2

10.2.1 Terminating the analysis

When the various programs (temperature, time, pressure, and flow rate) are finished, the
gas chromatograph automatically returns to the initial status and becomes ready.
To stop the programs before their completion, press the [STOP] key. The chromatograph
automatically returns to the ready state.

10.2.2 External devices

■ When the gas chromatograph is connected to a Chromatopac
・ Key operation of the gas chromatograph
Press the [START] key of the gas chromatograph to start the Chromatopac automatically.
Pressing the GC [STOP] key, however, does not stop the Chromatopac.

NOTE To stop the Chromatopac from starting automatically, refer to "16.6.9 Setting the link device code".

・ Key operation from the chromatopac

The gas chromatograph is not controlled by the Chromatopac. Pressing the Chromatopac
[START] or [STOP] key does not start or stop a GC analysis.

■ When the gas chromatograph is linked to a personal computer (pc).

Press the GC [START] key or the PC [STOP] key to start both units.
However, each unit must be stopped individually. Stopping one unit does not affect the other.
However, the end of a batch sequence signals both units to stop.

GC-2010 Plus 103

 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis
10.2 Terminating the Analysis

This page is intentionally left blank.

104 GC-2010 Plus

1111.1
11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program
. 11.1 [COL] Key Main Screen

11.1.1 Screen description

Press the [COL] key to display the column screen shown in Fig. 11.1.1. The oven temperature
program is set from this screen.
Enter a value other than 0 in the rate field displayed with “END”. Once a valid rate has been
entered, set the temperature (final temp) and time (hold time) for the line.
In addition to the oven temperature program, the equilibration time is set from this screen.
Equilibration time is the length of time allowed for the oven temperature to properly equili-
brate before the system is Ready.

Up to 20 temperatue increase/
decrease ramps can be set.

Fig. 11.1.1 [COL] key main screen

NOTE Press the [COL] key, to move the cursor directly to the initial temperature portion.
This facilitates program edits when only the initial temperature needs to be changed.

GC-2010 Plus 105

 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program
11.1 [COL] Key Main Screen

11.1.2 Parameter list

TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C
Set the initial and the final temperature for each ramp of in the oven temperature program.
The column oven temperature should never exceed the maximum operating temperature of
the column. Keep the column temperature as low as possible to prolong the column life and
reduce detector noise. To set the maximum oven temperature, refer to "16.6.4 Setting the
maximum temperature limits"

CAUTION
Never increase the column oven temperature while air (oxygen) is
mixed with the carrier gas. This can damage the column (especially
for polar columns).

TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 0.00 min
Set the hold time for the initial temperature and the final temperature for each stage of the
oven temperature program.
RATE
Range: END/-250.0−250.0 °C/min, Default: END
Set the program rate for the oven temperature program.
Set the rate to “0”; “END” appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp.
Move the cursor to “END” and set any numeric value other than “0” to complete the
temperature and the time for that ramp.
EQUILIBRATION TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 3.00 min
After the programs finish and the oven temperature returns to the initial value, the
equilibration time must elapse befor the system is considered Ready. This allows for even
temperature distribution.

11.1.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Del Line Deletes the current line. ――
Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position. ――
Fan Off Stops the fan operation. ――
Fan On Restarts the fan operation. ――
Print Prints the column oven program from a Chromatopac. ――

NOTE “Fan Off” can not be operated in the following case.

• Oven temperature setting value ≥ 50 deg
• Program running
When the GC is in the system Off state, the fan automatically stops based on the selection of the Fan
Stop Temp. Refer to "16.6.11 Other Settings" in "16.6 GC Configuration".

106 GC-2010 Plus

1111.2
11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program
. 11.2 Temperature Programs

11.2.1 Isothermal analysis

The isothermal analysis technique keeps the column oven temperature at a constant value.
This method is useful for separating compounds within a narrow boiling point range.

11.2.2 Programmed analysis

Programmed analysis technique increases the column oven temperature.
When isothermal analysis is performed on a sample containing components over a wide
boiling point range at a temperature optimum for separating low-boiling components, elution
of high-boiling components is delayed. As a result, peaks become wide and the detection of
minor components is difficult. When isothermal analysis is performed at a temperature
where high-boiling components elute rapidly, low-boiling components elute extremely fast,
making separation difficult.
This means there is an optimal temperature for separating each component. In isothermal
analysis however, a temperature can be optimum for certain components but inadequate for
other components.
When analyzing samples containing components over a wide boiling point range, each com-
ponent elutes at a temperature suitable for it while the column oven temperature increases
gradually from lower temperature.

11.2.3 Creating a temperature program

■ Screen terminology
1-ramp temperature program

Column oven
temperature

T2 Initial setting (TEMP)....T1

Initial setting hold time (TIME)..... a

c
T 2 -T 1
Program rate (RATE)....
b
a
Final temperature (TMP)...... T2

T1 Final temperature hold time (TIM)....... c

b
Equilibration time (ETIM)..... d
d

Program Program Time

starts. finishes.

GC-2010 Plus 107

 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program
11.2 Temperature Programs

■ Program creation
1-ramp temperature program

220 ͠(2 min)

10 ͠/min

60 ͠(2 min) 5 min

Initial 1st stage

temperature

Fig. 11.2.1 Temperature program (Example 1)

2-ramp temperature program

160 ͠(5 min)

10 ͠/min
120 ͠(2 min)

5 ͠/min

60 ͠(2 min) 3 min

Initial 1st stage 2nd stage

temperature

Fig. 11.2.2 Temperature program (Example 2)

108 GC-2010 Plus

 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program
11.2 Temperature Programs

Multiple-ramp temperature program (with temp increase /decrease)

200 ºC(5 min)

10 ºC/min
-5 ºC/min
5 ºC/min 120 ºC(0 min)
70 ºC(3 min) 70 ºC(1 min)

Initial 1st 2nd 3rd

temperature stage stage stage

Fig. 11.2.3 Temperature program (Example 3)

■ Allowable temperature settings and ranges for temperature programs

Default
Item Set Range Control Range
value
Up to 200 °C 0−40 °C/min
Heating Up to 250 °C 0−25 °C/min
0−250
Normal oven
Up to 380 °C °C/min 0−15 °C/min
(100 V)
Up to 450 °C 0−7 °C/min

Program rate Heating Up to 200 °C 0−70 °C/min 0 °C/min

0−250
High power oven Up to 350 °C 0−50 °C/min
°C/min
(230 V) Up to 450 °C 0−30 °C/min
Differ from the room
−250−0
Cooling temperature or the
°C/min
oven temperature.

Fig. 11.2.4 Example of column oven temperature increase/decrease curve

GC-2010 Plus 109

 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program
11.2 Temperature Programs

This page is intentionally left blank.

110 GC-2010 Plus

1212.1
12 Injection Port
. Introduction
12.1

■ Types of injection ports described

There are five types of injection system available for gas Chromatography.
・ Split injection system
・ Splitless injection system
・ Direct injection system (option)
・ On-column injection system (option)
・ Programmed temperature vaporization injection system (option)
In this manual, only the split, splitless and direct injection system are described.

For other systems, refer to the User’s manual for each optional unit.

■ Injection system and injection port

Injection system Injection port Type of insert
Split injection system Glass insert for split
Split/spitless injection port
Splitless injection system Glass insert for splitless/WBI
Direct injection system Direct injection port Glass insert for splitless/WBI
On-column injection system Adapter for on-column
Programmed temperature On-column injection port
Glass insert for PTV
vaporization injection system

GC-2010 Plus 111

1212.2
12 Injection Port
. Glass Insert and Packing Requirements
12.2

It is necessary to pack silica (glass) wool into the glass insert (liner) in order to sufficiently mix the
vaporized sample and to prevent high-boiling point compounds from contaminating the capillary
column.

■ Quantity of silica wool

Quantity of silica wool (standard) = Approx. 10 mg (for split)
= Approx. 2 mg (for splitless/WBI)
= Silica wool is not necessarily required when making direct
injections. However, if the sample contains non-volatile
compounds, less than 5 mg of silica wool can improve the
chromatography.
NOTE For special samples, better results may be obtained by varying the amount of silica wool in the insert.
(1) Reduce the amount of silica wool for highly absorptive samples, such as agricultural samples.
(2) Increase the amount of silica wool when injecting solvents with a high latent heat of vaporization,
such as water.

■ Position of silica wool

Split and splitless glass insets are shaped differently, as shown below. Place the silica wool
1−2 mm below the lowest point of the needle at injection. For split analysis, if the wool is too
close or too far away from the needle, good reproducibility of results may not be obtained.
For splitless analysis, place the wool at the bottom of the glass insert.
The recommended position of silica wool for each insert is shown below.

25 mm

Silica wool

5.5mm

For split analysis For splitless/WBI analysis

Fig. 12.2.1 Silica wool position for split and splitless inserts (AOC-20i)

112 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.2 Glass Insert and Packing Requirements

NOTE The position of silica wool for being displayed fig. 12.2.1 is for injecting by Auto Injector for AOC-20i.
During manual injections, the needle often goes further int the insert than for injection by an auto injec-
tor. However, ther is no need to change the silica wool position for manual injections. By plasing a sep-
tum on the needle, the length of the needle can be shortened to approximately 40 mm. (Alternatively,
change the position of the silica wool for manual injections.)

<Example> Needle length

Septum

Approx. 40 mm

(a) Manual injection performed (b) Manual injection with a

with an AOC 17/20 needle syringe with a 50 mm
(43 mm length) long needle

Fig. 12.2.2 Proper needle length for manual injections

■ Packing the silica wool

Pack silica wool flat and evenly without making it too densely pacleed or too fluffy.

■ Notes for servicing the injection unit or replacing columns

Changing the pressure on the inlet abruptly may move the silica wool to a different position.
Make sure not to replace the septum or remove the column when the inlet is under pressure.

GC-2010 Plus 113

1212.3
12 Injection Port
. Removing and inserting the glass insert
12.3

WARNING
Risk of burns.
Do not perform injection port maintenance until the injection port tem-
perature has dropped below 50 °C .

CAUTION
Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screw and nuts to
prevent them from binding.

■ Tool requied

Fig. 12.3.1 Wrench for Glass insert nut (P/N 221-46977)

■ Removing the glass insert

The glass insert should be removed carefully to avoid breakage.

CAUTION
It is important to hold the septum nut while removing the glass insert nut.
Otherwise, the gas tubing can pull out the insert, and the septum nut
can break the insert.

(1) Hold the septum nut and remove the glass insert nut from the injection port. Lift the
septum nut straight up and move it out of the way.

Septum nut

Glass insert nut

Injection port

Fig. 12.3.2

114 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.3 Removing and inserting the glass insert

(2) Use tweezers to remove the glass insert.

NOTE If the O-ring has become fixed, turn the O-ring using tweezers and then lift the glass insert. Do not
forcibly lift the glass insert with the O-ring fixed because it may break the glass.

Tweezers

Glass insert
O-ring

Fig. 12.3.3

GC-2010 Plus 115

 12 Injection Port
12.3 Removing and inserting the glass insert

■ Attaching a fluoride rubber O-ring

Use a fluorid rubber O-ring when the temperature of the injection port is 350 °C or less.
Attach the fluoride rubber O-ring as shown below and inset the glass inset in the injection
port.
Fluoride rubber seals the injection port better than graphite, and is normally used. However,
it tends to deteriorate and leak over prolonged periods at high (>350 °C) temperatures.
Check frequently for leaks.
Ensure that the inset is touching the bottom of the injection port. This will place the O-ring
3 mm from the top of the insert.

■ Attaching a graphite O-ring

Use a graphite O-ring when the temperature of the injection port is 350 °C or higher. Attach
the graphite O-ring shown as below and insert the glass insert in the injection port.
Although graphite O-rings are recommended for high temperatures, the sealing ability of
graphite is inferior to that of rubber. Tighten the injection port nut securely. Ensure that the
graphite O-ring is the correct size for the glass inset.

3 mm

O-ring

For split analysis For splitless/WBI analysis

Fig. 12.3.4 Attaching graphite and fluoride rubber O-ring

116 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.3 Removing and inserting the glass insert

■ Inserting the glass insert

Insert the glass insert according to the following procedure after attaching the fluoride rubber
O-ring or graphite O-ring.
(1) Insert the glass insert into the injection port.
(2) Move the septum nut back over the glass insert and slowly tighten the glass insert nut
by hand at first, then 1/3~1/2 turn with wrench.

Septum nut

Glass insert nut

Injection port

Fig. 12.3.5

NOTE The position of the injection port components is shown below.

Injection port

Stopper Carrier

Split Right

Purge

Front Septum nut

Fig. 12.3.6

GC-2010 Plus 117

 12 Injection Port
12.3 Removing and inserting the glass insert

■ Checking for injection port leaks

Leaks can negatively impact reproducibility of results, and can waste carreier gas.
NOTE Septum purge leaks do not affect performance. These error messages canbe cleaned.
(As for the following procedure, there could be cases in which the error message “purge leaks” etc.
appears. However, it does not matter to the test. Then select “Reset Error”.)

Check for leaks according to the following procedure.

(1) Turn off the system, and then turn on the system pressing “-” key and “0” key.
(2) Press [Start GC] (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM] key screen.
(3) Set the “Flow Control” to “Cont” from the [SYSTEM] key screen.
(4) Press [Stop GC] (PF menu) to stop the system temperature control.
(5) User the [MONIT] key to veryfy that the oven, injection portk and detector temperatures
have dropped below 40 °C.
(6) Press [Off] on the [FLOW] screen to stop AFC control. Carrier gas flow stops. Set the
purge flow tate to 0 ml/min.
(7) Remove the capillary column, and seal the connections with a new graphite ferrule (with
wire) and column nut.
(8) Install a blank nut (G-type) on both the split vent and purge vent.
(9) Verify that the gas cylinder pressure is above 300 kPa.
(10) Set the Split mode to “Direct” and Control mode to “Press” (from the [FLOW] key main
screen).
(11) Set the inlet pressure to 150 kPa and set the purge flow to 500 ml/min. Press [On/Off]
(PF menu) to start AFC control.
(12) Wait five minutes. Confirm that the inlet pressure is from125 to 175 kPa.
If the inlet pressure is above 175 kPa, loosen the column nut slightly to reduce the pres-
sure.
If the inlet pressure is below 125 kPa, increase the pressure from the gas cylinder
slightly.
(13) Verify that the total flow is less than 2 ml/min. If the flow is above 2 ml/min, a leak exists.
(14) Press [On/Off] (PF menu) on the [FLOW] key screen to stop AFC control.
(15) In case of fluoride rubber O-ring, verify that the pressures does not drop more than
15 kPa in one hour or 2.5 kPa in 10 minutes.
In case of graphite O-ring, verify that the pressure does not drop more than 21 kPa in
one hour or 3.5 kPa in 10 minutes.
If it does, a leak exists.
(16) If there are no leaks, restore the connections and operational status of the GC-2010 Plus.

118 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.3 Removing and inserting the glass insert

■ Resolving leaks
If the leak test procedure reveals the presence of an injection port leak, use the following
procedure to resolve the problem.
Use Snoop or a similar leak detection fluid to check the column connection for leaks. Tighten
the connections at the septum nut, injection port nut, split and purge vents (if the blank nuts
are inplace for the leak test), and gas supply tubing.
NOTE Take precautions when using Snoop or similar soap solution not to drip onto electronic parts or wiring.
This could cause an electric shock. In some sensitive analyses, Snoop can interfere with proper detec-
tion. In those situations, use an electronic leak detector.

If a leak is found, replace the offending part.

Leaking part Replacement

Near septum nut Replace septum
Around injection port nut Tighten the glass insert nut
Replace glass insert O-ring
At column connection Replace graphite ferrule and column nut
At split or purge vent (during leak test) Replace blank nut

CAUTION
Do not use the leak detecting fluid nor soapy water for gas leak check
on the connections above the carrier and detector gas controllers
(AFC/APC).
The drips may damage the controller.

GC-2010 Plus 119

1212.4
12 Injection Port
. Removing and installing the septum
12.4

WARNING
Danger of burns.
Do not perform injection port maintenance until the temperature has
dropped below 50 °C.

CAUTION
Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screws and nuts to
prevent them from binding.

■ Type of septum
The type of septum to install depends on the temperature of the injection port.
(1) Silicon rubber septum … When the temperature of the injection port is below 350 °C.
(2) Low bleed septum … When the temperature of the injection port is above 350 °C.

■ Removing the septum

Remove the septum according to the following procedure.
(1) Check the following items before removing the septum.
・ The temperature of the column oven and injection port should be below 50 °C. (Check
this before setting the column inlet pressure to 0 kPa.)
・ The column inlet pressure should be 0 kPa.
NOTE Removing the septum when the injection port is under pressure causes an abrupt pressure shift which
can change the position of the glass wool in the insert.

(2) Remove the septum nut, and take out the needle guide and septum.

Septum nut

Needle guide

Septum

Top of Injection port

Fig. 12.4.1

120 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.4 Removing and installing the septum

NOTE Septum nut for the SPL of the GC-2010 Plus has a “P” mark. Do not mix up the nut with the septum nut
for the WBI-2010 Plus or the injection port of the GC-2010.

Septum Nut for SPL Septum Nut for Others

Fig. 12.4.2

■ Installing the new septum

(1) Insert the septum into the injection port.
NOTE Use tweezers to handle the septum. Touching the septum will contaminate it, causing ghost peaks.

Tweezers

Septum

Injection port Do not touch

the septum.

Fig. 12.4.3

(2) Replace the needle guide, then the septum nut. Tighten the septum nut by hand as far
as possible and return a semicircle.

Septum nut

Needle guide

Septum

Top of injection port

Fig. 12.4.4

GC-2010 Plus 121

1212.5
12 Injection Port
. Split/Splitless Injection System
12.5

■ Split injection system

In a split injection system, only a portion of the sample injected into the injection port is
introduced into the capillary column. The remaining sample is sent to the split line due to
high sample volume. (Refer to "3.4 AFC and APC control".)

PURGE
TFC CARRIER Control PURGE VENT
Control

ESC
SPLIT
Control SPLIT VENT

Capillary column

Fig. 12.5.1

■ Splitless injection system

The splitless injection system is used to analyze samples of low concentration.
In a splitless injection system, the split vent is closed and the initial temperature of the column
oven is low. Then, after injection, and once the vaporized sample has moved to the column,
the split vent is open and the column temperature increased so that the condensed sample
inside the column is vaporized again and separated. (Refer to "3.4 AFC and APC control".)

PURGE PURGE
TFC PURGE VENT TFC CARRIER PURGE VENT
CARRIER Control Control
Control Control

ESC
SPLIT SPLIT
Close SPLIT VENT Control SPLIT VENT

Capillary column Capillary column

(a) During sampling time (b) After sampling time

Fig. 12.5.2

122 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.1 Setting the temperature with [INJ] key

12.5.1.1 Screen description
Press the [INJ] key to display the main screen shown in Fig. 12.5.3 and to set the
temperature of the injection port.

Fig. 12.5.3 [INJ] key main screen

GC-2010 Plus 123

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.1.2 Parameter list

TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C
Set the temperature of the injection port.
Keep the injection port temperature as low as is practical to prevent of a decrease in the
service life of the temperature sensor. To instantly vaporize the injected sample, set the
injection port temperature which is suitable for the sample. Due to the minute quantity of
sample injected, the sample vaporizes at temperatures lower than the boiling point of
sample elements. To set the injection port maximum temperature limit, refer to "16.6.4
Setting the maximum temperature limits" in “16.6 GC Configuration”.

12.5.1.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Print Prints the injection port temperature on Chromatopac. ――
Toggles among the setup screeens if two or more injection ports are
Next Inj installed in this system. ――
The [INJ] key can also be used to switch screens.

124 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.2 Setting the flow rate with [FLOW] key

12.5.2.1 Screen description
Press the [FLOW] key to display the screen shown in Fig. 12.5.4 and to set the AFC
(advanced flow controller) parameters. The AFC controls the pressure and the flow rate
of the carrier gas.

Fig. 12.5.4 [FLOW] key main screen

12.5.2.2 Parameter list

INLET PRESS
Range: 0.0−970.0 kPa (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 100 kPa
Set the column inlet pressure.
This sets the initial temperature of a pressure program.
When the control mode is set to “PRESS”, the system controls the column inlet
pressure so that it remains constant during an oven temperature program.
COLUMN FLOW RATE
Default:1 1.00 ml/min
Sets the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column outlet (atmospheric pressure at
25 °C).
When you set the carrier gas flow rate, the system calculates the column inlet pressure
based on the inner diameter and the length of the column and the film thickness of the
column. The column flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired
occures at the initial temperature in the oven temperature program.
LINEAR VELOCITY
Default:2 30.0 cm/s
Sets the average linear velocity of the carrier gas flowing in the capillary column.
When you set the linear velocity, the system calculates the column inlet pressure based
on the inner diameter and the length of the column and the film thickness of the column.

GC-2010 Plus 125

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

The linear velocity is set separately so that the linear velocity desired occures at the ini-
tial temperature in the oven temperature program.
When the control mode is set to “VELOCITY”, the column inlet pressure automatically
changes so that the linear velocity remains constant even while the oven temperature
program is running.
SPLIT RATIO
Range: -1.0/0.0−9999.9, Default: -1.0
The split ratio is “split flow rate / column flow rate.”
When you set a split ratio, the system sets the total flow rate based on the calculated
carrier gas flow rate and split flow rate, so that the desired split ratio occurs at the oven
temperature.
Set the split ratio to “-1.0” to fix the total flow rate regardless of the oven temperature.
TOTAL FLOW RATE
Range: 0.0−1200.0 ml/min (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 500.0 ml/min
In split or splitless mode, the total flow rate is equivalent to “column flow rate + split flow
rate + septum purge flow rate”.
SPLIT MODE
Selection: SPLIT/SPLITLESS/DIRECT, Default: SPLIT
SPLIT: Controls the column inlet pressure and the total flow rate so that the column inlet
pressure and split ratio occur as specified.
SPLITLESS: Closes the split flow line during the sampling time so that the set column inlet
pressure is controlled by the Total Flow Controller.
Opens the split flow line and controls the Electronid Split Controller so that the
preset column inlet pressure occurs (Refer to Fig. 12.5.2.) after the sampling
time elapses.
To set the time of the Splitless auto off, refer to "16.6.11 Other Settings" in
"16.6 GC Configuration".
DIRECT: Closes the split flow line and the set column inlet pressure and linear velocity (in
pressure mode) or the set total flow rate (in flow rate mode) occurs. When making
direct injection analyses, select WBI or OCI in the setup screen so that SPLIT
mode is not available.
SAMPLING TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 1.00 min
Sets the sampling time for splitless analysis.
The sampling time indicates the period of time after analysis starts until the split flow line
is opened.
NOTE When setting the sampling time, ensure that the program time is longer than the sampling time.
Otherwise, the sampling time connot function correctly.

CONTROL MODE
Selection: PRESS/VELOCITY/FLOW (for direct injection mode), Default: PRESS
When the injection mode is set to “SPLIT” or “SPLITLESS”
PRESS: Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant.
VELOCITY: Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant.
When the injection mode is set to “DIRECT”
PRESS: Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant.
VELOCITY: Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant.
FLOW: Controls the system so that the flow rate remains constant.

126 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

CARRIER GAS TYPE

Selection: He/N2/H2/Ar, Default: He
Specify the carrier gas type supplied to the AFC.
This parameter is used for the measurement/control of the flow rate.
If this parameter is not set correctly, flow rate calculations may not be performed
correctly.
(Example: If this parameter is set to “N2” when He is actually used, the displayed total
flow rate, column flow rate and linear velocity are lower than the actual values.)
CARRIER GAS PRIMARY PRESSURE
Range: Cannot be set by user. For display only.
A rough pressure level (primary pressure) of the carrier gas supplied to the AFC is
displayed. Note 3)

1 The column flow rate ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is
970 kPa or less and the calculated total flow rate is 1,200 ml/min.
2 The linear velocity ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa
or less.
3 It is normal that primary pressures displayed on the screen for each injection port have approximately
10 kPa variation when two or more injection ports are mounted. (The displayed values are only rough
indications.)

12.5.2.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Sets inner diameter, length and film thickness of capillary column.
Values set here are used in column inlet pressure caluculations from
Column column flow rate or linear velocity (or vice versa). 12.5.3
If these parameters are not set correctly, calculations are not performed
correctly.
Gas Saver The gas saver saves carrier gas by reducing the split flow rate. 12.5.4
Sets flow controller to be used to “On”.
Default value is “Off”.
When [Start GC] is pressed, the AFC in the current analytical line which is
On/Off ――
set to “On” starts.
If AFC is set to “Off” during carrier gas control, the control stops. When it is
set to “On” again, the carrier gas control restarts.
Press Prog Sets the column inlet pressure program. 12.5.5
Flow Prog Sets the total flow rate program. 12.5.6
Split Prog Sets the split ratio program. 12.5.7
Purge Sets the septum purge flow rate and program for flow rate. 12.5.8
High Pressure Injection:
Sets high pressure injection, where the column inlet pressure is kept at a
high value for a certain period of time during injection.
Splitter Fix:
Advanced 12.5.9
Keeps the split flow rate constant.
Back Flush:
Sets back flush, where the column inlet pressure is kept at a low value
after analysis.
Performs offset calibration of the AFC sensor.
Offset 3.6
This calibration contributes to good reproducibility of results.
Toggles among the AFC set up screens if two or more AFCs are installed
Next Flow in this system. ――
The [FLOW] key can also be used to switch screens.

GC-2010 Plus 127

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.3 Setting column parameters

For capillary columns, the column inner diameter, length, and film thickness are used to cal-
culate the column flow rate and linear velocity. Enter the column inlet pressure, and the col-
umn flow rate and linear velocity are calculated based on the column parameters.
Alternatively, by entering the column flow rate and linear velocity valves, the column param-
eters are used to calculate the corresponding column inlet pressure.

12.5.3.1 Screen description

Select [Column] (PF menu) from the [FLOW] key main screen to display the Column
Diam. screen shown in Fig. 12.5.5.

Fig. 12.5.5 Column setup screen

12.5.3.2 Parameter list

COLUMN I.D.
Range: 0.01−6.00 mm, Default: 0.32 mm
COLUMN LENGTH
Range: 0.1−250.0 m, Default: 25.0 m
FILM THICKESS
Range: 0.00−300.00 µm, Default: 0.50 µm
NOTE Set these parameter values carefully to avoid calculation errors.

128 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.4 Gas saver

The gas saver function reduces the split ratio during a split or splitless analysis. This
reduces the amount of carrier gas flowing through the split flow line, conserving carrier gas.
Even though this can change the split ratio, the column inlet pressure is kept at a constant
value. In other words, changing the split ratio does not affect the carrier gas flow rate
through in the column.
NOTE To set the Gas Saver AOC link and the time of the Gas Saver auto on, refer to "16.6.11 Other
Settings" in "16.6 GC Configuration".

12.5.4.1 Screen description

Select [Gas Saver] (PF menu) from the [FLOW] key to display the Gas Saver screen
shown in Fig. 12.5.6.

Fig. 12.5.6 Gas saver setup screen

12.5.4.2 Parameter list

GAS SAVER
Selection: On/Off, Default: Off
Select “On” to use the gas saver function.
Select “Off” to disable the gas saver function.
GAS SAVER SPLIT RATIO
Range: 0.0−9999.9, Default: 20.0
Set the split ratio which will reduce the split flow to conserve carrier gas.
Setting “0” closes the split flow line.
GAS SAVER START TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 1.00 min
Specify the period of time after analysis starts until the split ratio switches to gas saver mode.
This period of time should be longer than the time required for the sample to move from
the injection port to the column.
Setting the gas saves start time too early can provide unpredictable quantitation results.

GC-2010 Plus 129

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.5 Pressure program

You can set a program to increase and decrease the column inlet pressure during analysis.
If high-boiling point contaminants are clunting shorlty after the target compounds, a pressure
program can be used so that the oven temperature does not need to be set higher than nec-
essary. This prolongs column service life.

12.5.5.1 Screen description

Select [Press Prog] (PF menu) from the [FLOW] key main screen when the control
mode is set to “PRESS,” to display the carrier press screen shown in Fig. 12.5.7
appears.

Up to 7 ramps of pressure
increase or decrease can be
set.

Fig. 12.5.7 Pressure program setup screen

12.5.5.2 Parameter list

PRESS
Range: 0.0−970.0 kPa (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 100 kPa
Set the initial pressure and the final pressure for each stage of the pressure program.
TIME
Range: 0.0−9999.99 min, Default: 1.00 min
Set the hold time for the initial pressure and the final pressure for each stage of the
pressure program.
RATE
Range: END/-400.00−400.00 kPa/min, Default: END
Set the pressure program rate.
If you set the rate to “0”, “END” appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp.
If you move the cursor to “END” and set any numeric value other than “0”, the pressure
and the time for that ramp can be enterd.
NOTE The pressure increase/decrease program rate control range may be limited depending on the total flow
rate setup value, the column in use and the purge flow rate.

130 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.5.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position. ――
Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position. ――
PRINT Prints the pressure program to a Chromatopac. ――

12.5.5.4 Setting a pressure program

■ Screen terminology
<1-ramp pressure program>

Pressure

Initial pressure (PRSS)..... P1

P2
Initial pressure hold time (TIME)...... a
P 2 -P 1
Program rate (RATE).....
b
a
Final pressure (PRS)....... P2

Final pressure hold time (TIM)........ c

b c

Program Program Time

starts. finishes.

■ Program creation
<1-ramp pressure program>

100 kPa(5 min)

4 kPa/min

60 kPa(2 min)

Fig. 12.5.8 Pressure program example

GC-2010 Plus 131

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.6 Creating a Flow rate program

If the control mode is set to “FLOW”, increase and decrease the total flow rate during
analysis by making a flow rate program.
When you set a flow rate program for the APC, a corresponding pressure program is actu-
ally calculated based on of the pressure-flow rate calibration curve saved by the GC.

12.5.6.1 Screen description

Select [Flow Prog] (PF menu) from the [FLOW] key main screen while the control mode
is set to “FLOW” to display the Carrier Flow screen shown in Fig. 12.5.9.

Up to 7 ramps of flow rate

increase/decrease can be set.

Fig. 12.5.9 Flow rate program setup screen

12.5.6.2 Parameter list

FLOW RATE
Range: 0.00−970.0 ml/min (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 50 ml/min
Set the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the total flow rate
program.
TIME
Range: 0.0−9999.99 min, Default: 1.00 min
Set the hold time for the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the flow
rate program.
RATE
Range: END/-400.00−400.00 ml/min2, Default: END
Set the flow rate program rate.
If you set the rate to “0”, “END” appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp.
If you move the cursor to “END” and set any numeric value other than “0”, the pressure
and the time for that ramp can be entered.
NOTE The control range of the flow rate program may be limited depending on the column in use, purge flow
rate and gas restrictor.

132 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.6.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position. ――
Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position. ――
Print Prints the flow rate program to a hromatopac. ――

12.5.6.4 Setting a flow rate program

■ Screen terminology
<1-ramp flow rate program>

Flow rate

Initial flow rate (FLOW).... F1

F2 Initial flow rate hold time (TIME)...... a
F 2 -F 1
Program rate (RATE)......
b

a Final flow rate (FLW)........ F2

Final flow rate hold time (TIM)......... c
F1
b c

Program Program Time

starts. finishes.

■ Program creation
<1-ramp flow rate program>

30 ml/min(5 min)

3 ml/min2

20 ml/min(10 min)

Fig. 12.5.10 Flow rate program example

GC-2010 Plus 133

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.7 Split ratio program

You can change the split ratio during a split analysis. In addition, you can set a split ratio
program after the sampling time has elapsed during splitless analysis.
The split ratio program and the gas saver perform basically the same operation. However,
the split ratio program is used for more flexible programming.

12.5.7.1 Screen description

Select [Split Prog] (PF menu) from the [FLOW] key main screen when not in “DIRECT”
mode to display the Split Ratio screen shown in Fig. 12.5.11.

A program can contain up to

7 ramps.

Fig. 12.5.11 Split ratio program setup screen

12.5.7.2 Parameter list

TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 0.00 min
Set this parameter to display the split ratio used previously in the Split Ratio column.
SPLIT RATIO
Range: -1.0/0.0−9999.9, Default: -1.0
Set the split ratio.
If the split ratio is set to “-1.0”, the total flow rate remains constant regardless of the
oven temperature.

12.5.7.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position. ――
Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position. ――
Print Prints the split ratio through to a Chromatopac. ――

134 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.7.4 Setting a split ratio program

■ Screen terminology
<1-ramp program>

 


     
     
     


    
   

■ Program creation
<1-ramp program>

Split ratio = 60

5.00 min

Split ratio = 50

Fig. 12.5.12 Example of split ratio program

GC-2010 Plus 135

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.8 Septum purge

Set the septum purge flow rate. The septum purge removes contamination from the injection
port at the septum.
The septum purge flow rate is set here. In addition, you can create a program to change the
septum purge flow rate during analysis.

12.5.8.1 Screen description

Select [Purge] (PF menu) from the [FLOW] key main screen to display the septum
purge screen shown in Fig. 12.5.13.

A program can contain up to

7 ramps.

Fig. 12.5.13 Septum purge setup screen

136 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.8.2 Parameter list

FLOW RATE
Refer to Fig. 3.5.3, Default:1 3.0 ml/min
Set the initial flow rate of the flow rate program and the final flow rate for each stage.
Even if no program is set, specify septum purge flow rate in the initial flow rate column.
TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 0.00 min
Set the initial flow rate for the flow rate program and the hold time of the final pressure
at each stage.
RATE
Range: END/-400.00−400.00 kPa/min2, Default: END
Set the program rate for the flow rate program.
If you set the rate to “0”, “END” appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp.
If you move the cursor to “END” and set any numeric value other than “0”, the pressure
and the time for that ramp can be entered.
1 The purge flow rate range is from 0 to the total flow rate subtracted by the column flow rate and the
split flow rate.

12.5.8.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position. ――
Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position. ――
On/Off Set On for septum purge flow. ――

GC-2010 Plus 137

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.9 High pressure injection splitter mode and back flush

■ High Pressure Injection
High pressure injection is a split/splitless injection method which keeps the column inlet
pressure at a value higher than the analysis pressure for a specified period of time while the
sample is injected. Then, the column inlet pressure returns to the normal analysis value.
High pressure injection is effective especially for the splitless injection system. High
pressure injections, can reduce the total gas volume and improve percent recovery valves.
Sensitivity may be improved by reducing adsorption by increasing the speed of transition to
the column and by increasing the injection amount in some cases.
NOTE Although it is usable for split analysis, note that the split ratio is different from the set value at high
pressure injection.

■ Splitter Fix
If the injected sample consists of a solvent with a high vaporization expansion coefficient, the
pressure inside the injection port drastically increases when the solvent vaporizes. As a result,
ESC may operate to lower the inlet pressure which is higher than the set pressure and too
much sample components may be discharged from the split vent, reducing sensitivity.

In the splitter fix mode, the voltage on the split flow valve is fixed right before the injection of
the sample, which prevents the discharge of the sample at more than the specified split ratio.
NOTE When the splitter fix state is kept for a long time, the pressure cannot be maintained at a specific level
and analysis cannot be performed with good reproducibility.
To use the splitter fix mode during manual injection, it is recommended to turn it on after the ready
state, inject the sample in certain intervals, and start analysis.

■ Back Flush
Back flush is a method to discharge a component that usually takes a long time to elute from
the column in a short time by blowing it back into the column inlet. For using the Back Flush
mode, a back flush element* (optional) is necessary. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of back flush element.
*P/N: 221-72484-92

138 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

12.5.9.1 Screen description

Select [Advanced] (PF menu) from the [FLOW] key main screen when not in “DIRECT”
mode to open the advanced screen shown in Fig. 12.5.14.

Fig. 12.5.14 Setup screen for high pressure injection and splitter fix mode

12.5.9.2 Parameter list

■ High Pressure Injection
HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE
Select One of the following three modes.
Off : Disables high pressure injection.
On : Sets the column inlet pressure for high pressure injection immediately.
Auto : Immediately sets the column inlet pressure for high pressure injection. When analysis
is finished and the GC returns to the ready state, the column inlet pressure
automatically increases.

HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE = On HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE = Auto

GC-2010 Plus 139

 12 Injection Port
12.5 Split/Splitless Injection System

HIGH PRESS INJECTION PRESS

Range: 0.0−970.0 kPa (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 100.0 kPa
Set the column inlet pressure for high pressure injection.
HIGH PRESS INJECTION TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 1.00 min
Set the period of time after analysis starts until the column inlet pressure returns to the value
for analysis.
Usually, set this equal to the sampling time for splitless analysis.
■ Splitter Fix
SPLITTER FIX MODE
Selection: Off/On/Auto, Default: Off
Select one of the following three modes.
Off : Disables splitter fix mode.
On : Fixes the split flow line immediately.
Auto : Automatically enters splitter fix mode after analysis finishes and the system returns to
ready state.
FIX TIME
Range: 0.0−9999.99 min, Default: 0.10 min
Set the period of time to be in splitter fix mode.
When “SPLITTER FIX MODE” is set to “On”, indicate the period of time after “SPLITTER FIX
MODE” is set to “On” to exit splitter fix mode.
When “SPLITTER FIX MODE” is set to “Auto”, set the period of time after the analysis starts
to exit splitter fix mode.
NOTE Using splitter fix mode for long periods of time may interfere with constant pressure, negatively affect-
ing reproducibility of results.

■ Back Flush
BACK FLUSH MODE
Selection: No/Yes, Default: No
No : The column inlet pressure returns to the set initial pressure level after analysis finishes.
Yes: The column inlet pressure remains at the set final pressure level even after analysis
finishes. Carrier gas is kept to flow back toward the column inlet. The value returns to
the set initial pressure level when the AOC is started from the GC to start next
analysis (only for batch analysis).

Injection, analysis starts Analysis ends Injection, analysis starts Analysis ends

Initial column inlet pressure Temperature ramp program Initial column inlet pressure Temperature ramp program
when analysis starts when analysis starts

Final column inlet Final column inlet

pressure pressure

Back Flush mode: No Back Flush mode: Yes

NOTE ・In the Back Flush mode, create a pressure program where the set initial pressure level is higher than the
set final pressure level. When no pressure program has been created or when the set initial pressure
level is lower than the set final pressure level, normal operation is performed regardless of the setting.
・To return the column inlet pressure to the set initial pressure value when the set final pressure level is
kept because no AOC used is used or for other reasons, press [Restore] (PF menu) in the [SYSTEM]
Key main screen.
When this function is ON, PF3, which usually serves for [Clean Up], serves for [Restore].

140 GC-2010 Plus

1212.6
12 Injection Port
. Direct Injection System
12.6

■ Direct injection system

The direct injection system is an analysis method where a wide-bore column is connected to
the injection port and almost the entire amount of the injected sample is injected into the col-
umn. For the direct injection system, a WBI (wide-bore injection) injection port is used.
In the direct injection system, a wide-bore (0.53 mm or greater) column is usually used.
Analysis needs to be performed with a column flow rate larger than the value optimum for
separation. Therefore, separation is not as good as analysis where a capillary column with a
narrower bore is used. However, analysis is often performed with a relatively higher sensitiv-
ity because more sample can be injected into the column as compared to split analysis.
Also, the analysis method can be changed to capillary column analysis relatively easily
because there is no limit on column temperature conditions and separation conditions of a
packed column can be easily traced. However, peak shapes are broader as compared to
analysis using a capillary column with a narrower bore. Thus, S/N ratio may not necessary
be higher even when peak area is greater in some analysis conditions.

PURGE
TFC Control PURGE VENT
CARRIER
Control

Capillary column

Fig. 12.6.1

GC-2010 Plus 141

 12 Injection Port
12.6 Direct Injection System

12.6.1 Setting the temperature

12.6.1.1 Screen description
Press the [INJ] key to display the injection port main screen shown in Fig. 12.6.2 and to
set the injection port temperature.

Fig. 12.6.2 [INJ] key main screen

12.6.1.2 Parameter list

TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C
Set the injection port temperature.
Keep the injection port temperature as low as is practical to prevent of a decrease in the
service life of the temperature sensor. To instantly vaporize the injected sample, set the
injection port temperature which is suitable for the sample. Because the sample quantity
is usually minute, the sample is vaporized at temperatures lower than the boiling point
of sample compounds. To set the maximum temperature limit, refer to "16.6.4 Setting
the maximum temperature limits" in “16.6 GC Configuration”.

12.6.1.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Print Prints the temperature program to a Chromatopac. ――
Toggles to the next setup screen when two or more injection ports are
Next Inj installed in this system. ――
The [INJ] key can also be used to switch screens.

142 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.6 Direct Injection System

12.6.2 Setting the flow rate

12.6.2.1 Screen description
Press the [FLOW] key to display the main Flow Screen shown in Fig. 12.6.3. Set the
AFC parameters to control the carrier gas pressure and the flow rate.

Fig. 12.6.3 [FLOW] key main screen

12.6.2.2 Parameter list

INLET PRESS
Range: 0.0−970.0 kPa (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 100.0 kPa
Set the column inlet pressure.
When creating a pressure program, this specifies the initial pressure.
When the control mode is set to “PRESS”, the system controls the column inlet
pressure so that it remains constant during a temperature program.
Normally, when using a wide bore column, set the column inlet pressure to a low
pressure (20−40 kPa).
In the case of direct injection, set the inlet pressure so that the column flow rate (= total
flow rate - septum purge flow rate) is at least approximately 10 ml/min.
When the control mode is set to “FLOW,” the parameters are displayed but cannot be
specified.
COLUMN FLOW RATE
Default:1 1.00 ml/min
Set the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column exit (atmospheric pressure at 25 °C).
When you set the carrier gas flow rate, the system calculates the column inlet pressure
based on the inner diameter, the length and the film thickness of the column. The col-
umn flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired occurs at the ini-
tial temperature in the oven temperature program.
When the control mode is set to a selection other than “FLOW,” the parameters are
displayed but cannot be specified.

GC-2010 Plus 143

 12 Injection Port
12.6 Direct Injection System

LINEAR VELOCITY
Default:2 30.0 cm/s
Set the average linear velocity of the carrier gas flowing in the capillary column.
When you set the linear velocity, the system calculates the column inlet pressure based
on the inner diameter, the length and the film thickness of the column. The linear velos-
ity is set separately so that the linear velocity desired occurs at the initial temperature in
the oven temperature program.
When the control mode is set to “FLOW,” the parameters are not displayed.
If you set the control mode to “VELOCITY”, the column inlet pressure automatically changes
so that the linear velocity remains constant during the oven temperature program.
TOTAL FLOW RATE
Range: 0.0−1200.0 ml/min (Refer to Fig. 3.5.1.), Default: 50.0 ml/min
Set the total flow rate, which is the sum of “column flow rate + split flow rate + septum
purge flow rate”.
SPLIT MODE
Set to “DIRECT”. Operations cannot be properly controlled under other settings.
CONTROL MODE
Selection: PRESS/VELOCITY/FLOW, Default: PRESS
PRESS: Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant.
VELOCITY: Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant.
FLOW: Controls the system so that the set flow rate remains constant.
CARRIER GAS TYPE
Selection: He/N2/H2/Ar, Default: He
Specify the carrier gas type supplied to the AFC.
This parameter is used for the measurement/control of the flow rate.
If this parameter is set incorrectly, flow rate calckulations may not be performed
incorrectly.
(Example: If this parameter is set to “N2” when He is actually used, the displayed total
flow rate, column flow rate and linear velocity are lower than the actual values.)
CARRIER GAS PRIMARY PRESSURE
Range: Cannot be set by user. For display only.
A rough pressure level (primary pressure) of the carrier gas supplied to the AFC is
displayed. Note 3)
1 The column flow rate ranges is from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is
970 kPa or less and the calculated total flow rate is 1,200 ml/min or less.
2 The linear velocity ranges is from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is
970 kPa or less.
3 It is normal that primary pressures displayed on the screen for each injection port have approximately
10 kPa variation when two or more injection ports are mounted. (The displayed values are only rough
indications.)

144 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.6 Direct Injection System

12.6.2.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Sets inner diameter, length and film thickness of capillary column.
Values set here are used in column inlet pressure caluculations from
Column column flow rate or linear velocity (or vice versa). 12.5.3
If these parameters are not set correctly, calculations are not performed
correctly.
Sets flow controller to be used to “On”.
Default value is “Off”.
When [Start GC] is pressed, the AFC in the current analytical line which is
On/Off ――
set to “On” starts.
If AFC is set to “Off” during carrier gas control, the control stops. When it is
set to “On” again, the carrier gas control restarts.
Press Prog Sets the column inlet pressure program. 12.5.5
FLOW Prog Sets the total flow rate program. 12.5.6
Purge Sets the septum purge flow rate and the flow rate program. 12.5.8
Performs offset calibration of the AFC sensor.
Offset 3.6
This calibration contributes to good reproducibility of results.
Toggles among the AFC setup screens if two or more AFCs are installed in
Next Flow this system. ――
The [FLOW] key can also be used to Switch screens.

GC-2010 Plus 145

1212.7
12 Injection Port
. Setting the Flow Rate Parameters
12.7

■ Linear velocity and carrier gas selection

In capillary analysis, the type and the liner velocity of the carrier gas have a considerable
effect on the column efficiency. The figure below shows changes in the HETP (Height
Equivalent to Theoretical Plate) at different linear velocity valves for nitrogen, helium and
hydrogen carrier gas. HETP is a parameter for column efficiency. The smaller the value is,
the higher the column efficiency.

Fig. 12.7.1 Relationship between linear velocity and HETP for various carrier gases
(H-u curve)

The graph above shows that the lowest HETP values are obtained when nitrogen is used as
the carrier gas and the linear velocity is set to a value a little less than 10 cm/s. However,
nitrogen is not a good carrier gas for capillary analysis for the following reasons.
(1) If the linear velocity deviates only slighty from the optimum value, the HETP increases
dramatically. The resolution of peaks changes dramatically.
(2) To obtain the optional linear velocity, the flow rate must be low, resulting in long analysis times.

The lowest HETP value for helium is larger than the value for nitrogen. But helium is
frequently used as the carrier gas because the HETP is low over a considerably wider linear
velocity range starting at 20 cm/s.
The column efficiency of hydrogen is good at higher linear velocities than for helium. For this
reason, hydrogen can be used for rapid analyses. However, hydrogen is seldom used in
reality because it is extremely flammable, and therfore too dangerous.

■ Efficiency of an analysis
Usually, analyses are performed with a flow rate that is a higher than the optimal flow rate,
as long as separation of conpounds is sufficient. This reduces the analysis time. For helium
carrier gas, setting the linear velocity to 30 cm/s is recommended.
The tables below show the column inlet pressure at which the linear velocity becomes
approximately 30 cm/s. Use the tables as the guideline for setting the column inlet pressure.

146 GC-2010 Plus

 12 Injection Port
12.7 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters

Example 1: Column oven temperature = 50 °C(carrier gas = helium)

Length
30 m 60 m
I.D. of column Film thickness
0.25 mm 0.25 µm 100 kPa 210 kPa
0.32 mm 0.25 µm 60 kPa 120 kPa
0.53 mm 1.5 µm 20 kPa 40 kPa

Example 2: Column oven temperature = 200 °C (carrier gas = helium)

Length
30 m 60 m
I.D. of column Film thickness
0.25 mm 0.25 µm 130 kPa 275 kPa
0.32 mm 0.25 µm 80 kPa 160 kPa
0.53 mm 1.5 µm 30 kPa 60 kPa

NOTE Fig. 12.7.2 shows the relationship between the column flow rate and the column inlet pressure.

60πd4 （P ＋ P0） 2 － P02

Fc ＝ × ×103
256 µL P0

Fc : Column flow rate [ml/min]

d : Column I.D [mm]
L : Column length [m]
P : Column inlet pressure [kPa]
P0 : Column outlet pressure = atmospheric pressure [kPa]
µ : Viscosity coefficient (19.4 µPa•s (helium, 20 °C))

Fig. 12.7.2

GC-2010 Plus 147

 12 Injection Port
12.7 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters

This page is intentionally left blank.

148 GC-2010 Plus

1313.1
13 Detector
. Introduction
13.1

■ Detectors
This manual describes the operating of an FID and TCD. Consult the Instruction Manual for infor-
mation on other types of detectors. Common GC detectors are listed below.
・ Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)
・ Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)
・ Electron capture detector (ECD) (option)
・ Flame thermionic detector (FTD) (option)
・ Flame photometric detector (FPD) (option)

GC-2010 Plus 149

1313.2
13 Detector
. Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)
13.2

13.2.1 Principle of FID operation

In the hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID), hydrogen gas is mixed with the column
outlet gas at a certain ratio and then the gas mixture is combusted in the air atmosphere as
shown in Fig. 13.2.1. DC voltage is applied on the jet. A collector is located on the upper
area of the FID. When only pure carrier gas (nitrogen, helium, or argon) and hydrogen gas
are mixed, almost no current is produced between the FID jet and collector. When carrier
gas containing an organic compound, which is sample components injected into the injection
port and then separated by the column, is discharged from the FID jet, current is produced
between the FID jet and collector proportionally to the amount of the organic compound.
This is because ions (mainly carbon ions) are generated when an organic compound
combusts within the hydrogen flame and the generated ions are captured by the collector.
For isomers, the ion quantity generated is almost proportional to the number of carbons
contained in the compound. However, carbon atoms in a “C=O” form do not create a signal.
The presence of halogens in the molecular construction decreases the ion quantity
generated.
Because the ion current obtained by the FID as described above is very low, it is amplified
by an amplifier and then output to a Chromatopac or personal computer as a proper voltage.

Amplifier

Jet

Fig. 13.2.1

150 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

13.2.2 Setting the detector

13.2.2.1 Screen description
Press the [DET] key to display the detector main screen shown in Fig.13.2.2. Here, set
the detector temperature, the detector gas flow rate, etc.
When the detector is configured in the analytical line, the output signal settings appear
in the lower portion of the screen.

For the detector signal output,

refer to "13.5 Setting the
Output Signals".

Fig. 13.2.2 [DET] key main screen

13.2.2.2 Parameter list

DETECTOR CONTROLLER
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
When a detector is set to “On”, its current and voltage are controlled.
When a detector is configured in an analytical line and set to “On” here, the detector is con-
trolled and its signal monitored. However, even if a detector is set to “Off”, the gas flow and
the detector temperature are controlled, if the detector is configured in an analytical line.
TEMP
Range: 0.0−450.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C
Set the detector temperature. Normally, set the detector temperature approximately
30 °C higher than the final column oven temperature to prevent contamination by high
boiling point compounds.To set the maximum temperature limit, refer to "16.6.4 Setting
the maximum temperature limits" in “16.6 GC Configuration”.
FLAME
For display only
On: ignite the flame.
Off: extinguish the flame.
FILTER TIME CONSTANT
Selection: 4 ms/5 ms/10 ms/20 ms/50 ms/100 ms/200 ms/500 ms/1 s/2 s, Default: 200 ms
This constant affects the processing of the detector signal.
As the time constant increases, noise as well as the peak height are reduced. But the
peak width becomes wider.

GC-2010 Plus 151

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

Select the optimum value in accordance with the peak half width. (Refer to "13.4 Filter
Signal Time Constant".)
SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT
Selection: Off/Ch1/Ch2/Ch3/Ch4, Default: (Channel is automatically assigned.)
Select the digital and analog signals output channels. Four channels are available.
However, for analog output, only Ch1 and Ch2 are available.
BACKGROUND SIG. SAVE
Selection: Off/Buff 1/Buff 2, Default: Off
Background baseline signals can be saved for the purpose of background subtraction.
BACKGROUND SIG COMP.
Selection: Off/Buff 1/Buff 2, Default: Off
Subtracts the saved background signal baseline from the actual baseline. This produces
a stable baseline despite considerable baseline fluctuations
DET SIG SUBTRACTION
Selection: Off/DET# 1/DET# 2/DET# 3/DET# 4, Default: Off
Subtracts the detector signal of one detector from the signal of another detector. This
function is mainly used in a dual column flow line to subtract the data acquired without
an injection from the data acquired with an injection. The background signal is elimi-
nated.
For the details on “SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT”, “BACKGROUND SIG. SAVE”, “BACKGROUND
SIG COMP.” and “DET SIG SUBTRACTION”, refer to "13.5 Setting the Output Signals".
SIGNAL RANGE
Selection: ×1/×10-1/×10-2/×10-3/×10-4, Default: /×10-1
Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient “10-x” for a linear analog signal type.
If the signal intensity of a peak is beyond the input range of the data processing unit, for
example, change the setting from “×1” to “×10-1”, from “×10-2” to “×10-3”. If the peak is
too small, for example, change the setting from “×10-1” to “×1”, from “×10-3” to “×10-2”. In
case of the digital signal, the signal is always output with “×1”.
SIGNAL ATTENUATION
Selection: ×1/×2-1/×2-2/×2-3/×2-4, Default: /×2-1
Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient “2-x” for a wide analog signal type.
If the signal intensity of a peak is beyond the input range of the data processing unit, for
example, change the setting from “×1” to “×2-1”, from “×2-2” to “×2-3”. If the peak is too
small, for example, change the setting from “×2-1” to “×1”, from “×2-3” to “×2-2”. In case of
the digital signal, the signal is always output with “×1”.
ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE
Selection: Linear/Wide, Default: Linear
Set this item when the GC is connected to a Chromatopac in analog format.
Wide ... Select wide when connecting the GC to the C-R8A/C-R7A/C-R7A plus with
the signal cable in the standard accessories.
The signal, raised to the 1/2(one-half) power, is output from the GC; then, the
signal received by the Chromatopac is squared.
When connecting the GC to a C-R8A/C-R7A/C-R7A plus for the first time, or
replacing the Chromatopac, set the detector signal output to “Off” and perform
the wide range calibration. (For the wide range calibration procedure, refer to
"2.7 Connecting external device cables".)
Linear ... Select linear when connecting the GC to any Chromatopac other than the C-
R8A/C-R7A/CR-7A plus. When connecting the GC to a C-R8A/C-R7A/C-R7A
plus and setting the “ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE” to “Linear”, the optional signal
cable (linear, P/N 221-47251-92) is required.
In case of “Linear”, the Chromatopac does not need the wide range calibra-
tion.

152 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

13.2.2.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Reduces the air flow rate, heats filament, and ignites detector when
pressed when “FLAME” was “Off”.
Ignite If “AUTO IGNIT” is set to “On” on the [SYSTEM] key screen, the detector is 13.2.2.4
automatically ignited after each temperature of detector, the control of
which is “On”, reached the setting value.
Det Gas Sets the flow rate of makeup gas, hydrogen and air. 13.2.3
If the Advanced Pressure Control (APC) is installed, you can set automatic
Ign. Set ―――
ignition and automatic re-ignition. Default value is “On”.
Toggles to the setup screen of another installed detector.
Next Det ―――
The [DET] key can also be used to switch screens.

13.2.2.4 Igniting the FID

■ Ignition procedure
(1) When “DETECTOR” is set to “On” and “AUTO IGNITE” is set to “On” on the [SYSTEM]
key main screen.

On the [DET] key main screen, set the

detector to “On”.

Press [Start GC] (PF menu).

([SYSTEM] key main screen)

GC control starts. The FID ignites once

it has reached the set temperature.

The baseline should indicate whether

ignition was successful.

The message “Ignition finished.” appears,

and the ignition is completed.

GC-2010 Plus 153

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

(2) When “DETECTOR” is set to “On” and “IGNITE” is set to “Off” on the [SYSTEM] key
main screen.

On the [DET] key main screen, set the

detector to “On”.

Press [Start GC] (PF menu).

([SYSTEM] key main screen)

Wait until the detector temperature

increases to the temperature set.

Press [Ignit] (PF menu) to ignite the

FID.

The baseline should indicate whether

ignition was successful.

The message “Ignition finished.” appears,

and the ignition is completed.

(3) When “DETECTOR” is set to “Off” on the [SYSTEM] key main screen.

Press [Start GC] (PF menu) on the

[SYSTEM] key main screen.

On the [DET] key main screen, set the

FID Control to “On”.

Wait until the detector temperature

increases to the temperature set.

Press [Ignit] (PF menu) to ignite the FID.

The baseline should indicate whether

ignition was successful.

The message “Ignition finished.” appears,

and the ignition is completed.

NOTE When the ignition fails initially, ignition sequence is reattempted. If the ignition is successful in the
reattempted sequence, the message “Ignition finished (retried)” appears. If the ignition sequences are
failed five times, the message “DET#n ignition failed” appears and the ignition sequence finishes.

154 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

■ Ignition troubleshooting
When ignition has failed and the message “Ignition failed.” appears, check the following items.
Cause Solution
Connect the column for FID to be ignited, and
Column is not connected.
ensure that carrier gas is flowing.
Gas leaks at the detector side column con-
Tighten the nut. Replace the ferrle.
nection.
Hydrogen is not supplied. Supply hydrogen.
Hydrogen flow rate is incorrect. Set the hydrogen flow rate to a proper value.
Air is not supplied. Supply air.
Air flow rate is incorrect. Set the air flow rate to a proper value.
Unused FID/FPD is set to “On”. Set unused detectors to “Off”.
Clean the FID jet.
FID jet is clogged.
Replace the FID jet.
Igniter filament is broken. Replace the igniter.

13.2.2.5 Extinguishing the FID

This section describes how to extinguish the FID when the Advanced Pressure Control
(APC) is installed. Tighen the main valve of the cylinder after the extinction, if necessary.

■ Auto extinguisher
From the [SYSTEM] key main screen, press [STOP GC] (PF menu).
The detector temperature gradually decreases, supply of hydrogen and air is automatically
stopped, and the flame is extinguished.
When a time program is running or a stop time has been set, the detector gas is automati-
cally shut off at the end of the program, extinguishing the FID fmame.

■ Manual extinguishment
To extinguish the detector flame without waiting automatic extinguishment, set the gas con-
trol of “H2” and “Air” to “Off” on the [Det Gas] (PF menu) screen. The detector gas is shut off,
extinguishing the FID flame.

CAUTION
The cover of FID detector should be raised and set up using tweezers
for prevention of a scald in case of maintenance and inspection. Put
down the cover on its side using tweezers in case of analysis.

Cover

GC-2010 Plus 155

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

13.2.3 Setting the detector gas flows

The FID detector gas consists of makeup gas, hydrogen and air. The makeup gas is inert
gas supplied to the detector to optimize FID sensitivity and prevent peak tailing. Usually, the
carrier gas is used as the makeup gas. Hydrogen gas and air are supplied to be combusted
inside the detector, creating the FID flame.

13.2.3.1 Screen description

Select [Det Gas] (PF menu) from the [DET] key main screen to display the flow screen
shown in Fig. 13.2.3.
When the start sequence is the “Start Flow” status on the [SYSTEM] key screen, the
makeup gas flow starts. Just before the ignition procedure begins, hydrogen and air
flow starts. When the stop sequence is “Stop Temp/Det” status on the [SYSTEM] key
main screen, gas flow stop.

Refer to “OPTIMAL FLOW”

in "13.2.3.2 Parameter list",
and check whether the flow
rate of each detector gas is
set correctly. If not, set it to
the correct value.

Fig. 13.2.3 Setting the detector gas flows

156 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

13.2.3.2 Parameter list

H2
Range: 0.0−100.0 ml/min, Default: 40.0 ml/min
MAKE UP
Range: 0.0−100.0 ml/min, Default: 30.0 ml/min
Make up gas is supplied to the detector to optimize its sensitivity. For the FID, both
nitrogen and helium can be used. Nitrogen offers higher absolute sensitivity and higher
baseline noise than helium.
GAS TYPE
Selection: N2/He/Ar, Default: He
Set the type of gas used as the makeup gas.
Do not use hydrogen for make up gas. Do not select Ar for FID make up gas.
Air
Range: 0.0−1000.0 ml/min, Default: 400.0 ml/min
OPTIMAL FLOW (Refer to Fig. 3.4.5-Fig. 3.4.7.)
Normally, set the flow rate of the makeup gas, hydrogen and air as follows to maximize
the FID sensitivity.
Makeup gas : Approx. 30 ml/min
Hydrogen : Approx. 40 ml/min
Air : Approx. 400 ml/min

13.2.3.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
The flow rate of makeup gas, hydrogen and air supplied to detector can be
Program 13.2.3.4
controlled by a program.
Select “Off” to stop gas flow.
On/Off Select “On” to restart the gas flow. ――
Default value is “On”.
Performs offset calibration of APC sensor.
Offset 3.6
This calibration improves the reproducibility of results.

GC-2010 Plus 157

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

13.2.3.4 Flow rate program for detector gas

Press [Program] (PF menu) from [Det Gas] (PF menu) to display the Detector gas
screen shown in Fig. 13.2.4. Here, set a flow rate program for detector gas.
The flow rate program procedure is the same for the makeup gas, hydrogen gas and air.
For the flow rate program setting procedure, refer to "12.5.6 Creating a Flow rate
program".

A 7 ramp program can be set.

Set the program for hydro-

gen and air the same way.
Press the appropriate PF
menu to set the programs.

Fig. 13.2.4 Detector gas program

158 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

13.2.3.5 Detector gas program parameters

FLOW RATE
The range and the default valve differs for each gas. See "13.2.3.2 Parameter list".
Set the default flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the detector gas flow
rate program.
TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 0.00 min
Set the retention time for the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each ramp of the
detector gas flow rate program.
RATE
Range: END/-400.0−400.0 ml/min2, Default: END
Set the program rate of the detector gas flow rate program. If you set the rate to “0”,
“END” appears and the program ends at the previous ramp. Move the cursor to “END”
and set any numeric value other than “0”, to enter the pressure and the time for that
ramp.

13.2.3.6 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Make Up Prog Displays the setup screen of the flow rate program for makeup gas. ――
H2 Prog Displays the setup screen of the flow rate program for hydrogen gas. ――
Air Prog Displays the setup screen of the flow rate program for air. ――
Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position. ――
Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position. ――

GC-2010 Plus 159

1313.3
13 Detector
. Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)
13.3

13.3.1 Principle of TCD operation

The thermal conductivity detector (TCD) can detect all compounds except the carrier gas
itself.
When a filament heated by the application of current is provided in a gas atmosphere with a
high thermal conductivity such as helium, the filament temperature rises as sample compo-
nents with a lower thermal conductivity pass the filament. The filament temperature changes
affect its resistance; the resistance is measured and produces a peak.
A reference filament also exists, where only carrier gas flows, to eliminate background resis-
tance fluctions.

Fig. 13.3.1

160 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

13.3.2 Setting the detector

13.3.2.1 Screen description
Press the [DET] key to display the Detector main screen shown in Fig. 13.3.2. Here, set
the detector temperature, the detector gas flow rate, etc.
When the detector is configured in the analytical line, the signal output settings appear
in the lower portion of the screen.

For output of the detector

signal, refer to "13.5 Setting
the Output Signals".

Fig. 13.3.2 [DET] key main screen

13.3.2.2 Parameter list

DETECTOR CONTROLLER
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
When a detector is set to “On”, its current and voltage are controlled.
When a detector is configured in an analytical line and set to “On”, the detector is con-
trolled and its signal monitored. However, even if a detector is set to “Off”, the gas flow
and the detector temperature are controlled, when the detector is configured in an ana-
lytical line.
TEMP
Range: 0.0−400.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C
Set the detector temperature. The TCD sensitivity is proportional to the difference in
temperature between the detector and the filament. Accordingly, the sensitivity
increases as the detector temperature decreases. However, the detector is normally set
approximately 10 °C higher than the final column oven temperature: this prevents con-
tamination in the TCD cell.
To set the maximum temperature limit, refer to "16.6.4 Setting the maximum
temperature limits".

GC-2010 Plus 161

 13 Detector
13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

SIGNAL POLARITY
Selection: +/-, Default: +
When analyzing compounds with a thermal conductivity higher than the carrier gas,
baseline peaks are inverted (negative). When this occurs, switch to a polarity of “-” to
produce positeve peaks.
CURRENT
Range: 0−100 mA, Default: 0 mA
The TCD sensitivity is approximately proportional to the cube of the current.
If the sensitivity is insufficient, increase the current within the range shown in Fig.
13.3.3. The maximum operating current is determined by the detector temperature and
the carrier gas type. Keeping the current highre than necessary shortens the filaments
life and can cause baseline drift.

CAUTION
If the current is turned on before the carriergas + make up gas has
completely replaced the air, the filament can be blown.
Ensure that the current is set to “0” at first. Press the [SYSTEM] key
and select the [start GC] (PF menu), set the start time to approxi-
mately 10 minutes. Ensure that the carrier gas flows out frow the
detector vent before setting the current.

CAUTION
To avoid broken filaments and poor performance, set the current
below the valves indicated by the curves below.

Fig. 13.3.3 Maximum operating current

162 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

FILTER TIME CONSTANT

Selection: 4 ms/5 ms/10 ms/20 ms/50 ms/100 ms/200 ms/500 ms/1 s/2 s, Default: 200 ms
This constant affects the processing of the detector signal.
As the time constant increases, noise as well as the peak height are reduced.
Select the optimum value in accordance with the peak half width. (Refer to "13.4 Filter
Signal Time Constant".)
SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT
Selection: Off/Ch1/Ch2/Ch3/Ch4, Default: (Channel is automatically assigned.)
Select the digital and analog signals output Channels. Four channels are available.
However, for analog output, only Ch1 and Ch2 are available.
BACKGROUND SIG. SAVE
Selection: Off/Buff 1/Buff 2, Default: Off
Background baseline signals can be saved for the purpose of background subtraction.
BACKGROUND SIG COMP.
Selection: Off /Buff 1/Buff 2, Default: Off
Subtracts the saved background signal baseline from the actual baseline. This pro-
duces a stable baseline despite considerable baseline fluctuations.
DET SIG SUBTRACTION
Selection: Off /DET#1/DET#2/DET#3/DET#4, Default: Off
Subtracts the detector signal of one detector from the signal of another detector. This
function is mainly used in a dual column flow line to subtract the data acquired without
an injection from the data acquired with an injection. The background signal is elimi-
nated.
For the details on “SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT”, “BACKGROUND SIG. SAVE”,
“BACKGROUND SIG COMP.” and “DET SIG SUBTRACTION”, refer to "13.5 Setting
the Output Signals".
SIGNAL RANGE
Selection: ×1/×10-1/×10-2/×10-3/×10-4/, Default: ×10-1
Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient “10-x” for a linear analog signal type. If the
signal intensity of a peak is beyond the input range of the data processing unit is satu-
rated, for example, change the setting from “×1” to “×10-1”, from “×10-2” to “×10-3”. If the
peak is too small, for example, change the setting from “×10-1” to “×1”, from “×10-3” to
“×10-2”. In case of the digital signal, the signal is always output with “×1”.
SIGNAL ATTENUATION
Selection: ×1/×2-1/×2-2/×2-3/×2-4/, Default: ×2-1
Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient “2-x” for a wide analog signal type. If the
signal intensity of a peak is beyond the input range of the data processing unit, for
example, change the setting from “×1” to “×2-1”, from “×2-2” to “×2-3”. If the peak is too
small, for example, change the setting from “×2-1” to “×1”, from “×2-3” to “×2-2”. In case
of the digital signal, the signal is always output with “×1”.
ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE
Selection: Linear/Wide, Default: Linear
Set this item when the GC is connected to a Chromatopac in analog format.
Wide ... Select wide when connecting the GC to the C-R8A/C-R7A/C-R7A plus. with
the signal cable in the standard accessories.
The signal, raised to the 1/2 (one harf) power, is output from the GC; then, the
signal received by the Chromatopac is squared.
When connecting the GC to a C-R8A/C-R7A/C-R7A plus for the first time, or
replacing the Chromatopac, set the detector signal output to “Off” and perform
the wide range calibration. (For the wide range calibration procedure, refer to
"2.7 Connecting external device cables".)

GC-2010 Plus 163

 13 Detector
13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

Linear ... Select linear when connecting the GC to any Chromatopac other than the C-
R8A/C-R7A/C-R7A plus.
When connecting the GC to a C-R7A/CR-7A plus and setting the “ANALOG
SIGNAL TYPE” to “Linear”, the optional signal cable (linear, P/N 221-47251-
92) is required. In the case of “Linear”, the Chromatopac does not need the
wide range calibration.

13.3.2.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Sets the makeup gas flow rate supplied from the reference cell to the
Det Gas 13.3.3
sample cell.
Toggles to the setup screeen of another detector.
Next Det ――
The [DET] key can also be used to switch screens.

164 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

13.3.3 Setting the detector gas flows

The gas tubing is routed so that the reference gas effluent is used as the makeup gas of the
TCD. Helium and nitrogen are available as the makeup gas.
The TCD sensitivity is proportional to the difference in thermal conductivity between the
sample and the carrier gas. Because the thermal conductivity of the sample is lower than
that of the carrier gas, the TCD sensitivity increases as the thermal conductivity of the carrier
gas increases.
For high sensitivity analysis, use gas with a purity of 99.9995 % or more.

Thermal conductivity k (x10-4 Wm-1K-1) at room temperature, 300 K

Thermal Thermal
Gas Gas
conductivity conductivity
He 1499 Inorganic CO2 166.2
Simple H2 1815 compounds H2O 181
compounds N2 259.8 Organic acetone 115
Ar 177.2 compounds hexane 128

13.3.3.1 Screen description

Select [Det Gas] (PF menu) from the [DET] key main screen to display the flow screen
shown in Fig. 13.3.4
When the start sequence is the “Start Flow” status on the [SYSTEM] key screen, the
makeup gas flow starts. When the stop time elapses and the detector temperature
drops to the value set by [Stop Seq] (PF menu) on the [Det Gas] (PF menu), the
makeup gas flow stops.

Refer to “OPTIMAL FLOW”

in "13.3.3.2 Parameter list",
and check whether the flow
rate of each detector gas is set
correctly. If not, set it to the
correct value.

Fig. 13.3.4 Setting the detector gas flows

GC-2010 Plus 165

 13 Detector
13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

13.3.3.2 Parameter list

Make Up
Range: 0.0−20.0 ml/min, Default: 8.0 ml/min
The sensitivity increases as the difference of the thermal conductivity between the car-
rier gas and sample component.
For high sensitivity analysis, use helium with purity of 99.9995 % or more.
GAS TYPE
Selection: N2/He/Ar, Default: He
OPTIMAL FLOW (Refer to Fig. 3.4.8.)
Normally, set the flow rate of the makeup gas to approx. 8 ml/min (Helimu).
NOTE If the makeup gas flow is set below the optimal rate (8 ml/min for Helimu), absolute sensitivity
increases. However, the reference filament can break, and peak tailing may occur. The baseline may
be come elevated after the solvent peak has eluted (depending on solvent type).

13.3.3.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
The flow rate of makeup gas supplied to detector can be controlled by a
Program 13.3.3.4
program.
Select “Off” to stop the gas flow.
On/Off Select “On” to restart the gas flow. ――
Default value is “On”.
For a TCD, the filament life can be shotened if the makeup gas flows stops
while the detector temperature is high. Therfore, the makeup gas contin-
Stop Seq ――
ues to flow, until the detector temperature drops to a specified valve. The
default valve is 50 °C
Performs offset calibration of APC sensor.
Offset 3.6
This calibration improves the reproducibility of results.

166 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

13.3.3.4 Flow rate program for detector gas

Press [Program] (PF menu) from [Det Gas] (PF menu) to display the Detector Make up
screen shown in Fig. 13.3.5. Here, set a flow rate program for detector gas.

A 7 ramp program can be set.

Fig. 13.3.5 Detector gas program

GC-2010 Plus 167

 13 Detector
13.3 Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)

13.3.3.5 Detector gas program parameters

FLOW RATE
Range: 0.0−20.0 ml/min, Default: 8.0 ml/min
Set the default flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the detector gas flow
rate program.
TIME
Range: 0.00−9999.99 min, Default: 0.00 min
Set the retention time for the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each ramp of the
detector gas flow rate program.
RATE
Range: END/-400.0−400.0 ml/min2, Default: END
Set the program rate of the detector gas flow rate program.
If you set the rate to “0”, “END” appears and the program ends at the previous ramp.
Move the cursor to “END” and set any numeric value other than “0” to enter the
pressure and the time for that ramp.

13.3.3.6 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position. ――
Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position. ――

168 GC-2010 Plus

1313.4
13 Detector
. 13.4Filter Signal Time Constant

■ Selecting the filter time constant

Normally, analyes can be performed with the time constant set to the default value.
However, in some cases the S/N ratio is improved by changing the time constant.
For example, if the half width of a FID peak is “0.1 sec”, the S/N ratio is maximaized when
the time constant is set to “20 ms.”

1.2
Normalized SN ratio

0.8 Half width 10 s

0.6 Half width 1 s

0.4 Half width 0.1 s

0.2

0
s

s
m

2
4

10

20

50

0
10

20

50

Time constant

Fig. 13.4.1 Relationship between time constant and S/N ratio (FID)

GC-2010 Plus 169

1313.5
13 Detector
. Setting the Output Signals
13.5

13.5.1 Detector signal output

RS-232C

ch1

ch2

Fig. 13.5.1 Location of connector

Set the detector signal (digital and analog signals) output from the gas chromatograph.
There are four signal output channels. Ch3 and Ch4 are available optionally.
Both digital and analog signals can be output from one channel. Even if two or more
channels are set, signals can be output from each channel at the same time.
Detector signals are transferred through an RS-232C cable (for digital signals, only when a
personal computer are used) and the chromatopac signal cable (for analog signals).

170 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.5 Setting the Output Signals

13.5.2 Background compensation

If the baseline fluctuates considerably during programmed analysis, the baseline fluctuation
can be saved as a background baseline by the GC. After wards, the background is sub-
tracked from the baseline. (background compensation).
This section describes how to save the background baseline and perform background com-
pensation
(1) Setting the signal output channel
On the [DET] key main screen, set “SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT” from “Off” to Channel 1-
4. (“Ch3” and “Ch4” for analog signal are available optionally.)
(2) Background storage setup
On the [DET] key main screen, set “BACKGROUND SIG. SAVE” from “Off” to “Buff 1”
(or “Buff 2”) to save the background baseline.
(3) Saving the background baseline
Without making an injection, press the [START] key on the gas chromatograph to
execute analysis. The background baseline is saved.
(4) Background compensation settings
On the [DET] key main screen, set “BACKGROUND SIG. COMP.” from “No” to “Buff 1”
(or “Buff 2”) the same selectio from in “BACKGRND SAVE”.
(5) Analysis
Make an injection, and press the [START] key to execute analysis. The background
compensation is in efffect.

GC-2010 Plus 171

 13 Detector
13.5 Setting the Output Signals

ColumnCBP1-S25-050Column flow rate4 ml/min

Initial temperature60 °C （2 min）Split ratio1 : 50
Program rate20 °C/minCurrent52 mA
Final temperature220 °CATTEN2
Injection port temperature250 °CSPEED10 mm/min
TCD temperature250 °C

Fig. 13.5.2 Example of programmed analysis without compensation

Fig. 13.5.3 Example of programmed analysis with compensation

172 GC-2010 Plus

 13 Detector
13.5 Setting the Output Signals

13.5.3 Detector signal subtraction

When high sensitivity analysis or high temperature programmed analysis is performed, sta-
tionary liquid vapor released from the column enters into the detector, causing baseline drift
or increasing noises. When this occurs, set up dual analytical flow lines with an injection
port, column, and detector of the same type. One flow line is used as a reference and the
other flow line receives the sample injection. Acquiring signals from each detector at the
same time and calculating the difference between them provides stable baselines.

GC-2010 Plus 173

 13 Detector
13.5 Setting the Output Signals

This page is intentionally left blank.

174 GC-2010 Plus

1414.1
14 Diagnosis
. Standard Diagnosis
14.1

Each part of the gas chromatograph is checked for problems with the self-diagnosis function.
Perform the standard diagnosis periodicaslly to maintain optimal performance and prevent failures.

14.1.1 Screen description

Select “STANDARD DIAGNOSIS” from the [DIAG] key main screen to display the Standard
Diagnosis screen shown in Fig. 14.1.1.

Fig. 14.1.1 Diagnosis main screen

14.1.2 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Start Diag Starts standard diagnosis program. 14.1.5
Displays result of the most recent diagnosis.
However, if standard diagnosis has not been executed since the power has
Details 14.1.9
been turned on, default values are displayed.
[Print] (PF menu) prints out the displayed diagnosis results to chromatopac.
Selects diagnosis items and determines setup values used for diagnostic
Diag Param 14.1.3
reference.

GC-2010 Plus 175

 14 Diagnosis
14.1 Standard Diagnosis

14.1.3 Diagnosis Parameters

Press [Diag Param] (PF menu) from the Standard Diagnosis main screen to display the
Diagnosis Parameters screen shown in Fig. 14.1.2.
Select the items to be checked during the self-test.

Fig. 14.1.2 Diagnosis setup screen

176 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.1 Standard Diagnosis

14.1.4 Diagnosis parameter list

For each item, specify whether it is to be checked or tested. Test items are marked “Yes”.
Items which are ignored are marked “No”. Each item is marked either “Yes” or “No”. For
example, if the septum counter is marked “Yes”, both the INJ1 and INJ2 will be chacked.

CAUTION
At the time of Diagnosis, set the Split mode to “SPLIT”. When WBI
column is used, set the split mode to “DIRECT”.

COUNTER FOR SEPTUM

COUNTER FOR INSERT
Verifies whether the preset number of injections has been exceeded.
The “ANALYSIS COUNTER” limit is displayed.
CRG USE TIME
Verifies whether the CRG valve “On” time exceeds the preset operating time.
The “COOLANT CONSUMPTION” limit is displayed.
TEMP SENSOR USE TIME
The operating time for the temperature sensor in use at 300 °C or above is displayed. Refer
to the guidelines for operating time.
TEMP SENSOR DIAG
Verifies whether noise has been generated, to detect deterioration of the platinum sensor.
LCD USE TIME
Verifies whether the accumulated backlight ON time exceeds the preset operating time.
The limit 46,380 hours.
FAN USE TIME
Verifies whether the accumulated fan operating time exceeds the preset operating time.
The limit is 61,320 hours.
DC VOLTAGE (5 VDC, 24 VDC, -15 VDC, FTD 24 VDC)
Verifies whether each DC voltage has exeeded its limit.
ROOM TEMPERATURE
Verifies whether the current room temperature is within the optimal range.
The range is 5 to 40 °C.
ATMOSPHERIC PRESS
Verifies whether the atmospheric pressure is within the optimal range.
PRIMARY PRESS
Verifies whether the gas supply pressure is within the maximum set pressure.
CPU REGISTER
REAL TIME CLOCK REGISTER
Verifies that each register is correctly written and read.
DETECTOR ROM
Verifies that the data saved in the detector ROM is read correctly.
DETECTOR ADC REGISTER
Verifies that the data saved in the detector A/D converter register is read correctly.
DETECTOR HV SOURCE
Verifies whether the detector high voltage power supply is within the threshold.

GC-2010 Plus 177

 14 Diagnosis
14.1 Standard Diagnosis

DETECTOR IGNITE
Checks that the ignition pulse is normal.
DETECTOR IGNITION
Verifies whether the ignition operation is normally executed.
ECD FREQUENCY
Verifies whether the frequency of the pulse voltage applied to the ECD is below the limit.
CARRIER GAS ROM, DETECTOR GAS ROM, APC ROM
Verifies whether the data saved in the ROM on the flow controller PCB can be read correctly.
CARRIER GAS AD CONVERTER, DETECTOR AD CONVERTER, APC AD CONVERTER
Verifies whether the contents of the A/D converter on the flow controller PCB can be read
correctly.
GAS CONTROL
Checks that the pressure flow rate is normally controlled.
OVER TEMP PROTECTION
Ensure that the overheat protection circuit is normal.
CPU PERIPHERAL
RESET IC
Verifies that the reset circuit works normally.
WATCH DOG TIMER
Ensures that the IC which checks for software problems is functioning normally.
ROM
Checks that the ROM is intact.
RAM
Verifies whether the RAM can be correctly written and read.

178 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.1 Standard Diagnosis

14.1.5 Starting the diagnosis

Press [Start Diag] (PF menu) from the standard diagnosis main screen shown in Fig. 14.1.1
to start diagnosis and to display the screen shown in Fig. 14.1.3.

Fig. 14.1.3 Starting the Diagnosis

14.1.6 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Stops the diagnosis.
Stop Diag 14.1.7
If the program is stopped, items not yet executed are canceled.
Before stariting the IC diagnosis, the message “Reset IC will be checked.
Reset Press PF2 key.” appears. Press [Reset] (PF menu) to check whether reset ――
IC is functioning normally.

GC-2010 Plus 179

 14 Diagnosis
14.1 Standard Diagnosis

14.1.7 Stopping/exiting the diagnosis

Press [Stop Diag] (PF menu) during diagnosis to display the diagnosis stop screen shown in
Fig. 14.1.4.
When the diagnostics are allowed to complete, the total diagnosis results (Test Result) and
the number of abnormalities (Number of NG) are displayed.

Fig. 14.1.4 Diagnosis stops

14.1.8 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
When the diagnosis is stopped, diagnosis results up to that time are dis-
played.
Details When the diagnosis ends, the diagnosis results of all items are displayed. 14.1.9
Press [Print] (PF menu) to print out the displayed diagnosis results to a
Chromatopac.

180 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.1 Standard Diagnosis

14.1.9 Diagnosis results

Press [Details] (PF menu) from the screen shown in Fig. 14.1.4 once the standard diagnosis
is have stopped or ended; the Test Result screen shown in Fig. 14.1.5 appears.
Press [Details] (PF menu) from the standard diagnosis screen shown in Fig. 14.1.4 to
display the results of the last test since the power was turned on. Once the power is turned
off, the diagnosis results are cleared.

Fig. 14.1.5 Diagnosis results

14.1.10 PF menu list

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Print Prints out the results of the diagnosis to a Chromatopac. ――

GC-2010 Plus 181

 14 Diagnosis
14.1 Standard Diagnosis

■ diagnosis results
・ Good : Displayed when the diagnosis result satisfies the requirements.
・ Not Good : Displayed when the diagnosis result does not satisfy the require-
ments.
・ N/T (= Not Tested) : Displayed when the diagnostic test was stopped or when an item
is excluded from the test.
・ N/A (= Not Applicable) : Displayed when diagnostic test is disabled for the item (ignition
test for a TCD, for example).
・ N/S (= Not Selected) : Displayed when the diagnosis were not perfomed on an item
because it has not been configured in an analytical line.
Certain diagnosis items can be performed for components which
have not been configured. For example, for a detector not
configured in any line, Make Up Gas Control is not checked, but
its detector ROM check can be executed.
・ N/I (= Not Installed) : Displayed when the diagnosis item is not installed.

■ Troubleshooting items which are “Not Good”

Diagnosis item Countermeasures
Replace the septum. (Refer to "18.3 Inspection
SEPTUM COUNTER
and Maintenance: Septum".)
Replace the glass insert. (Refer to "18.5 Inspection
INSERT COUNTER
and Maintenance: Glass Insert".)
ROOM TEMPERATURE Check the operation range.
ATMOSPHERIC PRESS Check the operation range.
Increase supply pressure to the GC.
GAS PRIMARY PRESS
For example, adjust the regulator.
DETECTOR IGNITION Refer to "19 Troubleshooting".
ANY OTHER ITEM Contact your Shimadzu representative.

182 GC-2010 Plus

1414.2
14 Diagnosis
. Log Reading Menu
14.2

14.2.1 Screen description

Select “2. LOG READING MENU” from the [DIAG] key main screen to display the Log Read-
ing Menu screen shown in Fig. 14.2.1.

Fig. 14.2.1 Log reading menu main screen

14.2.2 Parameter list

GC OPERATION LOG
Displays the power On/Off log and the system On/Off log.
ANALYSIS LOG
Displays the analysis log. This log records whether analyses were finished and whether con-
trols deviated from their target valves.
PARAMETER LOG
Displays the key operation log and the parameter change log.
ERROR LOG
Displays the log of displayed error messages.
DIAGNOSTIC LOG
Displays the diagnosis log.

GC-2010 Plus 183

 14 Diagnosis
14.2 Log Reading Menu

14.2.3 GC Operation log

Select “1. GC OPERATION LOG” to display the system On/Off log and the heater On/Off
log.

(1) Screen description

Select “2. LOG READING MENU” from the [DIAG] key main screen, then select “1. GC
OPERATION LOG”. The screen shown in Fig. 14.2.2 appears.
Up to 50 logs are stored. If the number of logs exceeds 50, existing logs are deleted
starting with the oldest.

Fig. 14.2.2 Operation log screen

NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen, scroll through the screen using the left
and right arrow keys.

(2) PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Deletes all displayed logs.
When [Clear Log] (PF menu) is pressed, the screen changes and the
Clear Log ――
message “Clear log with PF2” appears. Press [Clear Log] (PF menu) to
clear the log.
Print Prints the the operation log to a Chromatopac. ――

184 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.2 Log Reading Menu

14.2.4 Analysis log

When “2. ANALYSIS LOG” is selected, the analysis log is displayed. This log records
whether analyses were allowed to finish and whether controls deviated from their set
valves.

(1) Screen description

Select “2. LOG READING MENU” from the [DIAG] key main screen, then select “2.
ANALYSIS LOG” to display the screen shown in Fig. 14.2.3.
25−545 logs are saved. The number of saved logs depends on the size of each log. If
the number of logs exceeds the capacity, existing logs are deleted starting from the
oldest.

Fig. 14.2.3 Analysis log screen

NOTE During a temperature program, if the rate of temperature increase is too great, the GC may not be
within the Ready range temporarily. When this occurs, the analysis log shows “Fail”.
NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen, scroll through the screen using the left
and right arrow keys.

(2) PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Deletes all displayed logs.
When [Clear Log] (PF menu) is pressed, the screen changes and the
Clear Log ――
message “Clear log with PF2” appears. Press [Clear Log] (PF menu) to
clear the log.
Print Prints the analysis log to a Chromatopac. ――

GC-2010 Plus 185

 14 Diagnosis
14.2 Log Reading Menu

(3) Analysis log details

On the analysis log main screen, use the cursor to select a log item with “∗” on the right
and press the [ENTER] key to display the screen shown in Fig. 14.2.4.
The screen provides details about an alarm or warning which was issued during the
analysis.

Fig. 14.2.4 Details screen

186 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.2 Log Reading Menu

14.2.5 Parameter log

When “3. PARAMETER LOG” is selected, parameter names and new values are
displayed when parameters are changed. In addition, the direct operation of valves, etc.
are also displayed.

(1) Screen description

Select “2. LOG READING MENU” from the [DIAG] key main screen, then select “3.
PARAMETER LOG”. The screen shown in Fig. 14.2.5 appears.
Up to 50 logs are saved. If the number of logs exceeds 50, existing logs are deleted
starting from the oldest.

Fig. 14.2.5 Parameter log screen

NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen, scroll through the screen using the left
and right arrow keys.

(2) PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Deletes all displayed logs.
When [Clear Log] (PF menu) is pressed, the screen changes and the
Clear Log ――
message “Clear log with PF2” appears. Press [Clear Log] (PF menu) to
clear the log.
Print Prints the parameter log to a Chromatopac. ――

GC-2010 Plus 187

 14 Diagnosis
14.2 Log Reading Menu

14.2.6 Error log

When “4. ERROR LOG” is selected, the log of all errors which have been displayed is
shown.

(1) Screen description

Select “2. LOG READING MENU” from of the [DIAG] key main screen, then select “4.
ERROR” to display the screen shown in Fig. 14.2.6.
Up to 100 logs are saved. If the number of logs exceeds 100, existing logs are deleted
starting from the oldest.

Fig. 14.2.6 Error log screen

NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen, scroll through the screen using the left
and right arrow keys.
“Ignition finished (retried)” is not saved, when only one ignition sequence was re-attempted.

(2) PF menut
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Deletes all displayed logs.
When [Clear Log] (PF menu) is pressed, the screen changes and the
Clear Log ――
message “Clear log with PF2” appears. Press [Clear Log] (PF menu) to
clear the log.
Print Prints the error log to a Chromatopac. ――

188 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.2 Log Reading Menu

14.2.7 Diagnostic log

When “5. DIAGNOSTIC LOG” is selected, the resulst of the standard diagnosis are
displayed. The results of the last diagnosis are shown in the [Details] (PF menu) screen
described in “14.1 Standard Diagnosis”.

(1) Screen description

Select “2. LOG READING MENU” from of the [DIAG] key main screen, then select “5.
DIAGNOSTIC LOG”. The screen shown in Fig. 14.2.7 appears.
Up to 50 logs are saved. If the number of logs exceeds 50, existing logs are deleted
starting from the oldest.

Fig. 14.2.7 Diagnosis log screen

NOTE If there are more items than items than can be displayed on one screen, scroll through the screen
using the left and right arrow keys.

(2) PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Deletes all displayed logs.
When [Clear Log] (PF menu) is pressed, the screen changes and the
Clear Log ――
message “Clear log with PF2” appears. Press [Clear Log] (PF menu) to
clear the log.
Print Prints the diagnosis log to a Chromatopac. ――

GC-2010 Plus 189

1414.3
14 Diagnosis
. Analysis Counter
14.3

Use the analysis counter to set the replacement timing of the septum, and the glass insert, when
the counter exeeds the limit, an error message is displayed.

14.3.1 Screen description

Select “3. ANALYSIS COUNTER” from the [DIAG] key main screen to display the screen
shown in Fig. 14.3.1.

Fig. 14.3.1 Analysis counter screen

190 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.3 Analysis Counter

14.3.2 Parameter list

AOC WAIT
Selection: Yes/No, Default: No
When [Yes] is selected, the output of the ready signal to the AOC can be stopped and
operation can be temporarily paused if each threshold is exceeded during continuous
analysis using AOC.
USE COUNTER
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
ANALYSIS COUNTER
Selection: 0
SETTING TO WARN
Range: 0−999, Default: 100
NOTE The septum/glass insert replacement interval depends on the type of samples and outer diameter of
the syringe needle. Replace them promptly when the warning message for the use count exceeding
the limit is displayed. Check the analysis counter and threshold value prior to analysis. Reset the
analysis counter after the replacement.

14.3.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Reset Resets analysis number counter of the current item. ――
Next Displays the setup screen of the analysis counter of another injection port. ――

GC-2010 Plus 191

1414.4
14 Diagnosis
. Coolant Consumption Counter
14.4

The coolant consumption display allows you to confirm the total time that the CRG valve has
been “On” (The CRG is an optional accessory.)
If the coolant consumption exceeds the time limit specified (setting to warn), a warning message
is displayed.

14.4.1 Screen description

Select “4. COOLANT CONSUMPTION” from the [DIAG] key main screen to display the
Coolant consumption screen shown in Fig. 14.4.1.

Fig. 14.4.1 Coolant consumption sets screen screen

192 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.4 Coolant Consumption Counter

14.4.2 Parameter list

USE COUNTER
Selection: Yes/No, Default : Yes
CONSUMPTION
Default: 0 min
The total time that the CRG is “On” is displayed.
Refer to "15.4 Setting the CRG Parameters".
SETTING TO WARN
Range: 0−9999 min, Default : 100 min
NOTE The coolant consumption time depends on the gas cylinder volume and the temperature settings which
requier CRG. Set the warning time according to the analysis conditions. It is necessary to count the
time for the actual analysis condition once.

14.4.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Reset Resets the Use counter. ――

GC-2010 Plus 193

1414.5
14 Diagnosis
. Standard Installation Test
14.5

After the system has been installed by your Shimadzu representative, the standard installation
test is performed to check whether the system is functioning properly.

14.5.1 Screen description

Select “5. STANDARD INSTALLATION” from the [DIAG] key screen to display the Standard
installation screen shown in Fig. 14.5.1.
The installation test can be performed at any time to check for proper functioning. From this
screen, load the analytical conditions of the standard installation test.

Fig. 14.5.1 Standard installation test main screen

14.5.2 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Automatically sets the analytical conditions of the standard installation test.
Load When [Load] (PF menu) is pressed, “TEST” is displayed for the used file ――
name.
Unload Returns analytical conditions to their former status. ――

194 GC-2010 Plus

 14 Diagnosis
14.5 Standard Installation Test

14.5.3 Test procedure

(1) Specify the analytical conditions file of the standard installation test.
Example: Load “File 1” using [File] (PF menu) of the [SET] key.
(2) Configure the injection port and the detector used to execute the standard installation
test in an analytical here.
However, if two or more analytical lines have been configured, the lowest No. analytical
line is set with the test conditions.
In the standard installation test, only one detector can be set per analytical line. If two or
more detectors are set, an error message appears.
(3) Set the dimensions of the column installed.
Example: Set the internal diameter, length and film thickness of the column using
[Column] of the [FLOW] key.
(4) Press [Load] (PF menu) to load the analytical conditions of the standard installation test.
If the analytical condition need to be changed for the installation test, change the
parameters after loading.
(5) Make an injection, then verify whether the data has been acquired correctly.
(6) When analysis finishes, press [Unload] (PF menu) to return the analytical conditions to
their former status.

GC-2010 Plus 195

1414.6
14 Diagnosis
. Peak Generator
14.6

Select “6. PEAK GENERATOR” to generate electronic peaks to confirm of the operation of the
data processing unit.

14.6.1 Screen description

Select “6. PEAK GENERATOR” from the [DIAG] key screen to display the Peak generator
screen shown in Fig. 14.6.1.

Fig. 14.6.1 Peak generator setup screen

14.6.2 Parameter list

PEAK GENERATOR
Range: On/Off, Default: Off
MODE
Range: Noise/No Noise/Trunc, Default: Noise
Ch1−Ch4 STANDARD SIGNAL
Range: On/Off, Default: Off

14.6.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Specify the parameters (retention time, full width at half height and peak
Peak Info ――
height) of the peaks to be generated.

196 GC-2010 Plus

1515.1
15 Optional Devices
. Auto Injector Parameters
15.1

From the gas chromatograph, specify the parameters of the Shimadzu AOC-20i Auto Injector and the
AOC-20s Auto Sampler Carousel, which automatically inject liquid samples into the gas chromatograph.
For detailed setting procedures, refer to the User's Manual for AOC-20 and the User’s Manual for
AOC-20 Dual Injection System.

15.1.1 Screen description

After installing the auto injector on the gas chromatograph, access the line configuration
screen from the [SET] key, and then select AOC1 for the analytical line (select AOC2 in addi-
tion, for the analytical line for dual injection systems.)
Press the [OPTION] key again or press [Next] (PF menu) several times on the [OPTION] key
screen to display the AOC parameter screen shown in Fig. 15.1.1. The screen toggles
among the AOC parameters → AUX temperature → AUX APC → CRG screens.

The AOC status is displayed.

Fig. 15.1.1 AOC setup screen

■ AOC STATUS
The AOC status can be monitored.
Screen display Description
Inactive AOC is not operating.
Taking vial A vial is being picked up from the tray.
Preparation AOC is operating (before injection).
Rinse AOC is operating (after injection).
Putting vial A vial is being returned to the tray.
Wait AOC is waiting for analysis.

GC-2010 Plus 197

 15 Optional Devices
15.1 Auto Injector Parameters

15.1.2 Parameter list

SAMPLE WASH
Range: 0−99, Default: 2
Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with sample before injection.
NUMBER OF INJECTION
Range: 0−99, Default: 1
Set the number of times the sample should be injected.
SAMPLE SIZE
Range: 0.1−8.0 µl, Default: 1.0 µl
Set the sample injection amount.
PRE SOLVENT WASH
Range: 0−99, Default: 0
Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with solvent before injection.
This item is valid only when the injection mode is set to “0 (normal)”.
Refer to “3.3.3 Injection Modes” in AOC-20 instruction manual for more information of the
injection mode.
SOLVENT WASH
Range: 0−99, Default: 1
Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with solvent after injection.
PUMPING
Range: 0−99, Default: 5
Set the number of times to raise and lower the plunger with the needle tip inside the sample
to eleminate syringe air bubbles.
VISCOSITY
Range: 0.0−99.9 sec, Default: 0.2 sec
During rinsing with sample and pumping, the plunger waits for the specified period of time.
When aspirating sample before injection, the plunger waits for either the valve set here or 4
seconds, which ever is longer.
The wait time during rinsing with solvent is always 0.2 seconds.
DWELL TIME
Range: 0.0−99.9 sec, Default: 0.0 sec
Set the length of time for the syringe to remain in the injection port after injection.
INJ. SPEED (PLUNGER)
Selecton: Slow/Middle/Fast, Default: Fast
Specifies the plunger speed during injection.
USE THE SAME PARAM
Selection: Yes/No, Default: No
This item is displayed on the main parameter setup screen when a dual injector is used.
Select “Yes” to operate the sub AOC with same parameters as those of the main AOC.
AOC POWER
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
Turns the AOC power on and off (built-in GC-2010 Plus power supply).

198 GC-2010 Plus

 15 Optional Devices
15.1 Auto Injector Parameters

15.1.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Start Starts AOC gas chromatograph starts when the sample is injected. ――
Temporarily stops the AOC.
Stop If [Start] (PF menu) is pressed in stop status, the AOC resumes the opera- ――
tion before [Stop] (PF menu) was pressed.
Priority Sets up a Priority analysis. 15.1.4
Other Para Sets AOC options and customization. 15.1.7
Sampler Sets the auto sampler, sub injector and bar code reader. 15.1.10
Reset Resets AOC to the status before control was started. ――
Loads parameters from the AOC to the AOC setup screen of the gas
Upload ――
chromatograph.
Toggles between the main AOC setup screen and the sub AOC setup
screen.
Main/Sub ――
Available only when an AOC 1 and AOC 2 are configured in the analytical
line and sub AOC is set to “Use” in [Sampler] (PF menu).
Print Prints the parameters on the Chromatopac. ――

Next Toggles amoung these screens, in order: AOC parameters → AUX tem- ――
perature → AUX APC → CRG.

GC-2010 Plus 199

 15 Optional Devices
15.1 Auto Injector Parameters

15.1.4 AOC priority analysis

Select [Priority] (PF menu) from the AOC main screen to display the AOC priority sample
screen shown in Fig. 15.1.2.
The batch can only be interrupted when the AOC is operating.
Enter the sample injection No., and press [Set] (PF menu).

Fig. 15.1.2 Priority analysis setup screen

15.1.5 Parameter list

INJECTION SAMPLE
INJECTION SAMPLE NUMBER

NOTE Enter the sample vial No. designated for priority analysis.
・ When an auto sampler carousel is not in use,
Short rack No. 1−6
Long rack No. 1−12 (1-15 allowable, with an additional rack)
・ When an auto sampler corousel is installed, No. 1−150 (maximum; for 1.5 mL vial)
No. 1−96 (maximum; for 4.0 mL vial)

When an auto sampler carousel, the allowable vial No. range depends on the vial rack type
and the number of racks. A valve of 0 (default) indicates no priority sample.

200 GC-2010 Plus

 15 Optional Devices
15.1 Auto Injector Parameters

15.1.6 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Analyzes the vial No. specified after the analysis of the current sample is
Set ――
finished.

15.1.7 Other AOC parameters

Select [OtherPara] (PF menu) from the AOC main screen to display the other parameters
screen shown in Fig. 15.1.3.
Specify options and AOC custom parameters.

Fig. 15.1.3 Additional AOC parameter setup

GC-2010 Plus 201

 15 Optional Devices
15.1 Auto Injector Parameters

15.1.8 Other AOC Parameter

INJ. SPEED (SYRINGE)
Selection: Slow/Fast, Default: Fast
Set the syringe injection speed.
USING 3 SOLVENT VIALS
Selection: Yes/No, Default: No
Specifies whether three solvent vials are present and the autosampler carousel is not in use.
This item is only available when “USE OF THE SAMPLER” in [Sampler] (PF menu) is set to
“Not Use”.
SOLVENT SELECT
Selection: All/A only/B only/C only, Default: All
This item is available when “USING 3 SOLVENT VIALS” is set to “Yes” or “USE OF THE
SAMPLER” in [Sampler] (PF menu) is set to “Use”.
All: Three solvent types are used.
For the details, refer to Fig. 3.4.1 in “3.4 Auto Sampler” in the AOC-20 User’s Manual.
AIR SUCTION
Selection: Yes/No, Default: No
Set whether or not 1 µl of air is aspirated into the siringe after aspirating sample.
This type of injection is useful for samples with a wide boiling point range， when compound
discrimination problems can occur.

CAUTION
When the column initial temperature is high or when a PEG-based,
polar column is used, the column life may be shortened by injecting
air.

PLUNGER SUCTION SPEED

Selection: Slow/Middle/Fast, Default: Fast
Set the plunger speed during sample injection.
SPEED OF PLUNGER
Selection: Slow/Middle/Fast, Default: Fast
Set the plunger speed during rinsing with sample or pumping.
SYRINGE HEIGHT ( ↑ )
Range: 0−20 mm, Default: 0 mm
Set the syringe height when it moves down to a sample vial (moves syringe up from default).
SYRINGE HEIGHT ( ↓ )
Range: 0−2 mm (1.5 ml vial)/0−10 mm (4 ml vial), Default: 0 mm
Set the syringe height when it moves down to a sample vial (moves syringe down from
default).
SYRINGE HEIGHT (INJ)
Range: 0−22 mm, Default: 0 mm
Set the syringe height when it moves down during sample injection (moves syringe up from
default).
MULTI-INJ
Range: 1−99, Default: 1
Set the number of times to inject same sample for each analysis.

202 GC-2010 Plus

 15 Optional Devices
15.1 Auto Injector Parameters

KINDS OF VIALS
Selection: 1.5 ml/4 ml, Default: 1.5 ml
Specyfy the vial type.
RACK
Selection: Short/Long, Default: Short
Set the rack type.
KINDS OF THE SYRINGE
Selection: 10 µl/50 µl/250 µl, Default: 10 µl
Set the syringe type.
SUCTION VOLUME FOR WASHING
Selection: 80 %/60 %, Default: 80 %
Set the aspiration volume during sample wash and pumping.
RACK POSITION
Range: 0−2, Default: 1
Set the auto injector position while sampler is used.

15.1.9 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Inj Mode For details, refer to “3.3.3 Injection mode” in AOC-20 User’s Manual. ――

GC-2010 Plus 203

 15 Optional Devices
15.1 Auto Injector Parameters

15.1.10 Auto-sampler carousel and other optional parameters

Select [Sampler] (PF menu) from the AOC main screen to display the sampler screen shown
in Fig. 15.1.4.
Specify the options installed on the AOC, such as sampler carousel.
When AOC1 and AOC2 are selected for the analytical line in “Line configuration” of the
[SET] key, both “USE OF THE SAMPLER” and “USE OF THE SUB AOC” are automatically
set to “Use”.

Fig. 15.1.4 Sampler carousel and other options setup

15.1.11 Parameter list

USE OF THE SAMPLER
Selection: Use/Not Use, Default: Not Use
This item automatically set to “Use” when “USE OF THE SUB AOC” is set to “Use”.
USE OF THE SUB AOC
Selection: Use/Not Use, Default: Not Use
BAR CODE READER
Selection: Use/Not Use, Default: Not Use
Select “Use” to use each optional unit.

15.1.12 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
When “Use of the Sub AOC” is set “Use”, [Alloc](PF menu) is displayed.
Alloc For details, refer to “3.4 Division of Sample” in AOC-20 Dual Injection ――
System User’s Manual.

204 GC-2010 Plus

1515.2
15 Optional Devices
. Setting AUX Temperature
15.2

Temperature controller used for parts other than the column oven, injection port, and detector
can be set.

15.2.1 Screen description

When an optional device such as heater is installed, press the [OPTION] key to display the
screen shown in Fig. 15.2.1. If a different screen appears, press the [OPTION] key again or
[NEXT] (PF menu) to display the correct screen.
The screen toggles among AOC parameters → AUX temperature → AUX APC → CRG
screens in this order.

Fig. 15.2.1 Main screen to set AUX temperature

15.2.2 Parameter list

TEMPERATURE SETTING VALUE
Range: 0.0 − 450.0 °C, Default: 25.0 °C

15.2.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Print Prints each temperature through a Chromatopac. 17.1

NEXT Toggles the screen among AOC parameters → AUX temperature → AUX ――
APC → CRG screens in this order.
On/Off Displays a sub screen to set a used unit to On. 15.2.4

GC-2010 Plus 205

 15 Optional Devices
15.2 Setting AUX Temperature

15.2.4 On/Off setting

When “On/Off” (PF menu) is pressed on the main screen to set AUX temperature, the
screen to set On/Off appears.

Fig. 15.2.2 Screen to set On/Off of AUX temperature

15.2.5 On/Off parameter list

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
Temperature is controlled when On is selected.

206 GC-2010 Plus

1515.3
15 Optional Devices
. Setting the AUX APC Parameters
15.3

The pressure, the flow rate and the gas type can be set for the AUX APC.

15.3.1 Screen description

If an AUX APC is installed, press the [OPTION] key from the [OPTION] key main screen, or
press [NEXT] (PF menu) until the AUX APC screen, show in fig. 15.3.1, appears.
The [NEXT] (PF menu) key toggles among the AOC parameters → AUX temperature → AUX
APC → CRG screens, in that order.

Fig. 15.3.1 AUX APC main screen

GC-2010 Plus 207

 15 Optional Devices
15.3 Setting the AUX APC Parameters

15.3.2 Parameter list

PRESS
Range: 0.0−400.0 kPa, Default: 100 kPa
Set the pressure when the control mode is set to “PRESS”.
FLOW RATE
Range: 0.0−1200.0 ml/min, Default: 50 ml/min
Set the flow rate when the control mode is set to “FLOW”.
CONTROL MODE
Selection: PRESS/FLOW, Default: PRESS
PRESS: Controls the system to obtain the preset pressure.
FLOW: Controls the system to obtaint the preset flow rate.

NOTE When using the AUX APC in flow mode, a restrictor is used to ensure that the actual flow rate is equal
to the set flow rate. Confirm the actual flow rate with a flow meter.

GAS TYPE
Selection: He/N2/H2/Ar, Default: He
Set the type of gas supplied to the APC. If the gas type is set incorrectly, the flow rate can
not be set as specified in “FLOW” mode. This is because a restrictor is used to calculate the
flow rate.

15.3.3 PF menu list

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Program Displays the pressure or flow rate program setup screen for the AUX APC. 15.3.4
In flow mode, the difference between the set and actual value can be elim-
Resistor inated by installing a restrictor in the flow line. On the resistor screen, enter 15.3.5
the i.d., length, and resitance of the restrictor tubing.
On/Off Set APC to be used to “On”. Default value is “On”. ――
Performs offset calibration of APC sensor to improve the reproducibility of
Offset 3.6
results.

Next Toggles among AOC parameters →AUX temperature →AUX APC → CRG ――
screens, in that order.

208 GC-2010 Plus

 15 Optional Devices
15.3 Setting the AUX APC Parameters

15.3.4 Setting a program

A pressure of flow rate program can also be created for the AUX APC. Set the control mode
to “Pressure” on the AUX APC main screen, select the desired APC, and then press [Pro-
gram] (PF menu). The APC program screen, shown in Fig .15.3.2, opens.
Similarly, a flow rate program can be creaded by selecting “FLOW” mode and pressing [Pro-
gram] (PF menu). This opens the flow rate program screen.
For the program setting procedure, refer to "12.5.5 Pressure program" and "12.5.6 Creating
a Flow rate program".

A program can contain up to

7 ramps of pressure or flow
rate increase/decrease.

Fig. 15.3.2 APC pressure program setup

GC-2010 Plus 209

 15 Optional Devices
15.3 Setting the AUX APC Parameters

15.3.5 Using restrictor tubing

Select the desired APC from the main APC screen. Then press [Resistor] (PF menu) from
the AUX APC main screen to display the restrictor tube setup screen shown in Fig.15.3.3.
The difference between set and actual flow rates can be eliminated by installing a restrictor.
Enter the restricto’s inner diameter, length, and resistance.

Fig. 15.3.3 Restrictor setup screen

NOTE If the necessary pressure to flow rate conversion information is not saved in the GC, the actual and
measured flow rate may still not be equivalent.

15.3.6 Parameter list

INNER DIAMETER
Range: 0.01−6.00 mm, Default: 0.00
LENGTH
Range: 0.1 −250.0 m, Default: 0.00
RESISTANCE
Range: 0.01−100000.0, Default: 1000.0
When the inner diameter and the length have been entered, the resistance is automatically
calculated. Alternatively, enter only the resistance.

(i.d. (mm))4
NOTE The resistance is calculated according to this formula: ×106 .
length (m)
Resistance valves greater than 105 can not be calculated.
The resistance of the restrictor should be smaller than 105, when the “CONTROL MODE” of AUX APC
is FLOW.

210 GC-2010 Plus

1515.4
15 Optional Devices
. Setting the CRG Parameters
15.4

The CRG (option) allows temperatures below room temperature to be set. The CRG can be
connected to the column oven or the INJ2.

15.4.1 Screen description

Press the [OPTION] key from the [OPTION] key main screen, or press [NEXT] (PF menu)
until the CRG screen, shown in Fig.15.4.1, appears.
The [NEXT] (PF menu) key toggles among the AOC parameters → AUX temperature →
AUX APC → CRG screens, in that order.

Fig. 15.4.1 CRG main screen

NOTE If the CRG is turned off after a negative temperature valve has been set, the temperature cannot be
achieved, and the GC cannnot become ready. When turning off the CRG, ensure that the temperature
valve is set properly.
To set the time of the CRG for the column over (COL CRG) auto off, refer to "16.6.11 Other Settings"
in "16.6 GC Configuration".

GC-2010 Plus 211

 15 Optional Devices
15.4 Setting the CRG Parameters

15.4.2 Parameter list

COLUMN OVEN
VALVE Selection: On/Off, Default: Off
CRG Selection: Use/Not Use, Default: Not Use
When the CRG is connected to the column oven, the column oven temperature
control range is extended to -99.0 − +450.0 °C.
When using the CRG, set “VALVE” to “On” and “CRG” to “Use”.
When using valve control only, set “VALVE” to “On” and set “CRG” to “Not Use”.
INJ 2
VALVE Selection: On/Off, Default: Off
CRG Selection: Use/ Not Use, Default: Not Use
When the PTV is installed on INJ2 and the CRG is connected, the injection port
temperature control range is extended to -99.0 − +450.0 °C.
When using the CRG, set “VALVE” to “On” and “CRG” to “Use”.
When using valve control only, set “VALVE” to “On” and set “CRG” to “Not Use”.

15.4.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Next Toggles among the AOC parameters → AUX temperature → AUX APC → ――
CRG screens, inthat order.

212 GC-2010 Plus

1616.1
16 Special Functions
. Time Scheduler
16.1

Use the Time scheduler to establish a weekly or daily schedule of automated GC operations.

16.1.1 Description Screen

Select “1. TIME SCHEDULER” from the [FUNC] key main screen to display the Time sched-
uler menu shown in Fig. 16.1.1.

Fig. 16.1.1 Time scheduler menu

16.1.2 Parameter list

MODE
Select whether the same schedule will be executed every day or a different schedule will be
executed on each day of the week.
EDIT
Edit the schedule.
START/STOP
Set the schedule start/stop procedure.
COPY
Copy the contents of a schedule to a specified schedule.
DELETE
Delete the contents of a specified schedule.

GC-2010 Plus 213

 16 Special Functions
16.1 Time Scheduler

16.1.3 Setting the mode

Select “1. MODE” from the time scheduler menu to display the mode setup screen shown in
Fig. 16.1.2.
When the schedule mode is set to “Number”, the same schedule is executed every day. Up
to 8 schedules can be set in this mode. Select the schedule number to be executed.
When the schedule mode is set to “Day”, a different schedule can be executed for each day
of the week. Only one schedule can be set for each day of the week in this mode.

The schedule number can

be set only when in Number
mode.

Fig. 16.1.2 Mode setup screen

NOTE When the time scheduler is operating, the mode cannot be changed.

■ Schedule number and day of the week

The table below shows the relationship between the schedule number and the day of the
week.
Mode 1 Mode 2
(schedule number) (day)
No. 0 Sun.
No. 1 Mon.
No. 2 Tue.
No. 3 Wed.
No. 4 Thu.
No. 5 Fri.
No. 6 Sat.
No. 7 ――

214 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.1 Time Scheduler

16.1.4 Editing a time schedule

Select “2. EDIT” from the time scheduler menu to display the schedule number or the day of
the week setup screen shown in Fig. 16.1.3. Before editing a schedule, select the schedule
number or the day of the week, and press [Edit] (PF menu). Then, the schedule edit screen
shown in Fig. 16.1.4 appears.
You do not have to set schedules in the order of execution time. After editing time schedules,
they are automatically sorted. More than one schedule can be set to the same time. These
schedules will be executed at the same time.

Fig. 16.1.3 Schedule number selection screen Fig. 16.1.4 Schedule edit screen

16.1.5 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Creates a new time schedule. This menu does not appear when 100 lines
New 16.1.6
of the schedule is used.
Del Line Deletes a schedule line at the current cursor position.

GC-2010 Plus 215

 16 Special Functions
16.1 Time Scheduler

16.1.6 Creating a new time schedule

Select [New] (PF menu) from the time schedule screen to display the Time Schedule screen
shown in Fig. 16.1.5.
Set an item using the [△] and [▽] keys and [ENTER] key. When [Finish] (PF menu) appears
after you have set items, press [Finish] to validate the schedule. The set items will not be
updated or saved unless [Finish] is pressed.
In the upper half of the screen, the contents of the set schedule are displayed. In the lower
half of the screen, the schedule edit screen is displayed.
Up to 100 lines are available per schedule.
The schedule execution time range is from 00:00 to 23:59. The unit is 1 minute.

Fig. 16.1.5 Creating a new schedule

16.1.7 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Finish Validates and saves the time schedule. ――
Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen. ――
Moves to next item.
Next Page ――
The cursor can also be moved to next item by pressing [ENTER] key.
Cancel Cancels the time schedule currently being created. ――

216 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.1 Time Scheduler

16.1.8 Parameters available in the time scheduler

Parameter Description
Relay1
Zero Adj Turns zero adjustment for each detector on/off.
Flame Turns ignition on/off.
Detector Turns voltage feedback on/off to make current constant for
FTD
each detector.
Detector controller Turns control of each detector on/off during analysis program.
Splitter Ctrl Opens/closes splitter.
Air(value) Opens/closes air solenoid valve.
Flow
Flow controller On/Off Turns control of flow controller on/off.
controller
High press inj mode Turns high pressure injection mode on/off.
Gas saver Turns gas saver split rate function on/off for each injection port.
Temperature Turns all heated zones on/off.
Specifies the number of times the program can execute before
Time the schedule stops or switches to another file. If greater than
scheduler one, the choices are “Continuous” or “Pause at end of repeat”.
NUMBER stop For an AOC, select “Pause at end of repeat”. When
OF “Continuous” is chosen,the program executes at set intervals
Stop
TIMES continuously at set intervals.
OF RUN If another program (such as a temperature program) is running
Schedule when time schedule execution time expires, priority is given to
0-9 Load the running program. When the current program finishes, the
time schedule stops or file is changed to another file.
File load Selects the next file when switching to another file.
Starts gas chromatograph after reaching ready state, or starts it
Program
immediately.
Program Starts clean up program after reaching ready state, or starts it
Clean Up
start immediately.
Starts Pre-Run program after reaching ready state, or starts it
Pre-Run program
immediately.
GC Start/Stop Sets start/stop of gas chromatograph.
Set the parameter to input event No.
Other
(Refer to "17.4 Event No.".)

GC-2010 Plus 217

 16 Special Functions
16.1 Time Scheduler

1: “Relay” Description
Event 91,92 V91−92 Point A or B
Switch point
Relay PRG V93−94 Point A or B
On/Off point Event1−16 On or Off
Relay Blower On or Off
Cooling Fan On or Off
AC On/Off
CRG INJ On or Off
CRG Colum On or Off

Event91 and Event92: Switches A-contact and B-contact for each relay on the CPU PCB
(offered as standard).
PRG Event: Switches A-contact and B-contact for each relay on the PRG PCB (option).
Event of On/Off point: The relay contact on the PRG PCB (option) is turned on/off.
AC On/Off: The power supplied to the AC connector on the power controller PCB is turned on/off.
Blower, Cooling Fan, CRG INJ and CRG Column: Turns the power of each option on/off.

16.1.9 Changing schedule parameters

To change the contents of an existing time schedule, move the cursor using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ]
keys to select the schedule to be changed, and press the [ENTER] key.
• To change the time:
When the Time Schedule select screen appears, enter new numeric values and press the
[ENTER] key. Then press [Finish] (PF menu), if you would like to change only the time.
• To change the parameters:
Move the cursor, change the parameter, and then press [Finish] (PF menu) to complete
the change.
• To cancel any changes:
If you have changed the schedule but would like to return to the former schedule, press
[Cancel] (PF menu) before pressing [Finish] (PF menu). The schedule returns to its former
status.

218 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.1 Time Scheduler

16.1.10 Time schedule example

Example:7:00 System starts.
19:00 System stops.

・ First program Screen display

1. Time: 7:00

2. Start/stop

3. Start

・ Second program

4. Time: 19:00

5. Start/stop

6. Stop

7. Setting is completed.

GC-2010 Plus 219

 16 Special Functions
16.1 Time Scheduler

16.1.11 Starting/stopping a time schedule

Select “3. START/STOP” from the time scheduler menu when no time schedule is executing
to display the screen shown in Fig. 16.1.6.
Select “3. START/STOP” while a time schedule is executing to display the screen shown in
Fig. 16.1.7.

Fig. 16.1.6 Schedule start screen Fig. 16.1.7 Schedule stop screen

16.1.12 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Starts a time schedule.
This item is displayed when no time schedule is running.
If mode is set to “number”, the same schedule will be executed on
Start following day and beyond when schedule finishes. ――
If mode is set to “day”, the schedule for the current day is executed, and
the schedule for each day will be executed on the following day and
beyond.
Runs the selected schedule on the following day.
Next ――
If mode is set to “day”, the schedule for the next day is executed.
Stops the current schedule.
Stop ――
This item is displayed when a time schedule is running.

220 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.1 Time Scheduler

16.1.13 Copying and deleting a time schedule

Select “4. COPY” or “5. DELETE” from the time scheduler menu screen to display the time
schedule copy screen or the time schedule delete screen shown in Fig. 16.1.8 or Fig. 16.1.9.
To copy, specify the copy source schedule and the copy destination schedule, then press
[Copy] (PF menu).
To delete, specify a schedule number to be deleted, then press [Delete] (PF menu).
NOTE A currently running schedule cannot be copied or deleted.

Fig. 16.1.8 Schedule copy screen Fig. 16.1.9 Schedule delete screen

GC-2010 Plus 221

1616.2
16 Special Functions
. Batch Schedule
16.2

Use the batch schedule to continuously and automatically perform analyses.

A batch is useful for switching methods automatically during the analyses.
NOTE GCsolution uses the batch schedule function to control the GC-2010 Plus. When GCsolution is used,
do not change the settings for batch schedule.

16.2.1 Screen description

Select “2. BATCH” from the [FUNC] key screen, the Batch screen shown in Fig. 16.2.1
appears.

The AOC status is displayed.

Fig. 16.2.1 Batch schedule screen

■ AOC status
The AOC status is displayed on the Batch screen..
Screen display Description
Inactive AOC is not operating.
Taking vial Auto sampler arm is picking up a vial.
Preparation AOC is operating (before injection).
Rinse AOC is operating (after injection).
Putting vial Auto sampler arm is returning a vial to the
tray.
Wait AOC is waiting for analysis.

222 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.2 Batch Schedule

16.2.2 Parameter list

Vial Initial No. and final vial No.
Example: 1-9 (Analysis starts from vial No. 1 and ends at vial No. 9.)
GC GC method file for analyses
DP Channel No. of chromatopac and file No.
Example: 1-5 (Channel 1 and data processing file No. 5 are used.)
#INJ Number of times to inject
Mk “U” is displayed when “SAMPLE TYPE” is set to “Unknown”.
“S” is displayed when “SAMPLE TYPE” is set to “Standard”.
CMD “S” is displayed when “SLOPE TEST” is set to “On”.
“C” is displayed when “CLEAN UP” is set to “On”.

16.2.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Start Starts the batch schedule. ――
Stop Stops the batch schedule. ――
16.2.4
New Creates a new batch schedule.
16.2.7
Del line Deletes the line at the current cursor position. ――
Print Prints the schedule to a Chromatopac. ――

GC-2010 Plus 223

 16 Special Functions
16.2 Batch Schedule

16.2.4 Creating a new batch schedule (for single injector)

Select [New] (PF menu) from the batch schedule screen to display the new batch schedule
screen shown in Fig. 16.2.2.
Set an item using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys and [ENTER] key. When [Finish] (PF menu)
becomes available and the items have been set, press [Finish] to validate the schedule.
At the top of the screen, the contents of the set schedule are displayed. At the bottom of the
screen, the schedule can be edited.
Up to 100 lines are available per schedule.

Fig. 16.2.2 New batch schedule screen (for single injector)

224 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.2 Batch Schedule

16.2.5 Parameter list

START VIAL NO.
Range:1 Default: 0
FINAL VIAL NO.
Range:1 Default: 0
1: With no auto sampler
Short rack ... 1−6
Long rack ... 1−12 (1−15 allowable, with an additional rack)
With auto sampler 1−150(maximum; for 1.5 mL vial)
1−96 (maximum; for 4 mL vial)
When the auto sampler is used, the possible depends on the vial rack type and the number
of racks.
The default, “0”, indicates that the setting is not given.
SAMPLE
Inject sample
The specified sample vial No. is analysed.
Without sample
Vials are not used for samples. Instead samples are introduced from a gas sampler with a
valve.
GC FILE NO.
Range: FILE 0−9, Default: FILE0
Set the file No. of the GC method to be used.
CHANNEL NO.
Range: Ch1/Ch2, Default: Ch 1
Set the channel No. connecting the GC to the Chromatopac.
DATA PROCESSOR FILE NO.
Range: FILE 0−9, Default: FILE0
Specify a date processor (Chromatopac) date integration file.
NUMBER OF INJECTION
Range: 0−99, Default: 0
Set the number of times to inject each sample.
SAMPLE TYPE
Unknown Select this item to analyze an unknown sample.
Analyze a standard and create a calibration curve before quantifying an unknown
sample.
Standard Select this item to analyze a standard for creating a calibration curve.
SLOPE TEST
Range: On/Off, Default: Off
When “On” is selected, the slope test is performed before running the batch schedule.
CLEAN UP
Range: On/Off, Default: Off
When “On” is selected, clean up is performed before running the batch schedule.

GC-2010 Plus 225

 16 Special Functions
16.2 Batch Schedule

16.2.6 PF menu list

Reference
PF menu Description
section
Finish Validates and saves the schedule. ――
Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen. ――
Next Page Moves to setup screen for next item. ――
Cancel Cancels the schedule being created. ――

16.2.7 Creating a new batch schedule (for dual injectors)

Select [New] (PF menu) from the batch schedule screen to display the new batch schedule
screen shown in Fig. 16.2.3.
The vial set up screens are divided into main set up and sub set up screens.
Once the main injector setup is complete, the sub injector setup screen appears. On the
screen, two lines (one for the main and the other for the sub) make one schedule.
Set an item using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys and [ENTER] key. When [Finish] (PF menu)
becomes available and the items have been set, press [Finish] to validate the schedule.

The dual injector parameters

are the same as the single
injector parameters.

Fig. 16.2.3 New batch schedule screen (for dual injector)

226 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.2 Batch Schedule

16.2.8 Editing a batch schedule

To change an existing batch processing schedule, move the cursor using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ]
keys to the schedule to be edited and press the [ENTER] key. The schedule to be edited
appears on the edit screen.
To change the vial number, enter the new number from the edit screen and press the
[ENTER] key. Then press [Finish] (PFmenu).
To change the other parameters, move the cursor and make the change from the edit
screen, and then press [Finish] (PFmenu).
To cancel the edits and restore the original batch schedule, press [Cancel] (PFmenu) before
pressing [Finish](PFmenu).

GC-2010 Plus 227

 16 Special Functions
16.2 Batch Schedule

16.2.9 Batch processing Setup example

Example 1: For single AOC
Sample vials No. 1 to 3 are analyzed. The GC method file No. 2 is used. The
Chromatopac data processing file No. 0 is set to Ch 1.
A standard is injected once.
Clean up is performed, but the slope test is not performed.

Screen display

1. Start vial No.: 1

Final vial No.: 3

2. GC file No.: FILE2

3. Data processing file No.:

Ch 1, FILE0

4. Number of injections: 1
Sample type: Standard

5. Slope test: Off

Clean up: On

6. The batch is set up.

228 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.2 Batch Schedule

Example 2: For dual AOC

The main tower set up is identical to Example 1.
Sub injector settings are given below.
Vials No. 76 to 78 are analyzed. Chromatopac data processing file No. 0 is set
for the Ch 2.
A standard of known concentration is injected once.
Clean up is performed, but the slope test is not performed.

・ Sub injector settings Screen display

1. Start vial No.: 76

End vial No.: 78

2. GC file No.: FILE2

3. Data processing file No.:

Ch 2, FILE0

4. Number of injections: 1
Sample type: Standard

5. Slope test: Off

Clean up: On

6. The batch is set up.

GC-2010 Plus 229

1616.3
16 Special Functions
. Time Program
16.3

Use a time program to execute zero point adjustment and relay control during analysis.

16.3.1 Screen description

Select “3. TIME PROGRAM” from the [FUNC] key screen to display the time program
screen shown in Fig. 16.3.1.
A time program starts as soon as analysis starts.
Time programs do not need to be set up in order. After you finish editing time programs, they
are automatically sorted.
More than one step can be set for the same time. The specified actions are executed at the
same time.

Fig. 16.3.1 Time program main screen

16.3.2 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
New Creates a new time program. 16.3.3
Del Line Deletes the time program line at the current cursor position. ――
Chng Line Moves the cursor to the next line. ――
Print Prints the program to the Chromatopac. ――

230 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.3 Time Program

16.3.3 Creating a new time program

Select [New] (PF menu) from the time program screen to display the time program edit
screen shown in Fig. 16.3.2.
Set an item using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ] keys and the [ENTER] key. When [Finish] (PF menu)
becomes available and the items have been set, press [Finish] to validate the program.
At the top of the screen, the contents of the set program are displayed. At the bottom of the
screen, the program edit screen is displayed.
Up to 100 lines are available for one program.
The possible program execution time ranges from 0.00 to 9999.00 minutes.

Fig. 16.3.2 Time program edit screen

16.3.4 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Finish Validates and saves the time program. ――
Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen. ――
Next Page Moves to next item. ――
Cancel Cancels the time program being created. ――

GC-2010 Plus 231

 16 Special Functions
16.3 Time Program

16.3.5 Time Program parameters

Parameter Description
Relay1
Sets range or attenuation for the detector configured in the
Range
analytical line.
Changes the polarity between “+” and “-” for TCD configured in
Polarity
the analytical line.
Current Sets current for the detector configured in the analytical line.2
Turns on/off zero adjustment for the detector configured in the
Detector Zero Adj
analytical line.
Flame Ignites / Extinguishes the flame.
Turns on/off voltage feedback to make current constant for FTD
FTD
configured in the analytical line.
Turns on/off control of detector configured in the analytical line
Detector controller
during analysis program.
Splitter Ctrl Opens/closes splitter.
Flow Flow controller On/Off Turn carrier gas, septum purge, detector gas and APC on/off.
controller High press inj mode Turns high pressure injection mode on/off.
Gas saver Turns gas saver function on/off.
DET1, DET2, AUX3, AUX4, Use a time program to change temperature of heated zones,
Temperature
AUX5 which cannot be programmed.
Specify the number of times to execute the GC program. Then,
End of either the program stops or the next file is executed. If greater
program than 2, the choices are “continuous” or “pause at each run.” For
NUMBER an AOC, select “pause at each run” When “continuous”. is
Stop OF TIMES selected, the program executes continuously at set intervals.
OF RUN If another program (such as a temperature program) is running
0: FILE when time program execution time expires, priority is given to
0−9 Load running the program. When the current program finishes, the
time program stops or file is changed to another file.
Other Set the parameter to input event No..(Refer to "17.4 Event No.".)

1: “Relay” description
Event 91,92 V91−92 Point A or B
Switch point
Relay PRG V93−94 Point A or B
On/Off point Event 1−16 On or Off
Relay Oven Exhaust Fan On or Off
Cooling Fan On or Off
AC On/Off
CRG INJ On or Off
CRG Colum On or Off

232 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.3 Time Program

Event91 and Event92: Switches a-contact and b-contact of each relay on the CPU PCB
(standard).
Event of PRG: Switches a-contact and b-contact of each relay on the PRG PCB (option).
Event of On/Off point: Turns the relay contact on the PRG PCB (option) on/off.
AC On/Off: Turns the power supplied to the AC connector on the power controller PCB on/off.
Blower, Cooling Fan, CRG INJ and CRG Column: Turns the power of each option on/off.

2: Current range
Detector type Current
FTD 0.00−10.00 （pA）
ECD 0.00−2.00 （nA）
TCD 0−100 （mA）

16.3.6 Editing a time program

To change the contents of an existing time program, move the cursor using the [ △ ] and [ ▽ ]
keys to the program line to be edited changed and press the [ENTER] key.
To change only the time, enter the new time from the edit screen and press the [ENTER]
key. Then press [Finish] (PF menu).
To change the other parameters, move the cursor and make the changes from the edit
screen, and then press [Finish] (PF menu).
To cancel the edits and restore the original time program, press [Cancel] (PF menu) before
pressing [Finish] (PF menu).

GC-2010 Plus 233

 16 Special Functions
16.3 Time Program

16.3.7 Time program setup example

Example 1: When both positive and negative peaks appear on the chromatogram
Four minutes after the program execution starts, the polarity of the detector DET
1 (TCD) is switched from plus to minus. Two minutes later (six minutes after the
program execution starts), the polarity is switched back to plus.

・ First program Screen display

1. Time: 4.0 min

2. Detector

3. Polarity

4. DET 1

5. - (minus)

・ Second program

6. Time: 6.0 min

Steps 2−4 are repeated.

7. + (plus)

8. The time program is set up.

234 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.3 Time Program

Example 2: Two AOC analyses use File No.0, then file No.1 is used.
(The execution time is set to 30 min.)
Screen display

1. Time: 30 min

2. Stop

3. Run: 2 times

4. File 1 is loaded.

5. Pause at each run(AOC)

6. The time program is set up.

GC-2010 Plus 235

1616.4
16 Special Functions
. Pre-Run Program
16.4

The Pre-Run program controls flow controllers and relays before the analysis starts.

16.4.1 Screen description

Select “4. PRE-RUN” from the [FUNC] key screen to display the Pre-Run screen shown in
Fig. 16.4.1. A Pre-Run program is executed after the [START] key is pressed, but before an
analysis.
While the Pre-Run program is running, the elapsed time is displayed in the “Time” field on
the [MONIT] key screen.
Program steps do not need to be entered in order. After you finish editing the Pre-Run
program, programs are automatically sorted.
More than one step can be set for the same time. The specified actions are executed at the
same time.

Fig. 16.4.1 Pre-Run program main screen

16.4.2 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
New Creates a new Pre-Run program. 16.4.3
Del Line Deletes the program at the current cursor position. ――
Chng Line Changes over the screen of Pre-Run program every line. ――
Print Prints the program to the Chromatopac. ――

236 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.4 Pre-Run Program

16.4.3 Creating a new Pre-Run program

Create a Pre-Run program following the same procedure described in “16.3.3. Creating a
new time program” in “16.3 Time Program”.
The parameters are equivalent to those shown in “16.3.5. Time Program Parameters”
except for “STOP”. The “STOP” parameter is described below.
Up to 100 lines are available for the Pre-Run program.
The possible Pre-Run program execution time ranges from 0.00 to 9999.00 minutes.
Parameter Description
The AOC starts after the Pre-Run program is finished.
Auto
If no AOC is configured in the analytical line, the GC starts.
After the Pre-Run program is finished, the system becomes
Manual (Stop program)
ready.
After the Pre-Run program is finished, the GC starts.
End of
GC starts For example, select this item to activate an automated gas
program
sampler, switch the valve when the program stops.
After the Pre-Run program is finished, the AOC/HSS starts.
AOC/HSS starts
After sample is injected, GC starts.
After the Pre-Run program stops, clean up starts.
Clean up
After clean up finishes, the system becomes ready.

NOTE In the following case, “AUTO” of the “STOP” parameter is carried out when the pre-run program is fin-
ished.
• There is no “STOP” parameter in the pre-run program.
• Running the Batch Schedule.

16.4.4 Editing a Pre-Run program

To change the contents of the existing Pre-Run program, move the cursor using the [ △ ] and
[ ▽ ] keys to the program line to be edited and press the [ENTER] key.
To change only the time, enter the new time from the edit screen and press the [ENTER]
key, then press [Finish] (PF menu).
To change the other parameters, move the cursor and make the changes from the edit
screen, and then press [Finish] (PF menu).
To cancel the edits and restore the original time program, press [Cancel] (PF menu) before
pressing [Finish] (PF menu).

16.4.5 After Pre-Run program is finished

When the Pre-Run program is finished, certain events automatically return to their pre-
programs status.
These events are listed below..
Event No. Description
131−134 Turn detector controller on/off.
141−146 Turn carrier gas and septum purge on/off.
147−158 Turn detector gas on/off.
171 Turns high pressure injection on/off.
181−198 Turn AUX APC on/off.

For details about the event No., refer to "17.4 Event No."

GC-2010 Plus 237

 16 Special Functions
16.4 Pre-Run Program

16.4.6 Pre-Run Program set up example

Switches B-contact of Event 91 four minutes in to the program.
Screen display
1. Time : 4.0 min

2. Relay

3. Relay

4. Switch point

5. Event 91, 92
.

6. Event 91

7. Point B

8. Setting is completed

238 GC-2010 Plus

1616.5
16 Special Functions
. Direct Operation
16.5

16.5.1 Screen description

Select “5. DIRECT OPERATION” from the [FUNC] key screen to display the screen shown
in Fig. 16.5.1.
Input the event No. and press the [Execute] key to execute the specified event.
For a description of the event No., refer to "17.4 Event No."

Fig. 16.5.1 Direct operation setup screen

16.5.2 Parameter list

EVENT
Range: -500−+500, Default: ---
Runs the operation assigned to the event No.
Refer to "17.4 Event No."

16.5.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Runs the specified operation.
Execute ――
Input event No. to be run, and press [Execute] (PF menu).

GC-2010 Plus 239

1616.6
16 Special Functions
. GC Configuration
16.6

16.6.1 Screen description

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen to display the GC
configuration screen shown in Fig. 16.6.1.

Fig. 16.6.1 GC Configuration setup screen

16.6.2 Parameter list

DATE/TIME SETTING
Set the date and the time.
MAX. TEMPERATURE
Set the maximum temperature limit for each headed zone.
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER
Set the parameters related to transmission.
READY CHECK
Indicate the conditions, which should be satisfied in order for the system to be ready and the
STATUS light to illuminate.
SIGNAL SETTING
Set the signals which can be output from the gas chromatograph.
PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION
Customize the names of various GC items.
LINK DEVICE CODE
Set the link device code the GC is linked to a Chromatopac.

240 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

TEMPERATURE OFFSET
Set the temperature offset for each heated zone.
OTHER CONFIGURATIONS
Specify the configuration of miscellaneous setup items.

16.6.3 Setting the date and time

16.6.3.1 Screen description
Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “1.
DATE/TIME SETTING”,to display the Date/Time setting screen shown in Fig. 16.6.2.
The date and the time can be set. This setting is automatically saved, even when the
GC power is off.

The current date and time

are displayed.

Fig. 16.6.2 Date/time setup screen

16.6.3.2 Parameter list

DATE
Range: 2000.01.01−2099.12.31
TIME
Range: 00:00:00−23:59:59

GC-2010 Plus 241

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.4 Setting the maximum temperature limits

16.6.4.1 Screen description
Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “2. MAX
TEMPERATURE” to display the Max. Temperature screen shown in Fig. 16.6.3.
Set the maximum temperature limits of 8 heated zones.

Fig. 16.6.3 Maximum temperature setup screen

16.6.4.2 Parameter list

COLUMN
Range: 0.0−470.0 °C, Default: 400.0 °C
In order to protect the column, do not allow the maximum oven temperature to exceed
the maximum column temperature.
INJ1/DET1/DET2
Range: 10.0−470.0 °C, Default: 470.0 °C
INJ2
Range: 0.0−470.0 °C, Default: 470.0 °C
AUX3/AUX4/AUX5
Range: 10.0−470.0 °C, Default: 470.0 °C
AUX3, AUX4 and AUX5 need the AUX temperature control unit (P/N 221-48458-91).

16.6.4.3 PF menu list

Reference
PF menu Description
chapter
Protect Protection against contamination ――

Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes

When “Yes” is selected, the Detector temperature setting value must be bigger than the
Oven temperature setting value.

242 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.5 Setting transmission parameters

16.6.5.1 Screen description
Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “3.
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER”, to display the Transmission Parameter screen shown
in Fig.16.6.4.

Fig. 16.6.4 Transmission parameter setup screen

16.6.5.2 Parameter list

PROTOCOL
Selection: None/LEVEL1/LEVEL2/LEVEL3, Default: LEVEL2
BAUD RATE
Selection: 2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200 bps, Default: 9600 bps
Set the communication speed.
STOP BIT
Selection: 1 bit/ 2 bit, Default: 1 bit
PARITY
Selection: NONE/EVEN/ODD, Default: NONE
“STOP BIT” and “PARITY” can be set when “PROTOCOL” is set to “None” or “LEVEL1”
or “LEVEL2”.
Set to “EVEN” in case of connecting a Chromatopac.
NOTE Refer to "2.7 Connecting external device cables".

16.6.5.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Apply Down loads the parameters immediately. ――

GC-2010 Plus 243

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.6 Setting the Ready Check Parameters

The Ready Check verifies whether the preset analytical conditions have been met.
When the selected items reach the specified settings, the STATUS light illuminates in green.

16.6.6.1 Screen description

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “4.
READY CHECK”, to display the ready check screen shown in Fig.16.6.5
Set each parameter to “yes” or “no”. All parameters with “yes” must reach their initial
parameter starts in order for the GC to be ready and the STATUS light to turn green.

Fig. 16.6.5 Ready Check setup screen

16.6.6.2 Parameter list

TEMP. PORT
TEMP
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
Indicate which headed zones should be included in the ready check.
CARRIER GAS
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
Indicate which injection port carrier gas flow line should included in the check.
The displayed items depend on the injection port type.
SEPTUM PURGE
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
Indicate which injection port septum purge flow lines should included in the check.
The displayed items depend on the injection port type.
DET FLOW GAS
MAKE UP
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
HYDROGEN
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes

244 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

AIR
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
Indicate which detector APC zones should be included in the check.
The displayed items depend on the detector type.
AUX APC
APC1−APC18 PRESS/FLOW
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
This item is available only when optional APC units are installed.
DETECTOR
CONTROLLER
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
This item is available only when the FID is installed.
DRIFT
Selection: Yes/No, Default: No
This item compares the baseline drift to the drift limit for 10 minutes.
Once the GC becomes ready, the GC re-evaluates of the ready state 10 minutes later.
WAIT SIGNAL
Selection: Yes/No, Default: Yes
The wait signal applies to all detectors configured in analytical lines.
NOTE User-specified names are used in this screen.

16.6.6.3 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Drift Set the baseline drift limit. ――

GC-2010 Plus 245

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.7 Parameter Configuration

Signals are output from four gas chromatograph channels.
To assign detector channels, see "13 Detector".
This section describes the detector signal configuration as well as the configuration of
various other parameters which can be monitored on the screen.

16.6.7.1 Screen description

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “5.
SIGNAL SETTING”, to display the signal settings screen shown in Fig. 16.6.6.
This screen allows you to adjust the GC signal parameters.

Use the cursor to select the

desired channel.
Press [ENTER] to open that
channel’s setup screen.

Fig. 16.6.6 Signal setup screen

16.6.7.2 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Gain etc. Sets the signal gain and offset for each detector. 16.6.7.6
Sets the format of digital signals.
Data File When GC is linked to a personal computer, this item is automatically set to ――
“PC”. When link is ended, this item automatically reverts to “Chromatopac”.
Sets signal output channels for all detectors.
The signal out put channels can also be specified for installed detectors
which have not been configured in an analytical line.
Det Sig ――
If two or more detectors are set to one channel, data can be output to
either channel without switching the output signal cable simply by changing
the analytical line configuration.

246 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.7.3 Selecting the detector signals

Select the signal type from the main screen, and then press “DET SIG” to display the
screen shown in Fig. 16.6.7.
Select the type of signal to output. For a description of the settings, refer to "13.5 Setting
the Output Signals" in "13 Detector".

The currently set channel No.

is displayed.

When saving the background

signal, specify which signal (1
or 2) should be saved.
For background signal com-
pensation, also specify the
background signal No.(1 or 2).

For detector signal subtraction,

also specify the channels (1-4)
for the subtraction.

Fig. 16.6.7 Detector signal setup screen

16.6.7.4 Selecting the temperature signal

Select the signal type from the main screen, and then press “TEMP” to display the
screen shown in Fig. 16.6.8.
Select the temperature signal to be output.

The currently set channel

No. is displayed.

Fig. 16.6.8 Temperature control signal setup screen

GC-2010 Plus 247

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.7.5 Selecting the flow signal

Select the signal type from the main screen and then press “FLOW” to display the
screen shown in Fig. 16.6.9.
Select the flow signal to be output.
Select the carrier gas, detector gas and APC gas items. The APC gas can be set when
the APC is installed as an option in any location other than the flow controller or the
detector gas.
■ Carrier gas
If you select the carrier gas for the flow signal selection, the screen shown in Fig. 16.6.9 appears.

The currently set channel No.

is displayed.

Select an item to be output

from each area.

Fig. 16.6.9 Carrier gas signal setup screen

■ Detector gas
If you select the detector gas for the flow signal selection, the screen shown in Fig. 16.6.10
appears.

The currently set channel No.

is displayed.

Select an item to be output

from each area.

Fig. 16.6.10 Detector gas signal setup screen

248 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

■ APC gas
If you select the APC gas for the flow signal selection to display the screen shown in Fig. 16.6.11.

The currently set channel No.

is displayed.

Select an item to be output

from each area.

Fig. 16.6.11 APC gas signal setup screen

16.6.7.6 Signal offset

When you select [Gain etc.] (PF menu) from the signal setup main screen, the Gain and
offset screen shown in Fig. 16.6.12 appears. Set the offset and the the detector signal
gain here.
Select [Sig. Ch] (PF menu), to set the gain and the offset for any signal other than
defector signals (such as temperature or pressure). In addition, you can set the time
constant and the zero adjustment of the signal for each channel.

Fig. 16.6.12 Detector signal gain and offset screen

GC-2010 Plus 249

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.8 Customizing Component Names

16.6.8.1 Screen description
Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, amd then select “6.
PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION”, the Name customization screen shown in Fig.
16.6.13 appears.
Specify the names of GC components (8 characters, alphanumeric and symbols).
To customize the name, refer to "5.3.5 Changing item names" in “5.3 Basic Key
Operations”.

Fig. 16.6.13 Name setup screen

16.6.8.2 Customization example

If the “Heater Name” and “Carrier Name” are customized, the “Line Configuration”
screen changes as shown in Fig. 16.6.14.

The port name was changed

using “Carrier Name Customiz”.
There is no injection port in
INJ2, and there is only a
The INJ2 and DET1 names
carrier flow controller.
were changed from “Heater
Name Customiz”.

Fig. 16.6.14 Name customization example

250 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.8.3 Heater Name Customization

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from, the [FUNC] key screen, and then “6. PORT
NAME CUSTOMIZATION”, and finally, select “1. HEATER NAME CUSTOMIZ”, to open
the screen shown in Fig. 16.6.15.

Only listed heated zone names

can be changed.

To change the names, refer to

"5.3.5 Changing item names"
in “5.3 Basic Key Operations”.

Fig. 16.6.15 Heater port name setup screen

16.6.8.4 Carrier Name Customization

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then “6. PORT
NAME CUSTOMIZATION”, and finally select “CARRIER NAME CUSTOMIZ”, to open
the screen shown in Fig. 16.6.16.

To change the names, refer to

"5.3.5 Changing item names"
in “5.3 Basic Key Operations”.

Fig. 16.6.16 Carrier name setup screen

GC-2010 Plus 251

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.8.5 AUX APC Name Customization

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then “6. PORT
NAME CUSTOMIZATION”, and finally “AUX APC NAME CUSTOMIZ”, to open the
screen shown in Fig. 16.6.17.

Only listed APC options can

be named.

To change the names, refer to

"5.3.5 Changing item names"
in “5.3 Basic Key Operations”.

Fig. 16.6.17 AUX APC name setup screen

16.6.8.6 Relay Name Customization

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then “6. PORT
NAME CUSTOMIZATION”, and finally “RELAY NAME CUSTOMIZ”, to open the screen
shown in Fig. 16.6.18.

Only listed relays can be

named

To change the names, refer to

"5.3.5 Changing item names"
in “5.3 Basic Key Operations”.

Fig. 16.6.18 Relay name setup screen

252 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.9 Setting the link device code

When the gas chromatograph is connected to a Chromatopac, the link device code must be set.
The link device code specifies which GC channel should start when the GC [START] key is
pressed.

16.6.9.1 Screen description

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “7. LINK
DEVICE CODE”, to open the screen shown in Fig. 16.6.19.

Fig. 16.6.19 Link device code setup screen

16.6.9.2 Parameter list

CHANNEL TO START
Ch1−Ch4 Selection: On/Off, Default: On
Set “On” or “Off” for the start signal of each channel.

GC-2010 Plus 253

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.10 Temperature offset

If the actual temperature of the various heated zones (as measured by a thermometer)
differs from the temperature displayed on the GC screen, set a temperature offset value to
compensate.

16.6.10.1 Screen description

Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key and select “8. TEMPERATURE
OFFSET” to display the temperature offset screen shown in Fig. 16.6.20.

Fig. 16.6.20 Offset set up screen

16.6.10.2 Parameter list

COLUMN/INJ1/INJ2/DET1/DET2/AUX3/AUX4/AUX5
Range: -10.00−+10.00, Default: 0.00
The temperature of each heated zone can be offset, Uninstalled ports are not displayed.
For example, when “-1 °C” is obtained by subtracting the column oven temperature
measured by thermometer from the gas chromatograph value with an offset value of
“0”, input “-1” as the offset value.

254 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

16.6.11 Other Settings

16.6.11.1 Screen description
Select “6. GC CONFIGURATION” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “9.
OTHER CONFIGURATIONS” to open the configurations screen shown in Fig. 16.6.21.

Scroll Down

Fig. 16.6.21 Setup screen of other configuration

16.6.11.2 Parameter list

LANGUAGE
Selection: Alt./English, Default: English
Switch between Japanese (Alt.) and English screen languages.
BACK LIGHT AUTO OFF
Range: 0−9999 (sec)., Default: 0 (sec)
Set the period of time when the backlight LCD display automatically turns off.
PRESSURE UNIT
Selection: kPa/bar/psi., Default: kPa
Set the pressure units for display.
Range (kPa = 1) Increase quantity
kPa 1 0.1
bar 1/100 0.01
psi 1/6.895 0.1

NOTE In the case that the presssure unit of “bar” or “psi” are used, pay attention to the following.

GC-2010 Plus 255

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

• The range of the primary pressure is not displayed in the value of “bar”, “psi”. Set up it
with the value that consults the following table and transformed into “kPa”.
kPa bar psi
300 - 500 3.00 - 5.00 43.5 - 72.5
500 - 900 5.00 - 9.00 72.5 - 130.5
900 - 980 9.00 - 9.80 130.5 - 142.1

• The pressure axis on the screen after pressing [MONIT] key is displayed in the value of
“kPa” regardless of the “pressure unit” sets.
• The setting value, measured value of the primary pressure of the diagnosis result of the
standard diagnosis is displayed in the value of “kPa” regardless of the “pressure unit”
sets.
• The display, printing of each log file is displayed in the value of “kPa” regardless of the
“pressure unit” sets.
BUZZER VOLUME
Selection: Off/Low/Mid/Hig, Default: Low
BUZZER TONE
Selection: Lo/Hi, Default: Hi
Use a different tone for different GCs to be able to discern which GC has a problem.
ATMOSPHERIC COMPENSATION
Selection: On/Off, Default: Off
Select “On” to compensate for the atmospheric pressure.
ZERO TO READY
Selection: On/Off, Default: On
Set “On” for, the gas chromatograph to automatically perform zero adjustment when the
GC is ready and the STATUS light illuminate in green.
POLARITY IN READY
Selection: Open/Close, Default: Open
Set the polarity of GC ready signal.
INJ1/INJ2 PRIMARY PRESS
Selection: 300−500 kPa/500−900 kPa/900−980 kPa, Default: 500−900 kPa
Select the pressure range of the carrier gas cylinder.
Example: If the gas cylinder pressure supplied to the GC-2010 Plus is 700 kPa, select
“500−900 kPa”.
GC START
Selection: SYSTEM Key Screen/ SET Key Screen/ MONIT Key Screen/,
Default: SYSTEM Key Screen
Select the screen, which is displayed automatically after pressing the “Start GC” key
(PF1 key of the [SYSTEM] key main screen).

256 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

Gas Saver AOC link

Selection: Yes/No Default: No
This function is displayed on the screen only when the AOC is selected for the line.
This function can be used to perform batch analysis using the AOC. To enable this
function, the Gas Saver function must be set to “On”.
No: When the GC enters the READY state after the completion of analysis, the split
ratio will return from the Gas Saver split ratio to the split ratio specified on the [FLOW]
key screen (at analysis start).
Yes: The Gas Saver split ratio is retained even when the GC enters the READY state
after the completion of analysis.
The split ratio will be changed to the split ratio specified on the [FLOW] key screen when
the signal for starting the AOC is sent via the GC at a start of the next analysis. (This is
available only for batch analysis.)

NOTE • When the GC is in the READY state and the split ratio set by Gas Saver is used after the Gas Saver
AOC link function was activated, the FLOW indicator emits yellow light.
• To return the split ratio to the ratio specified on the [FLOW] key screen (at analysis start) when the
GC is in the READY state and the split ratio set by Gas Saver is used after the Gas Saver AOC link
function was activated, press [Restore] (PF menu) on the [SYSTEM] key screen.
When this function is ON, PF3, which usually serves for [Clean Up], serves for [Restore].

Gas Saver auto on (min)

Range: 0/10 - 120 (min) Default: 0 (min)
Use this function to set a period of time to return the split ratio to the Gas Saver split
ratio after the completion of analysis.
This function is displayed on the screen only when the AFC is attached to the GC.
This function is activated when the Gas Saver is set to “On.”
0 (min): When the GC enters the READY state after the completion of analysis,
the split ratio will return to the ratio specified on the [FLOW] key screen
(at analysis start). (Gas Saver split ratio will not be applied.)
10 - 120 (min): When the GC enters the READY state after the completion of analysis,
the split ratio will return from the Gas Saver split ratio to the ratio
specified on the [FLOW] key screen (at analysis start). Then, the Gas
Saver split ratio will be automatically applied after the preset time has
elapsed.
Splitless auto off (min)
Range: 0/10 - 120 (min) Default: 0 (min)
Use this function to set a period of time for the Split Vent to automatically open and
create split state after the completion of analysis.
This function is displayed on the screen only when the AFC is attached to the GC.
This function is activated when the split mode of the AFC is set to “SPLITLESS.”
0 (min): When the GC enters the READY state after the completion of analysis,
the Split Vent will close and will remain closed. (Stays ready in the
splitless state.)
10 - 120 (min): When the GC enters the READY state after the completion of analysis,
the Split Vent will close to create the splitless state. When the READY
state has lasted for the preset period of time, the Split Vent will
automatically open and will remain open.

GC-2010 Plus 257

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

COL CRG auto off (min)

Range: 0/10 - 120 (min) Default: 0 (min)
Use this function to set a period of time for the CRG valve in the column oven to be
forcibly closed after the completion of analysis.

This function is displayed on the screen only when CRG is set to “Use” in the Column
Oven section on the CRG screen which can be accessed by pressing the [OPTION] key.
This function is activated when both the CRG is set to “Use” and the valve is set to “On”
on the CRG screen.
0 (min): CRG valve control will continue after the GC enters the READY state
after the completion of analysis in order to maintain the initial
temperature.
10 - 120 (min): After the GC enters the READY state after the completion of analysis,
the CRG valve in the Column Oven will be forcibly closed when the
preset time has elapsed so that the consumption of coolant is reduced.
NOTE • The following three functions are designed to be activated after the completion of analysis and
remain disabled before performing analysis:
“Gas Saver auto on (min),” “Splitless auto off (min),” and “COL CRG auto off (min)”
For instance, even when the time for the “COL CRG auto off (min)” is set, the CRG valve in the
Column Oven will not be forcibly closed before analysis.
• The FLOW indicator emits yellow light when the split ratio specified by Gas Saver is used for control
after the “Gas Saver auto on (min)” function is activated or when the split vent remains open after the
“Splitless auto off (min)” function is activated.
• The TEMP indicator emits yellow light when the CRG valve in the Column Oven is forcibly closed
after the “COL CRG auto off (min)” function is activated.
• To return to the state where the next analysis can be started when either “Gas Saver auto on (min),”
“Splitless auto off (min),” or “COL CRG auto off (min)” is running, press [Restore] (PF menu) on the
[SYSTEM] key screen. (When any of these functions are running, PF3, which usually serves for
[Clean Up], serves for [Restore].) [Restore] needs to be pressed to start analysis.
The GC will automatically exit these functions once a batch analysis starts. In such a case, however,
analysis may start in a state where the temperature or the flow controller is not sufficiently stable.
It is recommended to manually restore the GC and confirm that the GC is in a stable state before
starting batch analysis.

Fan Stop Temp.

Selection: ALL/COL Default: COL
Use this function to set the turn-off conditions for the Oven Fan when the temperature
control function is set to off.
COL: The Oven Fan will be turned off when the column oven temperature drops below
50 °C.
ALL: The Oven Fan will be turned off when both the column oven temperature drops
below 50 °C and the temperature of heater ports such as the detector or sample
injection port drops below 100 °C.

258 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.6 GC Configuration

AFC for HSS

Selection: NON/ SLOT1/ SLOT2/ SLOT3/ SLOT4/
SLOT5/ SLOT6 Default: NON
Set the slot number on which the AFC for carrier gas of Headspace Sampler is installed.
This function is displayed on the screen when AFC is installed on the GC.

APC for HSS 1

Selection: NON/ SLOT1-1(A)/ SLOT1-2(B)/ SLOT1-3(C)/
SLOT2-1(A)/ SLOT2-2(B)/ SLOT2-3(C)/
SLOT3-1(A)/ SLOT3-2(B)/ SLOT3-3(C)/
SLOT4-1(A)/ SLOT4-2(B)/ SLOT4-3(C)/
SLOT5-1(A)/ SLOT5-2(B)/ SLOT5-3(C)/
SLOT6-1(A)/ SLOT6-2(B)/ SLOT6-3(C) Default: NON
Set the slot number and the channel number on which the AUX-APC for the pressurized
gas of Headspace Sampler is installed. This function is displayed on the screen when
the AUX-APC is installed on the GC.

APC for HSS 2

Selection: NON/ SLOT1-1(A)/ SLOT1-2(B)/ SLOT1-3(C)/
SLOT2-1(A)/ SLOT2-2(B)/ SLOT2-3(C)/
SLOT3-1(A)/ SLOT3-2(B)/ SLOT3-3(C)/
SLOT4-1(A)/ SLOT4-2(B)/ SLOT4-3(C)/
SLOT5-1(A)/ SLOT5-2(B)/ SLOT5-3(C)/
SLOT6-1(A)/ SLOT6-2(B)/ SLOT6-3(C) Default: NON
Set the slot number and the channel number on which the AUX-APC for the purge gas
of Headspace Sampler is installed. This function is displayed on the screen when the
AUX-APC is installed on the GC.

NOTE • “AFC for HSS”, “APC for HSS 1” and “APC HSS 2” are functions for Headspace Sampler HS-20.
• The following is the notation of APC slot and channel.
SLOTx-y(z)
x: SLOT number on which the AUX-APC is installed. 1 to 6.
y: Channel number of the AUX-APC gas inlet. 1: Top channel
2: Middle channel
3: Lowest channel
z: Suffix which is corresponded a channel number of the AUX-APC. A: Channel No.1
B: Channel No.2
C: Channel No.3

GC-2010 Plus 259

1616.7
16 Special Functions
. Service and Maintenance
16.7

16.7.1 Screen description

Select “7. SERVICE/MAINTENANCE” from the [FUNC] key screen to display the Service/
Maintenance screen shown in Fig. 16.7.1.

Fig. 16.7.1 Service/maintenance menu screen

16.7.2 Parameter list

INSTALLATION (POSITION)
Specify the heated zone locations for installed components.
INSTALLATION (PIPING)
Set the installation status of the carrier gas and the detector gas flow controllers.
INITIALIZE
Initialize the RAM, configuration, and installation settings.
POWER CONSUMPTION
Displays the power consumption of all heated zones.
SERVICE
Reserved for the use of shimadzu service personnel during maintenance or inspections.

260 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.7 Service and Maintenance

16.7.3 INSTALLATION (POSITION)

16.7.3.1 Screen Description
Select “7. SERVICE/MAINTENANCE” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “1.
INSTALLATION (POSITION)”, to open the GC installation screen shown in Fig. 16.7.2
appears.
After installing injection ports and detectors, specify the location of installed components
by entering the headed zone number while. referring to Fig. 16.7.3.
The head zone number of the TCD pre-heater (PRE-TCD) is “0”.

The component type of installed Enter the heated zone number

injectors and detectors is to specify the unit installation
automatically determined. position in a number. (Refer
to Fig. 16.7.3.)

Fig. 16.7.2 GC installation setup screen

GC-2010 Plus 261

 16 Special Functions
16.7 Service and Maintenance

16.7.3.2 Parameter list

INSTALLATION POSITION
Range: 0−9, Default: 0
Specify the component installation location by entering a numeric value from 1 to 8 as
shown in Fig. 16.7.3.
Set “0” when a unit is not installed. (or TCD pre-heater)
Set “9” when a unit is installed in a position not shown in Fig. 16.7.3.

8 4

7 3

6 2

5 1

Top view

Fig. 16.7.3 Component installation location

NOTE Changes are not in effect until the GC has been turned off and on.

262 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.7 Service and Maintenance

16.7.4 INSTALLATION (PIPING)

16.7.4.1 Screen description
Select “7. SERVICE/MAINTENANCE” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “2.
INSTALLATION (PIPING)”, to open the Installation (Piping) Screen shown in Fig.
16.7.4.
In the carrier gas, flow controller fields, specify where the temperature control port of the
injection unit is connected.
In the detector gas flow controller fields, specify the slot number of flow control unit and
the temperature control port of the detector unit.

Carrier gas Detector gas

flow controller flow controller
settings settings

Fig. 16.7.4 Installation status setup screen Fig. 16.7.5 Installation status setup screen
(continued)

16.7.4.2 Parameter list

■ Carrier gas flow controller settings
The names CAR1, CAR2 and CAR3 are automatically assigned in ascending order of the
slot No. for each installed AFC.
Specify the flow controller carrier gas settings for each CAR.
UNIT TYPE
For, display only.
When an AFC is installed, this is automatically displayed.
If a manual flow controller is installed, specify the installation Slot No. (See below.)
“SPLITTER” is automatically displayed for the Unit Type.
SLOT NO.
Selection: NON/SLOT1/ SLOT3/SLOT5/ SLOT6, Default: NON
This item can be set only when a manual flow controller is installed.
Select the Slot No. where the manual flow controller is installed.
Slot No. which have already been set cannot be selected.
The slot No. of an installed AFC is automatically recognized and displayed.

GC-2010 Plus 263

 16 Special Functions
16.7 Service and Maintenance

TEMP. PORT
Selection: NON/INJ1/ INJ2/DET1/DET2/AUX3/AUX4/AUX5, Default: NON
Specify the injection port heated zone where the flow controller tubing is connected.
This assosiates the flow controller to an injection port.
■ Detector gas flow controller settings
When installing detector flow control units, the names DET#1 to DET#4 are
automatically assigned starting with the one nearest to the GC.
Specify the to flow controller detector gas settings for each detector No. (DET#1 to
DET#4).
CONT. TYPE
For display only.
The type of each installed detector control unit is automatically recognized and displayed.
DET APC No.
For display only.
When the slot No. is selected for each installed detector gas flow controller, the name
DET APC 1 to DET APC 4 is automatically assigned to each flow controller.
UNIT TYPE
When an APC is installed, the APC type is displayed for the Slot No. selected.
“APC (1ch)” indicates an APC for ECD/TCD. “APC (2ch)” indicates an APC for FPD.
“APC (3ch)” indicates an APC for FID/FTD.
When manual flow controllers are selected for the SLOT No, “DET GAS” is
automatically displayed.
SLOT NO.
Selection: NON/SLOT1/ SLOT2/SLOT3/ SLOT4/SLOT5/ SLOT6/SLOT7/ SLOT8,
Default: NON
When a manual flow controller is installed, specify the installation location Slot No.
(SLOT1, SLOT3, SLOT5 and SLOT7 are available).
When a APC is installed, select an available Slot No..
Slot No. which have already been set cannot be selected.
HEATER PORT
Specify the detector heated zone where the flows controller tubing is connected.
This assosiates the flow controller to a detector.
TCD has two heated zones. (Upper row: PRE-TCD, Lower row: TCD)

NOTE Changes are not in effect until the GC has been turned off and on.

264 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.7 Service and Maintenance

16.7.5 INITIALIZATION
16.7.5.1 Screen description
Select “7. SERVICE/MAINTENANCE” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “3.
INITIALIZE”, to display the Initialization screen shown in Fig. 16.7.6.
When you move the arrow cursor and press the [ENTER] key, the initialization
confirmation screen (Fig. 16.7.7) appears. On this screen, press the [INIT] (PF menu)
key to initialize the selected item.

Fig. 16.7.6 Initialization menu screen Fig. 16.7.7 Initialization confirmation screen

16.7.5.2 Parameter list

INITIALIZE CONFIGURATION
This item initializes configuration settings such as heated zone temperature limits and
ready check parameters. However the column temperature limit is saved in the analysis
file and is not reset. Analysis files 0−9 cannot be initializend.
INITIALIZE INSTALLATION
This item initializes the installation settings of injection ports, flow controllers, etc.
INITIALIZE RAM
This item initializes the RAM, erasing all data, including analysis files 0−9, configuration
and installation settings.
Initialize the RAM when there is a RAM problem.
INITIALIZE ALL
This item initializes all settings including.
Analysis files 0−9

GC-2010 Plus 265

 16 Special Functions
16.7 Service and Maintenance

16.7.6 Power consumption

16.7.6.1 Screen description
Select “7. SERVICE/MAINTENANCE” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “4.
POWER CONSUMPTION”, to open the Power consumption screen shown in Fig
16.7.8.

Fig. 16.7.8 Power consumption monitoring screen

16.7.6.2 Parameter list

APPROX. POWER CONSUMPTION
The calculated total power consumption of all heated zones is displayed.

266 GC-2010 Plus

1616.8
16 Special Functions
. Stopwatch
16.8

16.8.1 Screen description

Select “8. STOP WATCH” from the [FUNC] key screen to display the stopwatch screen
shown in Fig. 16.8.1.
The stopwatch can display elapsed time up to 99 : 99 : 99.9 in units of 0.1 second. When the
counted time exceeds 99 : 99 : 99.9, the stopwatch is reset and the time restants at 0.0
seconds.
The stopwatch can function even when other keys are pressed. However, once the stop key
is pressed, the stopwatch is reset to 0.0 seconds if another key is pressed.

Fig. 16.8.1 Stop watch screen

16.8.2 PF menu
Reference
PF menu Description
section
Start Starts timing. ――
If “Start” is pressed again when the timing has stopped, the stopwatch is
reset to 0.0 seconds.
Stop Stops counting. ――

16.8.3 Timing with inverse measurement

When using a bubble film flow meter of V ml, obtain the flow rate using the inverse number.
V x (Inverse number of measurement time) ml/min

GC-2010 Plus 267

1616.9
16 Special Functions
. Key Lock and Parameter Lock
16.9

16.9.1 Screen description

Select “9. LOCK” from the [FUNC] key screen to display the Lock screen shown in Fig.
16.9.1.
If either key lock or parameter lock has already been activated, the Unlock screen appeares
instead.

Fig. 16.9.1 Lock menu screen

268 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock

16.9.2 Key locking

Select “9. LOCK” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “1. KEY LOCKING” to display
the Key locking screen shown in Fig. 16.9.2. This screen indicates that the current status is
“not locked”.
When keys are locked, key operations are disabled. This function is useful to prevent analy-
sis mistakes because no key operation is accepted. When the keys are locked, an icon
indicating the lock state is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen.
When the keys are locked, analyses can still be started and stopped, and parameters can be
monitored.

Fig. 16.9.2 Key Locking main screen

■ Unlocking keys
Press the [FUNC] key when the keys are locked, to open the screen shown in Fig. 16.9.3.
Once the keys are unlocked, the screen shown in Fig. 16.9.1 appears.

This screen is displayed when

the current status is “locked”.

Fig. 16.9.3 Key unlock screen

GC-2010 Plus 269

 16 Special Functions
16.9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock

16.9.3 Parameter locking

Select “9. LOCK” from the [FUNC] key screen, and then select “2. PARAMETER LOCKING”
to display the screen shown in Fig. 16.9.4.
The parameter lock function prevents unauthorized parameter changes (for analytical
conditions such as temperature, pressure and flow rate). Setup values can be monitored,
but cannot be changed.

When the password is to

be required, set “USE
PASSWORD” to “USE”,
enter a password, then
press [Lock] (PF menu).

The parameter lock function

is also available without
password.

Press [Password] (PF menu)

to display the password
setup screen.

Fig. 16.9.4 Parameter locking main screen

270 GC-2010 Plus

 16 Special Functions
16.9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock

■ Setting a password
Select [Password] (PF menu) from the screen shown in Fig. 16.9.4 to display the password
screen shown in Fig. 16.9.5. The password is a number ranging from 1 to 9999. The factory
set password is “2010”.
＜ Setting a password ＞
Enter each requierd password, and press [Set] (PF menu).
Enter the new password twice to confirm it.

Fig. 16.9.5 Password setup screen

NOTE If the “Old Password” or “Confirm new password” is incorrect, an error message appears.
Confirm the password to be input, entering it correctly.

NOTE Only the system supervisor should have password access. Change the factory-set password promptly.
Do not forget your password, and keep it secure.

GC-2010 Plus 271

 16 Special Functions
16.9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock

■ Unlocking the parameters (without password)

If parameters are locked and no password is required, when you select “9. LOCK” from the
[FUNC] key screen, the screen shown in Fig. 16.9.6 appears.
When the parameter are unlocked, the screen shown in Fig. 16.9.4 appears.

This screen is displayed

when parameters are locked.

Fig. 16.9.6 Parameter unlock screen (without password)

■ Unlocking parameters (with password)

If parameters are locked and a password is set, when you select “9. LOCK” from the
[FUNC] key screen, the screen shown in Fig. 16.9.7 appears.
When you input the correct password and press the [Unlock] (PF menu) key, the parameters
are unlocked and the screen shown in Fig. 16.9.4 appears.

This screen is displayed

when parameters are locked.

Fig. 16.9.7 Parameter unlock screen (when a password is set)

272 GC-2010 Plus

1616.10
16 Special Functions
. 16.10 ROM Version No.

The system ROM version No. can be displayed.

16.10.1 Screen description

Press [Version] (PF menu) from the [FUNC] key screen to display the version screen shown
in Fig. 16.10.1.

Fig. 16.10.1 ROM version No. screen

16.10.2 Parameter list

VERSION
BUILD NO.
The ROM version may be required during system maintenance.

GC-2010 Plus 273

 16 Special Functions
16.10 ROM Version No.

This page is intentionally left blank.

274 GC-2010 Plus

1717.1
17 Printing
. Printing
17.1

17.1.1 Connection to Chromatopac

Connect the gas chromatograph to the Chromatopac, then press [Print] (PF menu) from the
GC screen to print to the Chromatopac.
For the GC and Chromatopac connection, refer to "2.7 Connecting external device cables".

17.1.2 Parameters to be printed

17.1.2.1 Program
The current file program can be printed.
This includes the following screens: temperature program (COL, INJ1, INJ2), pressure
program (CAR1, CAR2, CAR3), flow rate program (CAR1, CAR2, CAR3) and split ratio
program (CAR1, CAR2.)
Press [Print] (PF menu) from any screen to print the same parameters for a saved pro-
gram.

- COLUMN OVEN TEMP PROGRAM -

RATE TEMP TIME
0 ------- 100.0 1.00
1 6.00 220.0 25.00
- INJ1 TEMP PROGRAM -
RATE TEMP TIME
0 ------- 25.0 0.00
- INJ1 PRESSURE PROGRAM -
RATE TEMP TIME
0 ------- 100.0 0.00
- INJ1 SPRIT RATIO -
TIME RATE
0 ------- -1.0
- END -

Fig. 17.1.1

GC-2010 Plus 275

 17 Printing
17.1 Printing

17.1.2.2 AOC parameters

The current file’s AOC parameters and the parameters of AOC settings can be printed.
The AOC2 parameters can be printed when an AOC2 is configured in the analytical line.
All printed items are listed by command name. To match command names to screen
items, refer to "17.2 AOC commands".

- AOC PARAMETER -
AOC1 AOC2
WRPT 2 2
WMOD 1 1
REPT 1 1
IVOL 1.0 1.0
WPRS 0 0
PUMP 5 5
WTPP 0.2 0.2
WAIT 0.0 0.0
ISPD 2 2
SSPD 1 1
SAND 0 0
SOLV 0 0
SINT 0 0
SSNO 0 0
SNO2 0 0
AAIR 0 0
USPD 2 2
DSPD 2 2
HIGH 0 0
LOWS 0 0

Fig. 17.1.2

17.1.2.3 Main parameters

Press [Print] (PF menu) from the [SET] key to print the temperature valves for all heated
zones, the CAR1/2 pressure value, and the total flow rate value from the current file.

- GC PARAMETER 0:FILE0 -
COLUMN OVEN TEMP 25.0
INJ1 TEMP 25.0
DET1 TEMP 25.0
INJ1 PRESS 100.0
INJ1 FLOW 50.0
- END -

Fig. 17.1.3

276 GC-2010 Plus

 17 Printing
17.1 Printing

17.1.2.4 Time program and Pre-Run program

The time programs and Pre-Run programs can be printed as Event No. or parameter
names. To match Event No. and parameter names to screen items, refer to "17.3
Program Parameters" and "17.4 Event No."

NOTE For all functions treated as events in the printout, the line No. is displayed as “0” regardless of the line
number.

- GC TIME PROGRAM -
TIME FUNC VALUE LINE
0.0 EVNT 91.0 0
2.0 D1RG 1.0 1
3.0 D1RG 0.0 1
200.0 STOP 1990.0 0
- END -

Fig. 17.1.4

17.1.2.5 Batch schedule

Press [Print] (PF menu) to print the bach schedule as shown below.

- GC SAMPLE SCHEDULER -
START FINAL GC-FILE DP-FILE #INJ MK COMNAD
1 5 0 Ch.1-2 1 STANDARD STEST
6 15 0 Ch.1-2 3 UNKNOWN
- END -

Fig. 17.1.5

GC-2010 Plus 277

 17 Printing
17.1 Printing

17.1.2.6 Log
From each screen of the GC operation log, the analysis log, the parameter log, the error
log and the diagnostic log, press [Print] (PF menu) to print the parameters displayed on
the screen.
For the analysis log, only the list screen is printed. The contents of the detailed analysis
screen are not printed.
For example, press [Print] (PF menu) from the error log screen, to obtain the following
printed results.
NOTE The log items are printed in chronological order, starting from the oldest.

- GC ERROT LOG -
TIME OCCURED CODE ERROR MESSAGE (VALUE)
200.05.16 14:21 [E1020] DET1 sensor down error (530.00)
200.05.16 14:27 [E0031] INJ-DET2 A/D error
200.05.16 14:27 [E0032] AUX1-AUX3 A/D error
200.05.16 14:27 [E0011] CAR1 AFC PCB error (7.00)
200.05.16 14:27 [E0030] COL A/D error
200.05.16 14:27 [E0001] DC5 V range error (8.43)
200.05.16 14:27 [E0002] DC24 V range error (20.34)
200.05.16 14:27 [E0034] Battery voltage error (0.26)
200.05.16 14:27 [E0005] Room temp range error (84.27)
200.05.16 14:27 [E1019] INJ1 sensor down error (530.00)
200.05.16 14:27 [E1018] COL sensor down error (530.00)
200.05.16 14:27 [E1020] DET1 sensor down error (530.00)
200.05.16 14:28 [E0031] INJ1-DET2 A/D error
200.05.16 14:28 [E0032] AUX1-AUX3 A/D error
200.05.16 14:28 [E0011] CAR1 AFC PCB error (7.00)

Fig. 17.1.6

17.1.2.7 Diagnosis results

Press [Print] (PF menu) from the detailed results screen of the standard diagnosis to
print a report similar to the ones shown below.
The date, the version No. and the installation status, which are not displayed on the
screen, are also printed.

- GC DIAGNOSIS REPORT -
DATE 2000.06.15 14:35
GC SERIAL NUMBER “C11123380069SM”
ROM VERSION 0.0202
DET#1 FID WIDE
DET#2 NON
DET#3 NON
DET#4 NON
CAR1 AFC+PU
CAR2 NON
CAR3 NON
DET APC 1 APC(3Ch)
DET APC 2 NON
DET APC 3 NON
DET APC 4 NON
TEST RESULT Not Good
- INJ1 Septum Counter -
Threshold 100
Count value 0
Judgement Good

Fig. 17.1.7

278 GC-2010 Plus

1717.2
17 Printing
. AOC commands
17.2

When you press [Print] from the AOC screen, all items are printed as command names. The
list below shows correspondence of command names to item names.
The setup values, such as “Fast” and “Yes/No” are printed as numbers. Correspondence of
setup values to numbers is shown in the range and default columns in the list below.

■ Command list
Command
Item Range Default
name
WRPT Sample Wash 0−99 2
WMOD Solvent Wash 0−99 1
REPT Number of Injection 1−99 1
IVOL Sample Size 0.1−8.0 1.0
WPRS Pre solvent Wash 0−99 0
PUMP Pumping 0−99 5
WTPP Viscosity 0.0−99.9 0.2
WAIT Dwell Time 0.0−99.9 0
ISPD Inj. Speed (Plunger) Slow: 0, Fast: 2 Fast: 2
SSPD Inj. Speed (Syringe) Slow: 0, Fast: 1 Fast: 1
SAND Inj. Mode 0−4 0
All: 0, only A: 1,
SOLV Solvent selection All: 0
only B: 2, only C: 3
SINT Priority Sample No. 1) 0
Injected sample No. (Only this sample is
*SSNO 1) 0
analyzed.)
*SNO2 Injected sample No. (for sub AOC) 1) 0
AAIR Air Aspiration No: 0, Yes: 1 No: 0
USPD Plunger Aspiration Speed Slow: 0, Middle : 1, Fast: 2 Fast: 2
DSPD Speed of Plunger Slow: 0, Middle : 1, Fast: 2 Fast: 2
HIGH Syringe Height ( ↑ ) 0−20 0
1.5 ml vial: 0−2
LOWS Syringe Height ( ↓ ) 0
4 ml vial: 0−10
INJH Syringe Height (Inj) 0−22 0
STRI Multi - Inj 1−99 1
Final sample No. (Samples after that are not
*FSAM 1) 0
analyzed.)
Washing with solvent before injection in
*WKEY 0, 1 0
solvent flush mode
*UVOL Aspiration volume during pumping 8 µl: 0, 6 µl: 1 8 µl: 0
SLMD Using 3 Solvent Vials No: 0, Yes: 1 No: 0
VIAL Vial size 1.5 ml: 0, 4 ml:1 1.5 ml: 0
*CKTR With/without tray check With: 0, Without: 1 Without: 0
*TANL Analysis time 0−655 0
*TSTR Analysis start time 0.0−99.9 0.0
10 µl: 0, 50 µl: 1,
LSYR Syringe Volume 10µl: 0
250 µl: 2

GC-2010 Plus 279

 17 Printing
17.2 AOC commands

Command
Item Range Default
name
SAMU Use of the sampler Not use: 0, Use: 1 Not use: 0
SUBU Use of the sub AOC Not use: 0, Use: 1 Not use: 0
BARC Bar Code Reader Not use: 0, Use: 1 Not use: 0
SPMD Distribution of sample for dual AOC 0−8 0
PAR1 Use of Same Param No: 0, Yes: 1 No: 0
*GLPM Setting of validation mode 0, 1 0
*GRPT Number of times of GLP sample discharge 1−99 50
*GVOL GLP sample discharge volume 1−80 20
Number of times of pumping after second
*GPMP 0−5 1
GLP
*ATSP Automatic stop function Off: 0, On: 1 On: 1
*ARSG Ready signal polarity Open: 0, Close: 1 Open: 0
TLET Rack Short: 0, Long: 1 Short: 0
TSEL Rack position while sampler is used 0−2 1

1): Without autosampler, short rack: 1−6

Without autosampler, long rack: 1−12 (1−15 allowable with an additional rack)
With autosampler: 1−150 (maximum; for 1.5 mL vial)
1−96 (maximum; for 4 mL vial)
When an autosampler carousel, the allowable vial No. range depend on the vial rack type and the number of
racks. A value of 0 (default) indicates no sample number to be set.

NOTE Command names marked with “ * ” cannot be set on the GC screen. Use the keys on the AOC-20i.

280 GC-2010 Plus

1717.3
17 Printing
. Program Parameters
17.3

Press [Print] (PF menu) from a time program or Pre-Run program to print the program as event
No. or parameter names.
This paragraph describes the parameter names and the display when a program stops.

■ Event No. (EVNT)

Refer to "17.4 Event No."

■ Temperature
Heated zone names from a temperature program are printed with the parameter names
shown below.
Column temperature : CITP
INJ2 : AITP (Pre-Run program only)
DET1 : DETT
DET2 : AUXT
AUX3 : TCDT
AUX4 : AX4T
AUX5 : AX5T

■ Detector range, polarity and current value

Detector range, polarity and the current value from a program are printed with the parameter
names shown below.
Range of DET #1 : D1RG
Range of DET #2 : D2RG
Range of DET #3 : D3RG
Range of DET #4 : D4RG
Polarity of DET #1 : D1PL
Polarity of DET #2 : D2PL
Polarity of DET #3 : D3PL
Polarity of DET #4 : D4PL
Current value of DET #1 : D1CR
Current value of DET #2 : D2CR
Current value of DET #3 : D3CR
Current value of DET #4 : D4CR

GC-2010 Plus 281

 17 Printing
17.3 Program Parameters

■ Time program STOP and repetitions

When a time program STOP value is specified, it is printed with the four digits described
below.

1 2 3 4

・ Digit 1] value
0: Continuous
When a program finishes, the next program automatically starts without waiting
for the start command.
1: Pause at each run (AOC)
When a program finishes, the GC waits for the start command.

・ Digit 2] and 3] valves

Number of times of run (00−99)
“00” indicates 1 repetition.
When both digits 2] and 3] are set to “0”, nothing is printed but the number of
repetition times is set to “1”.

・ Digit 4] value
File No. to switch to after repetitious run is finished (0−9)
In order to stop the program, input the current file No.

■ Pre-Run program (STRT)

Pre-Run program values are printed with numbers 0−4, described below.

0: Auto
1: Manual (Stop program)
2: GC start
3: AOC/HSS start
4: Clean up

282 GC-2010 Plus

1717.4
17 Printing
. Event No.
17.4

Many parameters are printed with event No. The list below shows the correspondence of event
No. to functions.

■ Event No. list

No. Meaning of “Event xx” (Example: Event 1) Meaning of “Event-xx” (Example: Event -1)
Reverses contact status of Events 1 to 16 and Opens contact of Events 1 to 16 and switches
0
Events 91 to 96. contact of events 91 to 96 to N/C type (normal).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
1
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
2
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
3
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
4
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
5
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
6
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
7
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
8
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
9
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
10
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
11
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
12
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
13
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
14
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
15
(option PRG). (option PRG).
Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit
16
(option PRG). (option PRG).
51 Performs zero adjustment of DET #1. Frees zero adjustment of DET #1.
52 Performs zero adjustment of DET #2. Frees zero adjustment of DET #2.
53 Performs zero adjustment of DET #3. Frees zero adjustment of DET #3.
54 Performs zero adjustment of DET #4. Frees zero adjustment of DET #4.
Turns on CAR1 gas saver. Turns off CAR1 gas saver.
61 Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis
ratio 1. parameter.

GC-2010 Plus 283

 17 Printing
17.4 Event No.

No. Meaning of “Event xx” (Example: Event 1) Meaning of “Event-xx” (Example: Event -1)
Turns on CAR1 gas saver. Turns off CAR1 gas saver.
62 Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis
ratio 2. parameter.
Turns on CAR2 gas saver. Turns off CAR2 gas saver.
63 Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis
ratio 1. parameter.
Turns on CAR2 gas saver. Turns off CAR2 gas saver.
64 Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis
ratio 2. parameter.
71 Ignites frame. Extinguishes frame.
81 Turns on feedback of FTD 1. Turns off feedback of FTD 1.
82 Turns on feedback of FTD 2. Turns off feedback of FTD 2.
83 Turns on feedback of FTD 3. Turns off feedback of FTD 3.
84 Turns on feedback of FTD 4. Turns off feedback of FTD 4.
91 N/O contact between two contacts in one circuit N/C contact between two contacts in one circuit
92 N/O contact between two contacts in one circuit N/C contact between two contacts in one circuit
N/O contact between two contacts in one circuit N/C contact between two contacts in one circuit
93
(option PRG) (option PRG)
N/O contact between two contacts in one circuit N/C contact between two contacts in one circuit
94
(option PRG) (option PRG)
103 Closes CAR1 splitter control. Opens CAR1 splitter control.
104 Closes CAR2 splitter control. Opens CAR2 splitter control.
105 Turns On AC blower. Turns Off AC blower.
106 Closes air (solenoid valve). Opens air (solenoid valve).
107 Closes air (solenoid valve). (only in 17A mode) Opens air (solenoid valve). (only in 17A mode)
109 Turns On AC CRG INJ. Turns Off AC CRG INJ.
110 Turns On AC CRG Column. Turns Off AC CRG Column.
111 Turns On AC Cooling fan. Turns Off AC Cooling fan.
131 Turns On DET #1 detector controller. Turns Off DET #1 detector controller.
132 Turns On DET #2 detector controller. Turns Off DET #2 detector controller.
133 Turns On DET #3 detector controller. Turns Off DET #3 detector controller.
134 Turns On DET #4 detector controller. Turns Off DET #4 detector controller.
141 Turns On CAR1 carrier gas. Turns Off CAR1 carrier gas.
142 Turns On CAR1 septum purge Turns Off CAR1 septum purge.
143 Turns On CAR2 carrier gas. Turns Off CAR2 carrier gas.
144 Turns On CAR2 septum purge. Turns Off CAR2 septum purge.
145 Turns On CAR3 carrier gas. Turns Off CAR3 carrier gas.
146 Turns On CAR3 septum purge. Turns Off CAR3 septum purge.
147 Turns On DET #1 makeup gas. Turns Off DET #1 makeup gas.
148 Turns On DET #1 H2. Turns Off DET #1 H2.
149 Turns On DET #1 Air. Turns Off DET #1 Air.
150 Turns On DET #2 makeup gas. Turns Off DET #2 makeup gas.
151 Turns On DET #2 H2. Turns Off DET #2 H2.
152 Turns On DET #2 Air. Turns Off DET #2 Air.
153 Turns On DET #3 makeup gas. Turns Off DET #3 makeup gas.
154 Turns On DET #3 H2. Turns Off DET #3 H2.
155 Turns On DET #3 Air. Turns Off DET #3 Air.

284 GC-2010 Plus

 17 Printing
17.4 Event No.

No. Meaning of “Event xx” (Example: Event 1) Meaning of “Event-xx” (Example: Event -1)
156 Turns On DET #4 makeup gas. Turns Off DET #4 makeup gas.
157 Turns On DET #4 H2. Turns Off DET #4 H2.
158 Turns On DET #4 Air. Turns Off DET #4 Air.
Turns On CAR1 gas saver.
Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Turns Off CAR1 gas saver.
161 ratio 1. Returns split ratio to value of analysis
When GC becomes ready, split ratio returns to parameter.
value of analysis parameter.
Turns On CAR1 gas saver.
Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Turns Off CAR1 gas saver.
162 ratio 2. Returns split ratio to value of analysis
When GC becomes ready, split ratio returns to parameter.
value of analysis parameter.
Turns On CAR2 gas saver.
Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Turns Off CAR2 gas saver.
163 ratio 1. Returns split ratio to value of analysis
When GC becomes ready, split ratio returns to parameter.
value of analysis parameter.
Turns On CAR1 gas saver.
Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Turns Off CAR2 gas saver.
164 ratio 2. Returns split ratio to value of analysis
When GC becomes ready, split ratio returns to parameter.
value of analysis parameter.
Turns Off CAR1/CAR2/CAR3 high pressure
Turns On CAR1/CAR2/CAR3 high pressure injection mode.
171
injection mode. Returns column input pressure to value of
analysis parameter.
181 Turns On APC1 flow controller. Turns Off APC1 flow controller.
182 Turns On APC2 flow controller. Turns Off APC2 flow controller.
183 Turns On APC3 flow controller. Turns Off APC3 flow controller.
184 Turns On APC4 flow controller. Turns Off APC4 flow controller.
185 Turns On APC5 flow controller. Turns Off APC5 flow controller.
186 Turns On APC6 flow controller. Turns Off APC6 flow controller.
187 Turns On APC7 flow controller. Turns Off APC7 flow controller.
188 Turns On APC8 flow controller. Turns Off APC8 flow controller.
189 Turns On APC9 flow controller. Turns Off APC9 flow controller.
190 Turns On APC10 flow controller. Turns Off APC10 flow controller.
191 Turns On APC11 flow controller. Turns Off APC11 flow controller.
192 Turns On APC12 flow controller. Turns Off APC12 flow controller.
193 Turns On APC13 flow controller. Turns Off APC13 flow controller.
194 Turns On APC14 flow controller. Turns Off APC14 flow controller.
195 Turns On APC15 flow controller. Turns Off APC15 flow controller.
196 Turns On APC16 flow controller. Turns Off APC16 flow controller.
197 Turns On APC17 flow controller. Turns Off APC17 flow controller.
198 Turns On APC18 flow controller. Turns Off APC18 flow controller.

GC-2010 Plus 285

 17 Printing
17.4 Event No.

This page is intentionally left blank.

286 GC-2010 Plus

1818.1
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Maintenance Parts
18.1

The following tables list maintenance parts and their part numbers (P/N). All parts, which are listed in
the sections from 18.1.1 to 18.1.7 are consumables.
Miscellaneous maintenance part are listed in “18.1.8 Miscellaneous.”

18.1.1 Septum
Parts name P/N Purpose
Silicon rubber septa (with 20 pcs) 201-35584 Injection port septa (Up to 350 °C)
Septa for high temperature (with 20 pcs) 221-48398-91 Injection port septa (above 350 °C)
LL long-life septa (with 20 pcs) 221-48972-91 Injection port septa (above 350 °C)
Thermogreen LB-2 (with 10 pcs) 221-35507-01 Injection port septa (Up to 350 °C)

The type of bleeding differs according to the type of septum and bleeding appears on a
chromatogram in different patterns. For high sensitivity analysis, select a septum of which
bleeding does not appear in positions that hinder the peaks of the subject compounds.

18.1.2 O-ring for glass insert

Part name P/N Purpose
Fluoride rubber O-ring (with 5 pcs) 036-11203-84 standard (Up to 450 °C)
Graphite O-ring (for splitless/WBI) (with 4 pcs) 221-47222-91 For high temperature (350 °C to 450 °C)
Graphite O-ring (for split) (with 4 pcs) 221-48393-91 For high temperature (350 °C to 450 °C)
Fluoride rubber O-ring P4 (with 5 pcs) 036-11202-84 For residual solvents analysis kit

18.1.3 Glass insert

Part name P/N Purpose
Glass insert (For split) 221-41444-01 For split injection technique
Glass insert (For splitless) 221-48335-01 For splitless injection and direct injection
technique
Deactivated glass insert (For splitless) 221-48876-03 5 pcs with deactibated wool
Glass insert (For residual solvent analy- 221-38107-01
sis kit)
Glass wool (with 2 g) 221-48600 Packed in glass insert

GC-2010 Plus 287

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.1 Maintenance Parts

18.1.4 Graphite ferrule

Part name P/N Purpose
Graphite ferrule G0.5 (with 10 pcs) 221-32126-05 Capillary column installation
(less than 0.5 mm o.d.)
Graphite ferrule G0.8 (with 10 pcs) 221-32126-08 Wide bore carillary column installation
(0.5 mm to 0.8 mm o.d.)

18.1.5 Capillary column

To select a capillary column, refer to a column manufactuer’s catarog.

18.1.6 Flow controller

Part name P/N Purpose
Molecular sieve filter 221-34121-94 For removing contamination in carrier
gas
Trap (SPLIT) 221-42559-92 Split flow line trap
Trap (PURGE) 221-42559-92 Septum purge flow line trap
Aluminum gaskets 201-35183 For tubing connections

18.1.7 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

Part name P/N Purpose
Jet 221-48258-91 Standard Jet for FID, 0.3 mm inner
diameter
Jet, φ0.8 221-49373-91 For water analysis, 0.8 mm inner diameter
FID Collector 221-72322-91
Igniter 221-41847-93 Igniter for FID

18.1.8 Miscellaneous
Part Name P/N
Filter (S) 221-73354-01
Filter (P) 221-73354-02
FPD detector
Filter (Sn) 221-73354-03
Quartz cylinder 221-46552
FTD collector ASSY 221-45586-91
FTD detector
FTD-2010 collector repair kit 221-49079-91

288 GC-2010 Plus

1818.2
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Inspection and Maintenance Intervals
18.2

Periodical inspection and maintenance are required to maintain the gas chromatograph in the
good condition.
The recommended inspection interval for each part is described below. Refer to each section for
details.

18.2.1 Glass insert

Inspect the glass insert before starting a series of analysis.
Take care of dirt and silica wool position and quantity.
An inser counter feature is available in the GC.
Refer to the diagnosis item list in "14.1 Standard Diagnosis".

18.2.2 Septum
Replace the septum periodically to avoid the carrier gas leakage.
The guideline for replacement is 100 injection. (50 injections for thick needle.)
A septum counter feature is available in the GC.
Refer to diagnosis item list in "14.1 Standard Diagnosis".

18.2.3 O-ring for glass insert

Replace the O-ring when replacing the glass insert or if there is a carries gas leak.

18.2.4 Graphite ferrule

Replace the graphite ferrule if a carries gas leak is not stopped by tightening.
Replace the ferrule if it is completely compressed.

18.2.5 Capillary column

Condition the column if it has not been used for a long time, if ghost peaks are present or if
baseline noise is high.

18.2.6 Flow controller

Condition or replace the carrier gas molecular sieve filter if the baseline is unstable.
Every 6 months, check the split flow line and the septum purge flow line traps and replace
any saturated traps.

18.2.7 Hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)

Rinse or replace the igniter and the jet if ignition is not smooth, the flame often goes out
during the analysis or no peaks are obtained.

18.2.8 Cleaning the Unit

If the exterior unit surfaces become dirty, clean using a cloth with a neutral detergent.

GC-2010 Plus 289

1818.3
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Inspection and Maintenance: Septum
18.3

WARNING
Danger of burns.
Do not perform injection port maintenance until the tempelature of the
injection on port has dropped below 5 °C.

CAUTION
Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screws and nuts to
prevent them from binding.

Repeated injections can deteriorate the septum, inerfering with its sealing ability and
causing carrier gas leaks. This can cause retention time shifts and poor producibility. In
addition, septum fragments can fall into the glass insert, causing ghost peakes. Periodically
inspect and replace the septum as described in this section.

18.3.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle

The guideline for inspection/maintenance is 100 injections.
Septun replacement is recomended every 100 injections. (every 50 injections for thick nee-
dles ; ex. gas tight syringe)
In addition, perform inspection and maintenance in the following cases.
・ When the retention time/shifts/reproducibility is poor
・ When ghost peaks are detected
If ghost peaks are obtained although no septum fragments are found in the glass insert,
ensure that new septa are conditioned properly.

18.3.2 Inspection/maintenance
■ Preparing the gas chromatograph
Select “Maint INJ” (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM] key main screen.
If the system is operating, press the [SYSTEM] key and select [Maint INJ] (PF menu). The
temperature of the injection port and the column oven automatically drops, and the carrier
gas stops when the temperature drops below 51 °C.
When the message “GC is ready for maintenance” appears on the screen, injection port
inspection/maintenance can begin.
Remove the auto injector if it exists.
Lift up the entire INJ/DET cover, and remove it. Because the detector is hot when the flam is
“On”, use tweezers or pliers to handle the detector cover.

NOTE For “Maint INJ”, refer to "7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]".

290 GC-2010 Plus

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.3 Inspection and Maintenance: Septum

■ Conditioning the septum

For high sensitivity analysis, impurities from the septum may be detected as ghost peaks.
Condition the septum as described below.
(1) Soak the septum in hexane for 10 to 15 hours.
The septum will absorb hexane and swell into approximately twice its size. Therefore,
use a container with a wide opening and a lid.
(2) Take out the septum, and put it into a rinse container.
Pay strict attention when handling a septum swollen with hexane because it can easily crumble.
(3) Let the septum air dry in a clean area.
(4) After drying, bake the septum at 130 to 150 °C for approximately 2 hours.
NOTE Store the septum in a clean, sealed containes to prevent contamination.

■ Inspection
When inspecting only the septum, remove the septum nut above the septum, take out the
septum, then condition it or replace it with a new one.

Septum nut

Glass insert nut

Fig. 18.3.1
NOTE Septum nut for the SPL of the GC-2010 Plus has a “P” mark. Do not mix up the nut with the septum nut
for the WBI-2010 Plus or the injection port of the GC-2010.

Septum Nut for SPL Septum Nut for Others

Fig. 18.3.2

■ Septum installation
Install the conditioned septum or a new septum using the following procedure.
When using an autosampler, tighten the septum nut by hand until it touches the nut below
the screw, then loosen a half turn. When performing mamual injections, you can extend the
life of the septum and prevent the carrier gas leakage by tightening the septum nut by one
thread after approximately 10 injections. When the injection port is hot, the septum nut is
also hot. When tightening the septum nut, wear gloves to prevent burns.

■ Restarting the gas chromatograph main body

Using tweezers, replace the derector cover, then the INJ/DET cover.
When starting up the GC again, select [Anal.] (PF menu). The GC automatically flows the
carrier gas for 5 minutes, and then restores the temperatures set prior to maintenance.
When the STATUS indicator light turns green and the baseline becomes stable, you can start analysis.

GC-2010 Plus 291

1818.4
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Inspection and Maintenance:
18.4

O-ring for glass insert

WARNING
Danger of burns.
Do not perform injection port maintenance until the tempelature of the
injection on port has dropped below 50 °C.

CAUTION
Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screws and nuts to
prevent them from binding.

NOTE For the details on handling the glass insert and O-ring, refer to "12 Injection Port"

18.4.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle

Two types of O-rings are available for the glass insert and the fluoride rubber type is usually
used. But when the fluoride rubber type is used for long hours at the injection port tempera-
ture more than 350 °C, the time duration being leaktight is rather short so check for leakage
every week. When operating the system for long hours at more than 350 °C, the graphite
type is recommended. But the graphite type has a little less sealing effect than the fluoride
rubher type. The fluoride rubber type can be used for sevaral glass insert replacements, but
graphite type can be used only once. However, replacing the O-ring when replacing the glass
insert is recommended.
Normally, rubber O-ring is used. If the rubber O-ring is used above 350 °C for an extended
period, it deteriosates rapidly. Use a graphite ferrule on the glass insert in this case, although
its sealing ability is inferior to the rubber type. Perform inspection and maintenance of the O-
ring when the carrier gas leaks.
To stop leaks, tighten the glass insert nut. If the leak contnues, inspect the O-ring and
replace if necessary.

18.4.2 Inspection/maintenance
■ Preparing the gas chromatograph
Select “Maint INJ” (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM] key main screen.
If the system is operating, press the [SYSTEM] key and select [Maint INJ] (PF menu). The
temperature of the injection port and the column oven automatically drops, and the carrier
gas stops when the temperature drops below 51 °C.
When the message “GC is ready for maintenance” appears on the screen, injection port
inspection/maintenance can begin.
Remove the auto injection if it exists.
Lift up the entire INJ/DET cover, and remove it. Because the detector is hot, use tweezers or
pliers to handle the detector cover.

NOTE For “Maint INJ”, refer to "7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]".

292 GC-2010 Plus

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.4 Inspection and Maintenance: O-ring for glass insert

CAUTION
Handle graphite O-rings with care to prevent it from breaking.

■ Replacing the O-ring

Take out the glass insert, remove the O-ring, and install a new O-ring.
NOTE Refer to "18.5 Inspection and Maintenance: Glass Insert" to remove and install the glass insert.

(1) Fluoride rubber O-ring

Place the fluoride rubber O-ring approximately 4 mm from the top of the glass insert.
When inserting the glass insert in the injection port, push the glass insert in until the
glass insert touches the bottom of the injection port. This correctly places the O-ring
3 mm from the top of the glass insert.

3 mm

O-ring

For split analysis For splitless/WBI analysis

Fig. 18.4.1 Attaching graphite and fluoride rubber O-ring

(2) Graphite O-ring

Insert the glass insert without O-ring in the injection port, place a graphite O-ring on it,
and then tighten the glass insert nut.
NOTE Use the correct graphite O-ring for the glass insert type.

GC-2010 Plus 293

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.4 Inspection and Maintenance: O-ring for glass insert

■ Leak check
A leak will affect reproduceability and carrier gas will be wasted.

Confirm whether there is a leak or not according to the following procedure:

(As for the following procedure, there could be cases in which the error message “purge
leaks” etc. appears. However, it does not matter to the test. Then, select “Reset Error”.)
(1) Set the “Flow Control” to “Cont” on the screen after pressing [SYSTEM] key.
(2) Push the [Stop GC] (PF menu), and the system stops.
(3) Wait that all oven temperature, injection port temperature and detector temperature is
below 40 degrees on the screen after pressing the [MONIT] key.
(4) Push the [On/Off] (PF menu) on the screen after pressing the [FLOW] key, and the
control of AFC stops.
Set the purge flow rate to “0 ml/min".
(5) Remove the capillary column, and blank off with a column nut and the graphite ferrules
with a wire.
(6) Install the blind (G-type blank nut) to the split vent and purge vent port.
(7) Make sure that the supply pressure to the carrier gas (the pressure from a gas cylinder)
is above 300 kPa.
(8) Set the “Split mode” to “DIRECT” and “Control mode” to “PRESS” on the screen of the
after pressing the [FLOW] key.
(9) Set the inlet pressure to 150 kPa. Push the [On/Off] (PF menu), and the control of AFC
starts.
(10) Wait for five minutes. Confirm that the inlet pressure is 125 ~ 175 kPa. If the inlet
pressure is above 175 kPa, unfasten the column a little nut and set the pressure free.
If the inlet pressure is below 125 kPa, raise the supply pressure a little.
(11) Confirm that the total flow is below 2 ml/min. If the total flow is above 2 ml/min, then
there is a leak somewhere.
(12) Push the [On/Off] (PF menu) on the screen of the [FLOW] key, and the control of AFC
starts.
(13) In case of fluoride rubber O-ring, confirm that the pressure does not drop more than 15
kPa per hour or 2.5 kPa in 10 minutes.
In case of graphite O-ring, confirm that the pressure does not drop more than 21 kPa
per hour or 3.5 kPa in 10 minutes.
If the pressure has dropped more than the above specified values, there is a leak
somewhere.
(14) When the leak check has passed set the system back into operating status.

■ Possible leak positions

In case the leak check conditions has failed check the following items on the GC for possible
leaks:
septum injection inlet, around the injection port, the connection of piping, split vent (around
the blind plug), purge vent (around the blind plug) and the connection of column with a leak
detector or snoop.
In case you have localized a leak in one of the above positions do the following according to
the leak localization:

• Septum injection inlet : replace septum.

• Around the injection port : replace O-ring of glass insert.
• Split vent : replace blind plug seal.
• Purge bent : replace blind plug seal.
• Connection of column : replace graphite ferrules and column nut.

294 GC-2010 Plus

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.4 Inspection and Maintenance: O-ring for glass insert

CAUTION
Do not use the leak detecting fluid nor soapy water for gas leak check
on the connections above the carrier and detector gas controllers
(AFC/APC).
The drips may damage the controller.

NOTE When you use snoop liquid etc., take care that the liquid is not splashed to the electric wiring and
detector. There is a risk to get an electrical shock.
When using snoop liquid for detecting leaks there is always a possibility that a part of the liquid
creeps into the pipings which in case of trace analysis can give ghost peaks which may interfere your
peaks of interest. Then it is recommended to use a leak detector instead.

GC-2010 Plus 295

1818.5
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Inspection and Maintenance: Glass Insert
18.5

WARNING
Danger of burns.
Do not perform injection port maintenance until the tempelature of the
injection on port has dropped below 50 °C.

CAUTION
Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screws and nuts to
prevent them from binding.

NOTE For the details of handling of the glass insert, refer to "12 Injection Port".

18.5.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle

Inspect the glass insert before starting a series of analysis.
In addition, inspect and maintain the glass insert if the following problems occur.
・ If the retention time shifts or reproducibility is poor.
・ If ghost peaks are detected.
When the problems above occur, the silica wool may have moved, or become dirty, or the
glass insert could be dirty.

18.5.2 Inspection/maintenance
■ Preparing the gas chromatograph
Select “Maint INJ” (PF menu) from the [SYSTEM] key main screen.
If the system is operating, press the [SYSTEM] key and select [Maint INJ] (PF menu). The
temperature of the injection port and the column oven automatically drops, and the carrier
gas stops when the temperature drops below 51 °C.
When the message “GC is ready for maintenance” appears on the screen, injection port
inspection/maintenance can begin.
Remove the auto injector if it exists
Lift up the entire INJ/DET cover, and remove it. Because the detector is hot, use tweezers or
pliers to handle the detector cover.

NOTE For “Maint INJ”, refer to "7 Starting and Stopping the GC [SYSTEM]".

■ Removing the glass insert

Remove the glass insert using the following procedure.
Loosen and remove the glass insert nut while holding the septum nut. Remove the septum
nut assenbly by lifting it straight up and moving it to the side.
The glass insert could break if the septum nut assenbly is not lifted straight up.

296 GC-2010 Plus

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.5 Inspection and Maintenance: Glass Insert

Fig. 18.5.1 Tool: Glass insert wrench, standard accessory Part No. 221-46977

Septum nut

Septum nut assembly

Glass insert nut

Top of injection port

Fig. 18.5.2

(2) Use tweezers to lift the glass insert out of the injection port.
NOTE If the O-ring has become fixed, turn the O-ring using tweezers and then lift the glass insert. Do not
forcibly lift the glass insert with the O-ring fixed because it may break the glass.

Tweezers

Glass insert
O-ring

Fig. 18.5.3

■ Cleaning the glass insert

NOTE Remove the O-ring before rising the glass insert with solvent. After cleaning, use a new O-ring.

(1) Removing the silica wool.

Septum fragments and other contaminants on the silica wool affect reproducibility.
Ghost peaks may also be present.
Push silica wool out using a thin, long wire.

GC-2010 Plus 297

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.5 Inspection and Maintenance: Glass Insert

WARNING
Use a hood when cleaning the insert with reagents like organic
solvent and acid.
Wear protective clothing, such as goggles, gloves, and a lab coat.
If reagents get on to the skin or in the eyes, flush with copious
amounts of water and consult a medical professional.

(2) Removing particles from the glass insert

After removing the silica wool, rinse the interior of the insert by wiping with gauze
soaked in solvent (such as acetone), etc. or soak the insert in organic solvent and clean
with an ultrasonic cleaning unit.
(3) If the the glass insert is extremely dirty
If particles and stains cannot be removed, soak the glass insert in an aqueous solution
of alkaline detergent for glass for approximately 1 day; rinse the insert with large
amounts of water, then, rinse it with organic solvent such as acetone, and let it air dry.
If the glass insert still cannot be cleaned, you can soak it in an aqueous solution of 1 N
nitric acid for 7 to 8 hours, then wash, rinse and air dry as described above.

■ Silica wool packing

To repack the silica wool in the glass insert, see "12.2 Glass Insert and Packing
Requirements".

298 GC-2010 Plus

1818.6
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Inspection and Maintenance: Graphite Ferrule
18.6

WARNING
Risk of burns.
Do not perform maintenance until the temperature of the injection
port, detector, and oven have doopped below 50 °C.

CAUTION
Wait until the heated zones have cooled to loosen screws and nuts to
present them from binding.

NOTE For the details on handling of the graphite ferrule, refer to "4 Installing the column".

18.6.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle

A graphite ferrule is used at both ends of the capillary column.
In the following situations, inspect or replace the graphite ferrule.
・ When a new graphite ferrule is being installed.
・ When ghost peaks are detected during temperature increase.
・ When the baseline drifts significantly during temperature increase.

18.6.2 Inspection/maintenance
■ Troubleshooting
(1) Check for carrier gas leaks
Deteriocating ferrules can cause carrier gas leaks and poor reproducibility.
Check the gap between the back ring and the side ring of the graphite ferrule. If it is in
poor condition, replace it with a new graphite ferrule.

Back ring Side ring Indicates deterioration

New graphite ferrule Graphite ferrule in poor condition

Fig. 18.6.1 Graphite ferrule

(2) Check for the source of contamination.

Ghost peaks can be caused by a poorly made column inlet connection.
Baseline drift can be caused by a poor connection at the column outlet (provided the
column has been sufficiently conditioned).
If a contaminated graphite ferrule is causing problems, condition the graphite ferrule
using the procedure described below.

GC-2010 Plus 299

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.6 Inspection and Maintenance: Graphite Ferrule

■ Preparing the gas chromatograph

If the system is operating, press the [SYSTEM] key and select [Stop GC] (PF menu). The
temperature of the injection port , the column oven and detector automatically decrease.
Press the [MONIT] key, and ensure that the temperature of the injection port, the detector
and the column oven are 50 °C or less.
Press the [FLOW] key, and select [Off] (PF menu). The injection port/detector inspection/
maintenance can begin.

■ Conditioning the graphite ferrule

If a contaminated graphite ferrule is causing problems, condition the graphite ferrule using
this procedure.
Condition the graphite ferrule just before using the system if possible. Otherwise, the ferrule
may become re-contaminated.
Hold the graphite ferrule in the blue flame of a gas burner for 1 to 2 seconds until that it
becomes red hot.

CAUTION
Do not get burned when holding the graphite ferrule.

Graphite ferrule

Fig. 18.6.2 Conditioning the graphite ferrule

300 GC-2010 Plus

1818.7
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Inspection and Maintenance: Capillary Column
18.7

WARNING
Risk of burns. Do not perform maintenance until the temperature of
the injection port, detecor, and oven have dropped below 50 °C

NOTE For the details on removing the capillary column, refer to "4 Installing the column".

18.7.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle

In the following situations, inspect and/or maintain the capillary column.
・ When using a new column or a column which has not been used for a long time
・ When ghost peaks are detected
・ When the baseline is unstable
・ When the baseline noise is high

18.7.2 Inspection/maintenance
■ Troubleshooting
Check whether the baseline is unstable or ghost peaks are present.
A contaminated column can cause an unstable baseline or ghost peaks. If these problems
occur, the column should be conditioned.

■ Preparing the gas chromatograph main body

If the system is operating, press the [SYSTEM] key and select [Stop GC] (PF menu). The
temperature of the injection port, the column oven and detector automatically decrease.
Press the [MONIT] key, and ensure that the temperature of the injection port, the detector
and the column are below 50 °C
Press the [FLOW] key, and select [Off] (PF menu). The inspection/maintenance can then
begin.
NOTE For the details on handling the capillary column, refer to "4 Installing the column".

■ Conditioning the capillary column

Condition the capillary column using the following procedure.
(1) Setting the carrier gas
To condition the column, use the an aleysis flow rate. However, reduce the split ratio to
conserve carrier gas.
(2) Setting the column oven temperature
Set the column oven to a temperature approximately 30 °C higher than the column
operating temperature during analyses.
Do not exceed the maximum column temperature limit.
(3) Setting the injection port temperature and the detector temperature
Use the same temperatures normally set for analyses.
Set the detector to a temperature approximately 30 °C higher than the column operating
temperature.

GC-2010 Plus 301

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.7 Inspection and Maintenance: Capillary Column

(4) Conditioning time

Generally condition the column for 2 to 3 hours usually.
If the column is considerably contaminated, increase the conditioning time.
The condition time should be less than 24 hours to avoid unnecessary damage to the
column.
NOTE Centain column liquid phases can be easily damaged.
Verify the maximum column temperatures limit before use and conditioning. High temperatures can
damage the column, particularly if oxygen is present in the colums. Use of an oxygen trap is
recommended.
Avoid rapid temperature increases, especially for polar columns.

302 GC-2010 Plus

1818.8
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Inspection and Maintenance: Flow Controller
18.8

Three areas in the flow controller should be inspected: the molecurar sieve filter and two traps
(PURGE and SPLIT) in case of split/speitless. And two areas should be inspected in case of WBI.

Part name Part No. Reference No.

Molecular sieve filter 221-34121-94 ❿
Trap (PURGE) 221-42559-92 ❡
Trap (SPLIT) 221-42559-92 ①

1 CARRIER PURGE 2
Carrier gas PURGE
C C P P OUT
IN
S SPLIT
OUT
SPLIT 3
Injection port

Capillary column Column oven

Fig. 18.8.1 Filter locations (split/splitless)

1 CARRIER PURGE 2
Carrier gas PURGE
C C C P P
IN OUT

Injection port

Capillary column Column oven

Fig. 18.8.2 Filter locations (WBI)

GC-2010 Plus 303

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.8 Inspection and Maintenance: Flow Controller

18.8.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle

Replace the purge and split vent traps periodically. The guideline for replacement is usually
6 months. However, when analyzing many samples whith high boiling point compounds, or
compounds which are solid at room temperature, you should replace the traps more fre-
quently.
And in the following cases, you should inspect and maintain the filter and the traps.
・ When the baseline is unstable or there is significant noise.
These problems often occur when the molecular sieve filter is saturated. Replace or
regenerate it.
・ The replacement cycle of each trap is 6 months. However, if the traps is clogged, replace
it. The following section describes how to decide that a trap is clogged.

18.8.2 Inspection/maintenance
■ Trap inspection
The procedure below describes how to inspect the trap when capillary column is used. (The
procedure for wide bore columns is described in parentheses.)
Internal diameter
Capillary column: ≦ 0.32 mm
Wide bore column: ≧ 0.45 mm
(1) Set the purge flow rate to “0”. For the procedure, refer to "12.5.8 Septum purge".
(2) Leave the column installed. (For wide bore columns, disconnect the column at the
injection port only, and attach a column nut and a graphite ferrule with a wire to the
injection port.)
(3) Set the Split mode to “SPL”.
(4) Set the column inlet pressure and the total flow rate to the following values.
Column inlet pressure (PRSS) = 0 (kPa)
Total flow rate (FLOW) = 400 (mL/min)
For details, refer to "8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management".
(5) Monitor the column inlet pressure. If the measured value is 50 kPa or more, replace the
trap (SPLIT).
(6) When replacing the split vent trap, replace the purge vent trap also.

■ Trap replacement
Perform the following procedure to replace the trap.
(1) Stop the carrier gas flow.
(2) Remove the panel from the INJ/DET unit.
(3) To prevent confusion, replace one trap at a time.
(4) Disconnect the blank nuts from a new trap.
These blank nuts are sealed the trap.
(5) Install the new trap.
The tubing codes indicate they should be used to filter the following flow lines.
S ... Split flow line
P ... Septum purge flow line
C ... Carrier gas inlet flow line

304 GC-2010 Plus

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.8 Inspection and Maintenance: Flow Controller

■ Molecular sieve filter regeneration

Regenerate the molecular sieve filter using the following procedure.
(1) Stop the carrier gas flow.
(2) Remove the panel from the INJ/DET unit.
(3) Remove the molecular sieve filter.
(4) Regenerate the molecular sieve filter under the following conditions.
Nitrogen or Helium gas flow direction ... Reverse of operation direction
Gas flow rate ... 10 to 20 mL/min
Temperature ... 300 °C
Time ... 3 to 4 hours
(5) After regeneration, immediately reinstall the molecular sieve filter into the gas
chromatograph so that it does not become contaminated.

GC-2010 Plus 305

1818.9
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. Inspection and Maintenance: FID
18.9

WARNING
Verify that the following items have been checked before starting FID
inspection/maintenance.
1.Stop the supply of hydrogen gas, and extinguish the hydrogen
flame.
2. Set the detector temperature to 50 °C or less.
3. Turn off the power of the FID.
4. Remove the capillary column from the FID.
Risk of burns. Do not perforem maintenance until the temperature
has dropped below 50 °C

CAUTION
When the FID is hot, do not loosen screws and nuts or move parts to
prevent binding.

NOTE For correct FID handling procedures, refer to "13 Detector".

18.9.1 Inspection/maintenance cycle

When the following problems occur, inspect the FID and perform maintenance if necessary.
・ When the FID cannot be ignited
・ When peaks are not detected.
・ When noise is high
・ When the peak shape is abnormal

18.9.2 Inspection/maintenance
a) Inspection and replacement of the igniter are described.

■ Troubleshooting
Check for blown filaments.
Replace the igniter with a new one, if the filament is blown.

■ Removing and installing the igniter

Loosen the igniter mounting screw shown in Fig. 18.9.1, and pull out the igniter in the
direction indicated by arrow.
When replacing the igniter, detach the cables at the connection.
Install a new igniter by connecting the cable,inserting the igniter,and tightening the screw.

306 GC-2010 Plus

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.9 Inspection and Maintenance: FID

Igniter
Igniter screw

Collector

Fig. 18.9.1

b) Replacement and inspection of the FID jet are described below.

■ Troubleshooting
(1) Checking whether the jet is clogged
If the jet is clogged, ignition may be difficult or peaks may not be detected.
If the tip of the jet is clogged, clean the jet by inserting a slender, long wire into the tip.
(2) Checking whether the jet is dirty
If the jet is dirty, noise may be significant.
If the jet is dirty, wipe off dirt with a cotton swab soaked in organic solvent (such as
acetone), etc.
(3) Checking whether the jet is damaged
If the jet is damaged, the peak shape may be abnormal.
Replace the jet.

CAUTION
The quartz FID jet can be broken easily. Treat it gently.

Fig. 18.9.2

Chack the type of Jet, because there are some different types of jet.

■ Preparing the gas chromatograph

If the system is operating, press the [SYSTEM] key and select [Stop GC] (PF menu). The
temperature of the injection port , the column oven and detector automatically decreases.
Press the [MONIT] key, and ensure that the temperature of the injection port, the detector
and the column oven has dropped below 50 °C.
Press the [FLOW] key, and select [Off] (PF menu). The inspection/maintenance can begin.

GC-2010 Plus 307

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.9 Inspection and Maintenance: FID

■ Removing the FID

Remove the FID parts using the following procedure.
(1) Removing the igniter and the FID collector
The igniter is integrated into the FID collector. Remove them together. Loosen and
remove the two collector screws. Lift the collector and its screws up at the same time.

Screws

Collector

Up

Support plate

Fig. 18.9.3 Removing igniter and FID collector

(2) Removing the FID high voltage unit

1 Lift the high voltage plate up.
2 Then pull the high voltage cable and its spring out horizontally as shown in Fig 18.9.4.

High-voltage plate
1 High-voltage cable

Fig. 18.9.4 Removing the FID high voltage unit

■ Removing the FID jet

Remove the FID jet using a hexnut screwdriver.

Fig. 18.9.5 Hexnut screwdriver (option, part No. 670-18800)

308 GC-2010 Plus

 18 Maintenance and Inspection
18.9 Inspection and Maintenance: FID

Fig. 18.9.6 Removing the FID jet

■ Installing the FID jet

Tighten the FID jet securely using a hexnut screwdriver

Hexnut screwdriver

Fix here

Jet

Fig. 18.9.7 Installing FID jet

Reinstall other parts in reverse order.

GC-2010 Plus 309

1818.10
18 Maintenance and Inspection
. 18.10 Check of Heat Leak from the GC-2010
Column Oven Door

CAUTION
If there is a gap after the column oven door is closed, heat may leak
from the oven, causing the plastic cover on the side and the plastic
bottom plate under the door to melt.
When closing the door, check that there is no dent on the door
insulation material.

If there is a dent on the insulation material of the column oven door, heat may leak from the
oven, causing the plastic cover on the side and the plastic bottom plate under the door to
melt. Do not press the insulation material with fingers.

Check the following items when closing the oven door.

1 There shall be no burning or deformation of the plastic cover on the side and the plastic
bottom plate under the door.
2 The insulation material shall be curved outward.
3 There shall be no noticeable dent on the outer periphery of the insulation material.
4 There shall be no rattle or deformation of the door.

If any deformation or abnormality is detected on the plastic cover, immediately discontinue

use of the GC and contact your Shimadzu representative.

No door rattle

No dent on the outer periphery of the

insulation material

No burning, etc.
Curved outward

310 GC-2010 Plus

1919.1
19 Troubleshooting
. Troubleshooting
19.1

This section describes possible problems, causes and solutions. They are divided by analytical
procedure.
If the problem is not solved by following the recommended solutions, or if other problems occur,
contact your shimadzu representative.

19.1.1 Gas and pressure settings

19.1.1.1 When the pressure/flow rate cannot be set or does not reach the set value
19.1.1.2 Continual gas leaks
19.1.2 Temperature control
19.1.2.1 When the temperature does not increase or reach the set value
19.1.3 Detector
19.1.3.1 FID
1. The FID flame does not ignite properly
2. The FID baseline is fluctuating
3. Baseline noise is high
19.1.3.2 TCD
1. The detector can not be zeroed
2. Fluctuating baseline
3. Baseline noise is high
19.1.4 Chromatogram and data
19.1.4.1 No peaks or extremely small peaks
19.1.4.2 Presence of ghost peaks
19.1.4.3 Abonormal peak shape
19.1.4.4 Poor retention time reproducibility
19.1.4.5 Poor peak area reproducibility
19.1.5 GC display
19.1.5.1 Battery voltage error is shown

GC-2010 Plus 311

 19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Troubleshooting

19.1.1 Gas and pressure settings

19.1.1.1 When the pressure/flow rate cannot be set or does not attain the set value
Possible Cause Solution
No gas is supplied. Open gas cylinder main valve to supply gas.
Set carrier gas supply pressure to 300 to 980 kPa.
Hydrogen: 300 to 500 kPa
Supply pressure is low.
Air: 300 to 500 kPa
Makeup gas: 300 to 980 kPa
Check for gas leaks, and tighten leaking connections.
Replace gasket or septum.
Gas leaks
(Refer to "2.6 Gas supply plumbing" in the Instruction
Manual.)
AFC/APC: Incorrect valve set. Set pressure to proper value.
Set value is outside controllable range. (Refer to "3 AFC, APC" in the Instruction Manual.)
Set carrier gas type, column length, inner diameter
and film thickness correctly.
Carrier gas type, column length, inner diameter and
(Refer to “12.5.2” and "12.6.2 Setting the flow rate"
film thickness are incorrect.
and "12.5.3 Setting column parameters" in the
Instruction Manual.)
Total flow rate is set too low, and pressure cannot
increase. Increase the total flow rate.
(In this case, measured flow rate of split vent is (Refer to "3 AFC, APC" in the Instruction Manual.)
extremely low.)
Split vent trap is clogged.
Replace trap.
(Even if total flow rate is set high, the measured flow
(Refer to "18.8 Inspection and Maintenance: Flow
rate from the split vent is low and the pressure is
Controller" )
high.)

19.1.1.2 Continual gas leaks

Possible Cause Solution
Install part correctly.
Part is incorrectly installed. (Refer to "2.6 Gas supply plumbing" in the Instruction
Manual.)
Graphite ferrule or other seal is damaged. Replace damaged gasket part with a new one.

If tubing or connections are damaged, replace them.

If the problem can not be solved, contact your shimadzu representative.

312 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Troubleshooting

19.1.2 Temperature control

19.1.2.1 When the temperature does not increase or reach the set value
Possible Cause Solution
GC has not started yet.
Press [SYSTEM] key, and press [Start GC] (PF
(Press [SYSTEM] key to display GC startup
menu).
procedure screen.)
Heater control is set to “Off” Set control to “On” on COL/INJ/DET setup screen.
Set start time to a lower value.
Because start time is set to a high value (or “9999”),
(Note: Immediately after this setup value is changed,
heating has not started yet.
the new value is in effect.)
Heat loss is being coused by an open oven door or Close the oven door.
insulation out of place. Replace the insulation.
Because maximum temperature is set to a very low
Increase the maximum temperature setting.
value, an overheat error has occured.
Because DET actual temperature is lower than the
set value of COL temperature. (According to keep
Set DET temperature larger than COL temperature.
the detector clean, column oven temperature can not
exceed DET actual temperarture.)

Only an oven with the CRG option can attain a temperature below room temperature.
The lower temperature setting may cause an error if the CRG option is removed or
turned off. Change the temperature setting.

19.1.3 Detector
19.1.3.1 FID
1. The FID flame does not ignite properly
Possible Cause Solution
Column is not connected. Connect the column.
Hydrogen gas is not supplied or its flow rate is incor- Supply hydrogen gas, or set its flow rate to a proper
rect. value.
Hydrogen gas has not been flowing long enough to Wait for 30 to 60 minutes to allow the air to be
replace the air in the tubing. completely replaced with hydrogen.
Air is not supplied or its flow rate is incorrect. Supply air, or set its flow rate to a proper value.

Refer to "18.9 Inspection and Maintenance: FID", and inspect the FID.
If a jet is clogged, clean or replace it.
A defective lgnitor filament must be replaced.

WARNING
If the FID ignition has failed, shut off the hydrogen gas supply
immediately and inspect the FID.

GC-2010 Plus 313

 19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Troubleshooting

2. The FID baseline is fluctuating

Possible Cause Solution
Tighten leaking connections.
Replace tubing or septum.
Carrier gas leaks.
(Refer to "2.6 Gas supply plumbing" in Instruction
Manual.)
Replace gas with higher purity gas.
Carrier gas or make up gas quality is poor.
Provide a molecular sieve filter in the gas flow line.
Molecular sieve filter is saturated. Recondition the molecular sieve filter.
Inspect the glass insert. Clean or replace the glass
insert.
Injection port is contaminated.
(Refer to "18.5 Inspection and Maintenance: Glass
Insert" in Instruction Manual.)
Install a silica gel trap on either end of the pressure
Compressed air is contaminated (the baseline
regulator.
fluctuates according to the compressor pressure).
Use air from a gas cylinder instead (with the FID on).
Hydrogen gas has not been flowing long enough to Wait for 30 to 60 minutes to allow the air to be
replace the air in the tubing. completely replaced with hydrogen.
Keep the room temperature within the recommended
Room temperature is not within the recommended
range and move the system away from heat or A/C
range and/or is fluctuating considerably.
vents, etc.

3. Baseline noise is high

Possible Cause Solution
Replace carrier gas with higher purity gas.
Carrier gas quality is poor. Provide a molecular sieve filter in the carrier gas flow
line.
Hydrogen gas quality is poor. Replace hydrogen gas with higher purity gas.
Check the leak in injection port and column
Gas leaks connection area.
Tighten leaking connectors.
The quartz jet is dirty. Inspect, clean, or replace the jet.

If the jet is damaged, replace it. If the collector is coated with white powder, contact your
shimadzu representative for replacement.

19.1.3.2 TCD
1. The detector cannot be zeroed
Possible Cause Solution
Data processing unit is not connected properly. Connect them properly.
Current is “Off” Turn the current on.
Current value is too high. Set current to a lower value.

Turning on the TCD current when oxygen is present in the cell can oxidize or blow out
the filament, making it impossible to zero the detestor. If the filament blows out, the cell
must be replaced; contact your Shimadzu reprensentative.

314 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Troubleshooting

2. Fluctuating baseline
Possible Cause Solution
Tighten leaking connections.
Replace tubing or septum.
Carrier gas or make up gas leaks.
(Refer to “2.6 Gas supply plumbing” in Instruction
Manual)
Replace gas with higher purity gas.
Carrier gas or make up gas quality is poor.
Provide a molecular sieve filter in the gas flow line.
Current value is too high. Reduce the current.
Injection port (glass insert or silica wool) or column is Clean or replace glass insert.
dirty. Condition column.
Condition cell.*
Cell is dirty.
Make several solvent injections.
Keep the room temperature within the commended
Temperature in room where system is installed
range and reduce fluctuation of the room
deviates from the commended range and/or
temperature by making sure that system is not
considerably fluctuating.
directly exposed to air conditioner wind etc.

* Cell conditioning procedure

1 Remove the column and seal the detector by
Detector
installing a new graphite ferrule (with its wire)
in the column nut.
2 Set the current value to “0 mA”. Thermal
insulation
3 Begin makeup gas flow (at the flow rate used cup
in analysis).
4 Set the detector temperature 30 °C higher
New graphite ferrule
than the analysis temperature. with a wire
(However, the detector temperature cannot
exceed 400 °C, the maximum operating
temperature.) Column nut

The conditioning time varies depending on

the degree of contamination, but is approximately 1 to 12 hours.

The baseline may fluctuate because the temperature of a heated zone or the flow rate is
not stable. Check the monitor display. If this problem occurs, contact your Shimadzu
representative.

3. Baseline noise is high

Possible Cause Solution
Sufficiently purge air inside flow lines.
Replace tubing.
Carrier gas or makeup gas is contaminated.
Use higher purity gas.
Provide a molecular sieve filter in the gas flow line.
Check for leaks in injection port and column
Gas leaks.
connection area. Tighten leaking connectors.
Current value is too high. Reduce the current.
Makeup gas flow rate too low. Increase flow rate.

Excessively high current can damage the filament and cause significant noise. Contact
your Shimadzu representative for ceel replacement.

GC-2010 Plus 315

 19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Troubleshooting

19.1.4 Chromatogram and data

19.1.4.1 No peaks or extremely small peaks
Peaks may not be able to be detected because of high noise.
Refer to 19.1.3.1.3 and 19.1.3.2.3, “baseline noise is high.”

FID detector
Possible Cause Solution
Carrier gas is not flowing. Start carrier gas flow.
Carrier gas leaks. Tighten leaking connectors.
Split ratio is too high. (for split analysis). Reduce split ratio.
Sample concentration is low. Or injection volume is
Increase sample concentration or injection volume.
too low.
Replace existing column with one appropriate for the
Wrong column is used.
compounds analyzed (more polar, less polar, etc.)
Column temperature is too low. Increase column temperature.
Signal cable of detector is connected incorrectly. Connect signal cable correctly.
Detector is set to “Off”. Set detector to “On”.
Detector parameter have been is set incorrectly. Increase range and attenuation sensitivity.
Hydrogen flame is extinguished. Check hydrogen/air flow rate, then ignite.
Press “MONIT” key then press “ZERO Adj” (PF
Zero level far below “0”.
menu) to execute zero point adjustment.
Another analytical condition, such as temperature or
Change the analytical conditions.
column flow rate is incorrect.

If the jet or the cable is damaged, contact your Simadzu repretetative for replacement.

TCD detector
Possible Cause Solution
Range is not “×1”. Set range to “×1”.
Increase current setting.
Current set value is too low. (Decrease TCD thermostatic oven temperature, and
increase maximum working current.)
Set it to the proper value.
Makeup gas flow rate is too high. He: Approx. 7.5 mL/min
N2: Approx. 8.0 mL/min
Split ratio is too high (for split analysis). Decrease split ratio.
Check for injection port and column connection
Carrier gas leaks.
leaks. Tighten leaking connector.
Capillary column is installed incorrectly. Install column correctly.
Column is contaminated. Condition column.
Sample concentration is low. Or injection volulme is
Increase sample concentration or injection volume.
too low.
Replace existing column with one appropriate for the
Wrong column is used.
compounds analyzed (more polar, less polar, etc.)
Another analytical condition, such as temperature or
Change the analytical conditions.
column flow rate is incorrect.

316 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Troubleshooting

19.1.4.2 Presence of ghost peaks

Possible Cause Solution
Septum purge is not flowing. Flow septum purge.
Increase column oven temperature to maximum
Peaks which did not elute during previous analysis is
temperature in analysis to eliminate sample
detected.
remaining inside column.
Sample is contaminated. Prepare sample newly.
Micro syringe is dirty. Clean micro syringe. Or replace it with a new one.
Replace carrier gas with one of higher purity. Provide
Carrier gas purity is low.
molecular sieve filter in carrier gas flow line.
Substances of high boiling point accumulated at Condition column.
column inlet end are flowing out. Chip the injection port end of the column.
Clean or replace glass insert.
Injection port is dirty. (Refer to "18.5 Inspection and Maintenance: Glass
Insert" in Instruction Manual.)
Tubing, pressure regulator, etc. are contaminated Replace tubing, pressure regulator, etc. with clean
with oil, etc. ones.
Septum chips are present inside glass insert or Clean or replace glass insert.Fold tip of capillary
column. column, and take off folded portion.

19.1.4.3 Abnormal peak shape

Fronting(leading) : The peak increases slowly. The first half peak area is higher.
Tailing : Once the peak has eluted, the baseline does not immediately return
to its zero level. The secoud half paek area is higher.

Time Time
Fronting Tailing

Possible Cause Solution

Dilute sample.
Fronting: the column
Decrease injection volume, or increase split ratio.
Column is overloaded.
Use a column with a greater film thickness.
Change an analysis condition.
Peaks are co-eluting
Replace column to obtain better separation.
Tailing, fronting
Increase injection port temperature.
Injection port temperature is low.
Condition column.
Tailing
(Refer to "18.7 Inspection and Maintenance: Capil-
Column is contaminated.
lary Column" in Instruction Manual.)
Replace glass insert.
Tailing
(Refer to "18.5 Inspection and Maintenance: Glass
Glass insert is damaged.
Insert" in Instruction Manual.)
Verify septum purge flow.
Tailing
Increase septum purge flow rate.
Septum purge is not flowing or is too low.
(Refer to "3 AFC, APC" in Instruction Manual.)
Tailing
Clean or replace glass insert. Clip the injection port
Septum fragments are present inside glass insert or
end of the column.
column.

GC-2010 Plus 317

 19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Troubleshooting

19.1.4.4 Poor retention time reproducibility

Possible Cause Solution
Replace the gas cylinder with one of at least 3 MPa
The carrier gas cylinder is almost empty.
pressure.
Tighten leaking connections.
Carrier gas flow rate is fluctuating due to a gas leak.
Replace tubing or septum.
Decrease sample size.
Dilute sample.
Column is overloaded.
Increase split ratio.
Use a column with a thicker film.
Room temperature is not within the recommended Keep the room temperature within the recommended
range or is considerably fluctuating. range or reduce temperature fluctuations.
Syringe tip is clogged, and sample is not properly
Clean or replace syringe.
injected.

If the gas supply pressure is fluctuating due to failure of the gas cylinder pressure
regulator, repair or replace it. Contact your Shimadzu representative.

19.1.4.5 Poor peek area reproducibility

Possible Cause Solution
Replace the gas cylinder with one of at least 3 MPa
The carrier gas cylinder is almost empty.
pressure.
Tighten leaking connections.
Carrier gas flow rate is fluctuating due to a gas leak.
Replace tubing.
Perform injections accurately.
Sample is not injected completely.
Replace the syringe with a new one.
Decrease sample size.
Dilute sample.
Column is overloaded.
Increase split ratio.
Use a column with a thicker film.
Room temperature is not within the recommanded Keep the room temperature within the recommended
range or is considerably fluctuating. range or reduce temperature fluctuations.
Syringe tip is clogged, and sample cannot be aspicated
Clean or replace syringe.
well.
Syringe tip is clogged, and sample is not property
Clean or replace syringe.
injected.
Syringe plunger is stiff, and does not move Clean syringe barrel and plunger.
smoothly. Clean or replace syringe.
Silica wool inside glass insert is packed incorrectly. Re-pack the silica wool.

If the gas supply pressure is fluctuating due to failure of the gas sylinder pressure regu-
lator, repair or replace it. Contact your Shimadzu representative.

318 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Troubleshooting

19.1.5 GC display (In cases where in the setting screen is reinitialized

each time power is turned on)

For GC-2010 plus, various analysis conditions are stored, and during installation
environmental settings are set by our field engineer and stored in the GC’s memory. When
the power of the GC main unit is turned off, these parameters are backed up in the memory
by the built-in battery (CPU battery). However, because the CPU battery is a consumable,
the supplied voltage decreases with long-term use.
The battery life / replacement frequency for the CPU battery life is about 5 years. The error
message "Battery voltage error" will be displayed when the battery is exhausted. If you
continue to use the GC in this state, the memory will be initialized at startup and all
parameters, including analysis conditions, will be reset to the initial values; this will be shown
in English on the GC display. In such an event, you will need to reconfigure all parameters
such as GC environmental setting parameters and analysis conditions.
For this reason, we suggest as a rough guide, to replace the batteries every five years.
Please contact our sales office, distributor or service representative. We will assign a field
engineer to visit your location.

19.1.5.1 Battery voltage error is shown

Possible Cause Solution
When battery replacement of the CPU is required,
Voltage drop of CPU battery.
contact our business office or a sales representative.

GC-2010 Plus 319

1919.2
19 Troubleshooting
. 19.2Error Messages

The system is programmed to diagnosis certain errors. When an error is detected, an alarm
sounds and one of the error messages shown below is displayed. The detected errors are
recorded in the “Error Log”.
When confirmation screens are shown select one of the following actions:
Resets the system parameters, restoring the conditions prior to the
Reset Error error. System control resumes. Remove the cause of the error before
selecting “reset”.
Ignore Error Keep the system as it is. Check for the error to resolve it.
The codes provided with the errors help the service representative identify the errors.
Provide the code when calling about an error. These codes are also recorded in the error log.

NOTE When the system cannot be started due to an abnormality in the ROM, the messages below are
displayed. The error does not have any error code.

Rom Error Please call a service person.

Rom Error (Fatal) Please call a service person.

When these messages are displayed, the system cannot be used. Turn off the power of the system
and contact your Shimadzu representative.

19.2.1 System errors

Power supply failure
Code Message CS Note
1 DC 5 V is out of range No
2 DC 24 V is out of range No
3 DC -15 V is out of range No
4 DC 24 V (FTD) is out of range No

PCB failure
Code Message CS Note
7-10 DET#n PCB error No n=1-4
11-12 CARm AFC PCB error No m=1-2
13-16 Det APCn PCB error No n=1-4
17-19 CARx AMC PCB error No x=1-3
20-22 CARx WBI PCB error No x=1-3
a-b= 1-3, 4-6, 7-9, 10-12,
23-28 APC a-b PCB error No
13-15, 16-18

A/D converter failure

Code Message CS Note
30 COL A/D conv. error No
31 INJ1 - DET2 A/D error No
32 AUX1 - AUX3 A/D error No

320 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

Feed back loop communication error

Code Message CS Note
33 Loop back test error No

If the above error messages appear, the hardware has failed. The GC system cannot be used in
the event of these total errors. Turn off the the system, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

Room temperature sensor/atmospheric pressure sensor error.

Code Message CS Note
5 Room temperature is out of range Yes
6 Atm. pressure is out of range Yes

The room temperature or the atmospheric pressure is out of the AFC performance range.
If this error occurs although the actual room temperature/atmospheric pressure is within the
range, the AFC sensors may have faild. The system cannot be used. Turn off the system,
and contact your Shimadzu representative.

Low voltage of CPU board battery

Code Message CS Note
34 Battery voltage error Yes

The CPU battery is exhausted and needs to be replaced. Please contact a Shimadzu sales
representative.
If you continue to use the GC in this state, the memory will be initialized at startup and all
parameters, including analysis conditions, will be reset to the initial values.
For this reason, we suggest as a rough guide, to replace the batteries every five years.
Please contact our sales office, distributor or service representative. We will assign a field
engineer to visit your location.

Cooling fan error

Code Message CS Note
35 Cooling fan error No

The GC cooling fan is out of order. Turn off the system, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

Damaged in electronics
Code Message CS Note
36 ROM error No
37 RAM error No
38 CPU register error No

Clock reset
Code Message CS Note
29 Clock is initialized No

The built-in clock has reset. As a result, other saved parameters may have changed. Check the
installation, temperature and flow rate settings. Initialize the parameters or reset them if necessary.
if the same message is displayed repeatedly, the hardware has failed. The system cannot be
used. Turn off the system, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

GC-2010 Plus 321

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

19.2.2 Operations errors

Value outside of range was entered
Code Message CS Note
5001 Input parameter out of range No

The numeric value entered is out of the valid range. Enter a valid number.

File operation errors

Code Message CS Note
5002 Invalid file no. No
5003 This file is now used No
5004 File initialize failure No
5005 File can’t be copied No

These messages appear when an incorrect file operation was attempted.

Press another key, and continue operation.

Overflow of calculated pressure value

Code Message CS Note
5006-5008
CARx calc. prss out of range No x=1-3
5070-5072

The carrier gas pressure calculated from the linear velocity, the flow rate or the split ratio.
You have input is outside the set range. Change the conditions so that the pressure is within
the set range, and enter the new value.

Overflow of calculated flow rate value

Code Message CS Note
5009-5011 CARx calc. flow out of range No x=1-3

The carrier gas total flow rate calculated from the split ratio or the pressure you have input is
outside the set range. Change the conditions, and enter a new value.

Overflow of calculated APC pressure value

Code Message CS Note
5012, 5015
n=1-4
5018, 5021 MUPn calc. prss out of range No
make up gas
5045-5048
5013, 5016 n=1-4
HGNn calc. prss out of range No
5019, 5022 Hydrogen
5014, 5017 n=1-4
AIRn calc. prss out of range No
5020, 5023 Air
5024-5041 y=1-18
APCy calc. prss out of range No
5049-5066 AUX APC
5042-5044 x=1-3
PURx calc. prss out of range No
5067-5069 septum purge

The pressure calculated from the flow rate you have input is outside the set range. Change
the conditions, and enter a new value.

322 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

Overflow of calculated flow rate value in programs

Code Message CS Note
5073, 5074
CAR m calc.flow out of range No m=1-2
5077, 5078
5075, 5076 CAR m calc.ratio out of range No m=1-2

The carrier gas total flow rate calculated from the split ratio program you have input is out-
side the set range.

19.2.3 Optional device error (AOC-20i/s)

Code Message CS Note

6001, 6023 AOCm rack error No
6002, 6024 AOCm syringe error No
6003, 6025 AOCm plunger error No
6004, 6026 AOCm can not start No
6005, 6027 AOCm RAM initialized No
6006, 6028 AOCm ROM error No
6007, 6029 AOCm CH2 command error No
6008, 6030 AOCm sample vial is not set No
6009, 6031 AOCm RAM error No
6010, 6032 AOCm installation error No
6011, 6033 AOCm CH1 error No m=1-2
1: Main AOC,
6012, 6034 AOCm CH2 error No 2: SUB AOC
6013, 6035 AOCm waste vial is not set No
6014 AOC-20s rotating error No
6015 AOC-20s exp. and ctrl. Error No
6016 AOC-20s up/down error No
6017 AOC-20s can not start No
6018 AOC-20s vial setting error No
6019 AOC-20s vial returning error No
6020 AOC-20s holding error No
6021 AOC-20s sample vial removed No
6022 AOC-20s vial is not set No
One of the these messages appear when an error has occurred in the AOC-20i auto injector
or the AOC-20s auto sampler.
For details, refer to the AOC-20 User’s Manual.

GC-2010 Plus 323

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

19.2.4 Communication errors

External device communication error (i.e., Chromatopac)
Code Message CS Note
4001 Time out No
4002 Parity error No
4003 Message is not accepted No
4004 Data is invalid No
4005 Command is invalid No
4006 Data is out of range No
4007 TRS port is shut down No
4008 TRS file error No

One of these messages appear during a link failure or communication failure. (When a
communication error occurs, the link is automatically disconnected.)
When one of these messages appear, check the connection status, and reset the link.

AOC communication errors

Code Message CS Note
4009 AOC command is invalid No
4010 AOC data is out of range No
4011 AOC time out No
4012 AOC2 TRS error No
4013 AOC link error No

One of these messages appear during a link failure or communication failure.(When a

communication error occurs, the link is automatically disconnected.)
When one of these messages appear, check the connection status, and reset the link.

19.2.5 Detector errors

Over current
Code Message CS Note
4101-4104 DET#n TCD cell error Yes n=1-4
4105-4108 DET#n FTD current error Yes n=1-4

Abnormal detector current.

If the resistance of the filament becomes abnormally high when the TCD or the FTD is in
use, the protection circuit is actuated to prevent damage to the filament, and an alarm
sounds.
If either error has occurred, turn off the system.
Possible reasons for the protection circuit to be activated are described below. The current
value set exceeds the maximum operating current.
The makeup gas is not flowing.
A gas leak has occurred.
A significant amount of air is present in the flow line (for TCD).
Remove the cause of error, then turn on the system.
If the system does not recover after several resets, or the reason for the error cannot be
located, contact your Shimadzu representative.

324 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

Detecher flame error

Code Message CS Note
4109-4112 DET#n flame is out No n=1-4

The detector flame (FID) has been extinguished.

Check the gas supply, and ingnite the detector again.
If the flame error occurs repeatedly, the hardware has failed. The system cannot be used.
Turn off the system, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

FPD errors
Code Message CS Note
4113-4116 DET#n FPD Battery error Yes
4117-4120 DET#n FPD temperature error Yes
n=1-4
4121-4124 DET#n FPD cooling fan error Yes
4125-4128 DET#n FPD current error Yes

FPD operation is abnormal. Refer to FPD User’s Manual.

If ERROR 4125-4128 occures, turn off the system.
Otherwise, the system status can not be restored.

TCD errors
Code Message CS Note
4201 TCD signal is out of range No
4202 TCD signal zero error No

The difference in filament resistance is high between the TCD cells, and the detector cannot
be zeroed.
The detector control unit may have failed.
The system cannot be used. Turn off the system, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

Detector ignition errors

Code Message CS Note
4203-4206 DET#n ignition failed No n=1-4

This message appears when the FID does not ignite within a certain time.
When the message appears, hydorogen gas flow does not stop automatically for manual
flow control.
Shut off the hydrogen gas first for safety, then check the following items.
(1) The column is connected
(2) Hydrogen is supplied at proper flow rate
(3) Air is supplied at proper flow rate
(4) Filament in igniter is intact
(5) The jet in the FID is not clogged
(6) Unused FID is not set to On

Code Message CS Note

4207 H2, AIR APC are not ready No

This message appears when the APC for hydrogen or air is not Ready at the time of ignition.
Check whether the gas supply pressure is stable and whether gas does not leak.
If there is not problem with the gas supply, the hardwere has failed. Turn off the system, and
contact your Shimadzu representative.

GC-2010 Plus 325

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

19.2.6 Other errors

Code Message CS Note

4301 Settings were changed No
This message appears when a set value was changed while the program is running. If the
paramenter or event has not yet been executed, the new value is used for the analysis.

Code Message CS Note

4302 Program time is over No
4303 Clean up time is over No
4304 Pre-run prog. time is over No

This message appears when the program execution time exceeds the maximum allowable
value (9999.99 min). Change the program so that its total execution time does not exceed
“9999.99 min”.
The program continues running after this error occurs, and stops at 9999.99 min.
Temperature control errors
Code Message CS Note
1001 Heat is escaping Yes

This message appears when large heat loss is occurring. The oven door may be open, or
the insulation may not be in place.
If the column over door is open, close it and select “Reset Error”.
If the insulation has been disturbed, replace the insulation, and then restart the system..
Code Message CS Note
xxx= COL, INJ1, DET1,
1002-1009 xxx temp exceed the limit Yes INJ2, DET2, AUX3,
AUX4, AUX5

This message appears when the maximum temperature limit has been exceeded. Change
the maximam limit temperature if necessary.

Temperature sensor errors

Code Message CS Note
1010-1017 xxx sensor is short circuit Yes xxx= COL, INJ1, DET1,
1018-1025 xxx sensor is down Yes INJ2, DET2, AUX3,
1026-1033 xxx sensor is error Yes AUX4, AUX5

When one of these messages appear, the temperature sensor may have failed.
The sensor cannot be used. Replace or repair it. Turn off the system, and contact your
Shimadzu representative.

326 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

Unstable temperature with CRG

Code Message CS Note
1034 COL CRG cannot be controlled Yes
1035 INJ2 CRG cannot be controlled Yes

This message appears when the column over or the INJ2 cannot be cooled down because
the column oven door remains open or insufficient coolant (also for INJ2) is preventing the
oven CRG from cooling.
If the column oven door is open, close it and select “Reset Error”.
Turn off the system, replace the coolant, and then restart the system.

Overheat
Code Message CS Note
Overheat detected by
1036 Overheat is sensed Yes
thermocouple
xxx=COL, INJ1, DET1,
1037-1044 xxx temp controller broken Yes INJ2, DET2, AUX3,
AUX4, AUX5

An error may have occurred in the temperature control circuit.

Turn off the system, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

Relay/heater control errors

Code Message CS Note
1045 COL relay error No
1046 INJ1-DET2 relay error No
1047 AUX3-AUX5 relay error No
1048 Heater controller error No

An error may have occurred in the control circuit. Turn off the system, and contact your
Shimadzu representative.
Code Message CS Note
1049-1052 DET#n set temp is low No n=1-4

This message appears when the Detector temperature setting value is smaller than that of
the Oven.
If this message appears, change the setting value of the Detector temperature.
If set the setting of Protection against contamination to “No”, need not to change the setting
value of the Detector temperature. (Refer to 16.6.4.3)

GC-2010 Plus 327

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

Pressure/flow rate control errors

Code Message CS Note
2005-2007 CARx purge leaks Yes x=1-3
2014, 2017
DetAPC n makeup gas leaks Yes
2020, 2023
2015, 2018
DetAPC n hydrogen leaks Yes n=1-4
2021, 2024
2016, 2018
DetAPC n air leaks Yes
2022, 2025
2026-2043 APC y leaks Yes y=1-18

The prressure cannot reach the set value. Check whether gas is supplied and whether gas
is leaking from connections.
NOTE Gas leaks may be occurring in several locations.
(Example) If the purge flow rate is too low,the message “Purge leaks” may appear. If the carrier gas is
also leaking, the ESC or TFC error message may not be displayed first.

Pressure/flow rate control errors (valve leak error)

Code Message CS Note
2048-2050 CARx purge valve leaks Yes x=1-3
2057, 2060
DetAPC n makeup valve leaks Yes
2063, 2066
2058, 2061
DetAPC n hydrogen valve leaks Yes n=1-4
2064, 2067
2059, 2062
DetAPC n air valve leaks Yes
2065, 2068
2069-2086 APC y valve leaks Yes y=1-18
2132, 2133 CAR m AFC valve leaks Yes m=1-2

Gas is flowing even though the set value is 0 kPa (or ml/min).
If gases are supplied, an AFC/APC valve error may have occurred.
Turn off the system, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

Abnormal component operation

Code Message CS Note
2091-2093 CARx purge is out of control Yes x=1-3
2100, 2103
DetAPCn makeup gas is out of control Yes
2106, 2109
2101, 2104
DetAPCn hydrogen is out of control Yes n=1-4
2107, 2110
2102, 2105
DetAPCn air is out of control Yes
2108, 2111
2112-2129 APCy is out of control Yes y=1-18
2130, 2131 CARm AFC leaks Yes
m=1-2
2134-2137 CARm AFC is out of control Yes
2138-2140 CARx prim is out of range No x=1-3

Verify whether a continuous supply of gas is available at the required pressure.

If there is no problem in the gas supply, the control system, such as the APC, may have
failed.

328 GC-2010 Plus

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

Turn off the system, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

Code Message CS Note
2141, 2142 CARm is not controlled No m=1-2

This message appears when the temperature control starts without carrier gas control.
If this message appears, set the setting of the flow controller to “On” or remove the flow con-
troller from the line configuration.

19.2.7 Warning messages

Code Message CS Note

9000 COL CRG use time is over No
9001 INJ2 CRG use time is over No
9002 Fan use time is over Yes
9003 LCD backlight use time is over Yes
9004-9006 CARx septum counter is over No
x=1-3
9007-9009 CARx insert counter is over No
xxx=COL, INJ1, DET1,
9012-9019 xxx sensor use time warning Yes INJ2, DET2, AUX3,
AUX4, AUX5

These message appear when the time or the count exceed the set value, but does not
indicate any error. Refer to "14 Diagnosis", and clear the message.
In case of “Fan use time is over”, “LCD back light use time over” and “xxx sensor use time
warning”,Turn off the power, and contact your Shimadzu representative.

Code Message CS Note

9010 System is not ready No

This message appears when the analysis was started before it was ready. Normally, do not
start the analysis until the system is ready.
If this message appears when all the parameters are ready, check the ready setting for
unused components and check the equilibration time.

Code Message CS Note

9011 Ignition finished(retried) No

Ignition sequence was re-attempted, because the ignition failed initially.

This does not affect the analysis. If this massage appears frequently, check “DETECTOR
IGNITE” and “DETECTOR IGNITION” by the standard diagnosis procedure.
Also check for gas leaks and verify the gas flow rates. If set values are correct, contact your
Shimadzu representative.

GC-2010 Plus 329

 19 Troubleshooting
19.2 Error Messages

This page is intentionally left blank.

330 GC-2010 Plus

2020.1
20 Appendix
. Key Function List
20.1

The parameter related to start and stop of the GC can be set. And on
SYSTEM the sub screen, the file management, the clean up and the
maintenance of injection port can be set.

The parameters which are frequently set can be set. And on the
SET screen of [LineConfg], the combination of injection ports,
detectors,etc. can be changed.

The status of the injection port, the column, the detector configured
MONIT
and the chromatogram etc. in each line can be monitored.

COL The oven temperature or the oven temperature program can be set.

INJ The injection port temperature can be set.

The parameters of the AFC which controls the pressure and the flow
FLOW
rate of the carrier gas can be set.

The detector temperature, the deterctor gas flow rate, the detector
DET
signal output,etc. can be set.

OPTION
The Auto Injector AOC-20i and the Auto Sampler AOC-20s used to
AOC parameters automatically inject liquid sample to the gas chromatograph can be set.

AUX Temp The AUX Temp (option) can be set.

AUX APC The AUX APC (option) can be set.

CRG The CRG (option) can be set.

DIAG
Diagnose each part of the gas chromatograph to check for
1. Standard abnormality.
Diagnosis By executing standard diagnosis periodically, the system can be
managed and the failures can be prevented.

2. Log Reading 1. GC operation Display the power On/Off log and the system On/Off log.
Menu Log

Display the log on whether analysis was executed to the end and
2. Analysis Log
whether the control was not deviated from the target value.

3. Parameter
Display the key operation log and the parameter change log.
Log

4. Error Log Display the log of displayed error messages.

5. Diagnostic
Display the diagnosis log.
Log

3. Analysis The replacement timing of the septum or the glass insert can be
Countur displayed as an warning message.

The total time that the CRG is "On" can be confirmed. If the
4. Coolant
consumption counter is larger than the time of setting to warm, the
Consumption
warning message is displayed.

GC-2010 Plus 331

 20 Appendix
20.1 Key Function List

FUNC

1. Time The key operations of the gas chromatograph can be automated by

Scheduler setting the weekly or daily schedule using the timer.

Use to continuously and automatically perform analysis with auto

2. Batch injector.

3. Time Program Use time program when the parameter is changed during analysis.

Use Pre-Run program when the parameter is changed before

4. Pre-Pun
analysis is started.

5. Direct
Input the event No. and run at once.
Operation

6. GC 1. Date/Time
Use to set tha date and the time.
Configuration Setting
2. Max.
Use to set the maximum temperature of each heater ports.
Temperature

3. Transmission
Use to set the parameter related to transmission.
Parameter

Use to set the items, which should be satisfied to light the STATUS
4. Ready Check
indicator lamp and make the system ready.

Use to set the signals, which can be output from the gas
5. Signal Setting
chromatograph.

6. Port Name Use to change heater ports name, carrier ports name, AUX APC
Customization name, relay name displayed on the screen.

7. Link Device
Use to set the link device code when using it.
Code

8. Temperature
Use to set the temperature offset for each heater port.
Offset
9. Other
Configuration Use to set the language and the beep etc.

7. Service/
Use to set the flow controller or initialize etc.
Maintenance

8. Stop Watch The stop watch can be used.

9. Lock The key locking and the parameter locking can be used.

332 GC-2010 Plus

 21 Index
A Control of AFC 36
Coolant Consumption Counter 192
AFC 33, 35 COUNTER FOR INSERT 177
Aluminum gaskets 288 COUNTER FOR SEPTUM 177
ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE 152, 163 CPU 178
Analysis counter 190 CPU REGISTOR 177
Analysis flow 65 CRG 211
Analysis log 185 CRG USE TIME 177
AOC 197 CURRENT 162
AOC commands 279 CURRENT FILE 72
AOC status 197, 222 cursor 59
APC 33, 35, 40 Cursor key 53, 54
ATMOSPHERIC COMPENSATION 256
ATMOSPHERIC PRESS 177 D
Auto extinguishment 155
Auto ignit 72 DATE 241
Auto Injector 197 day 214
automatic ignition 153 DC voltage 177
automatic re-ignition 153 DET key 54, 151, 161
AUX APC 33, 40, 207 DET SIG SUBTRACTION 152, 163
Detector 3, 149
B Detector ADC registor 177
DETECTOR CONTROLLER 151, 161
back flush 138 detector gas 156, 165
BACK LIGHT AUTO OFF 255 Detector gas flow controller 4
BACKGROUND SIG COMP. 152, 163 Detector HV source 177
BACKGROUND SIG. SAVE 152, 163 DETECTOR IGNITE 178
Batch Schedule 222 DETECTOR IGNITION 178
BAUD RATE 243 Detector ROM 177
BUZZER 256 detector signals 247
DETECTOR TEMP 85
DIAG key 53, 54, 175
C Diagnostic log 189
Dimension 4
Capillary column 301
Direct injection system 111
carrier gas flow control unit 4
Direct Operation 239
CARRIER GAS TYPE 127
Display 4
CE key 53, 54
Drift 245
Changing a name 61
Chng Graph 97
chromatogram 95 E
chromatopac signal cable 28
Clean up 72, 74 ECD 149
Clear key 54 ECD frequency 178
COL CRG auto off 258 ENTER key 53, 54
COL key 54, 105 Entering numeric values 60
Column film thickness 128 EQUILIBRATION TIME 106
Column flow rate 34, 84, 125 Error log 188
column hanger 49 Error Message 320
Column inlet pressure 34 ESC 35, 36
Column inner diameter (I.D.) 34, 128 Event No 283
Column length 34, 128
Column outlet pressure 34 F
Column oven 2, 84
Consumables 5 Fan Off 106
Control mode 38, 85, 126 Fan On 106

GC-2010 Plus 333

 Index
F-O

Fan Stop Temp. 258 Injection port 2, 111

FAN USE TIME 177 INJECTION PORT TEMP 85
FID 149, 150 Injection system 111
File 87 INLET PRESS 84, 125
file copy 88 INSTALLATION (PIPING) 263
file initialization 89 INSTALLATION (POSITION) 261
FILE LOAD 79 Installation location requirements 13
Filter time constant 151, 163, 169 Isothermal analysis 107
FLAME 151
FLOW CONTROL 72
J
Flow Controller 303
FLOW key 54, 125 Jet 288, 307
FLOW lamp 53, 56
FLOW OFF TIME 72
Flow rate program 132 K
flow signal 248
Fluoride rubber O-ring 116, 293 Key function list 331
For Split/spiltless injection port 50 Key locking 269
FPD 149
FTD 149 L
FUNC key 53, 54, 213
Fuse 18 LANGUAGE 255
LCD use time 177
G Leak check 26, 118
Linear velocity 34, 84, 125
GAS CONTROL 178 link device code 253
Gas filter 24 Load 87
Gas saver 129 LONGEST PROGRAM TIME 97
Gas Saver AOC link 257
Gas Saver auto on 257 M
GC configuration 240
GC operation log 184 Maint INJ 73
Glass insert 114, 287, 289, 296 Maintenance of FID 306
Graphite ferrule 50, 288, 289, 299 Maintenance Parts 287
Graphite O-ring 116, 293 Make up 157, 166
Manual extinguishment 155
H Molecular sieve filter 288, 289
Molecular sieve filter regeneration 305
Heating generation 17 MONIT key 53, 54, 95
Height equivalent to theoretical plate Monitoring the Flow Rate 99
(HETP) 146 Monitoring the Temperature 98
Help 63
HELP key 53, 54 N
High pressure injection 138
Hydrogen flame ionization detector 150 N/A 182
hydrogen gas 21 N/I 182
N/S 182
I N/T 182
Numeric keys 53, 54
Igniter 288, 306
Ignition procedure 153 O
INITIALIZE 265
INJ key 54, 123 Offset 44, 127, 157, 166

334 GC-2010 Plus

 Index
P-U

On-column injection system 111 Setting the column 128

OPTIMAL FLOW 157, 166 Setting the Output Signals 170
OPTION key 54, 197 Setup value 55
O-ring for glass insert 287, 289 SIGNAL ATTENUATION 152, 163
Oven Temperature 105 SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT 163
OVER TEMP PROTECTION 178 SIGNAL POLARITY 162
SIGNAL RANGE 152, 163
Silica wool 112, 113, 298
P
SLEEP TIME 72
Parameter locking 270 SPC 35
Parameter log 187 Split injection system 111, 122
PARITY 243 Split mode 36, 38, 85, 126
Parts 5 Split ratio 34, 84, 126
password 271 Split ratio program 134
Peak Genarator 196 Splitless auto off 257
PF key 53, 54, 58 Splitless injection system 111, 122
PF menu 58 Splitter fix 138
power cable 16 Standard Diagnosis 175
Power consumption 266 Standard Installation Test 194
Power source 16 START key 53, 54, 102, 103
power supply 4 Start Procedure 78
Pre-Run Program 236 START TIME 72
Pressure program 130 Starting analysis 101
PRESSURE UNIT 255 STATUS lamp 53, 56
Primary press 177, 256 STOP BIT 243
Printing 275 STOP key 53, 54, 103
Programmed analysis 107 Stop Procedure 80
Programmed temperature vaporizer STOP TIME 72
injection system 111 Stop Watch 267
PROTOCOL 243 SYSTEM key 53, 54
PURGE FLOW RATE 84
T
R
TCD 149
RAM 178 TEMP 106, 151, 161
Ready Check 244 TEMP lamp 53, 56
REAL TIME CLOCK REGISTOR 177 TEMP SENSOR DIAG 177
REMAIN TIME 97 TEMP SENSOR USE TIME 177
Reset IC 178, 179 Temperature offset 254
Restart GC 72 Temperature Program 107
Retention time (Rt) 97 temperature signal 247
ROM 178 Terminating the Analysis 103
ROOM TEMPERATURE 177 TFC 34, 35, 36
RS-232C 27, 30 Thermal conductivity detector 160
TIME 241
Time Program 230
S Time Scheduler 213
Toggle key 54, 58
SAMPLING TIME 84, 126 TOTAL FLOW RATE 84, 126
Schedule number 214 Total flow rate 34
Screen 55 Trap (Purge) 288, 303
Septum 120, 287, 289, 290 Trap (Split) 288, 303
Septum purge flow rate 84, 136 Trap inspection 304
SET key 53, 54, 83 Troubleshooting 311

GC-2010 Plus 335

 Index
V-Z

U
UNIT key 53

V
VALVE 212
Viscosity coefficient 34

W
Warning messages 329
WATCH DOG TIMER 178
weight 4

Z
Zero Adj 97, 100
Zero Free 97, 100

336 GC-2010 Plus